Voluson Gev730p PV PRP Kti105992 1 00

GE Medical Systems
Kretz Ultrasound
Technical
Publication
Direction KTI105992
Revision 1
GE Medical Systems - Kretztechnik
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05)
Proprietary Service Manual
• Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems with Serial number A34001 - A34500
A35001 -
• Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems with Software version SW 5.0.0 (or higher)
ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION

PROPERTY OF GE
FOR GE SERVICE PERSONNEL ONLY
NO RIGHTS LICENSED - DO NOT USE OR COPY
DISCLOSURE TO THIRD PARTIES PROHIBITED
0123
Copyright© 2005 by General Electric Co.

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS - KRETZTECHNIK VOLUSON® 730PRO / 730PROV (BT´05)
DIRECTION KTI105992, REVISION 1 PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN
ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT • NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST
ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU
SORGEN.
• VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
WARNUNG KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
i
• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
AVISO CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM

INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
ATENÇÃO • NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVVERTENZA AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
ii -
iii
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 4855 W. Electric Ave (EA-53), Milwaukee, WI 53219.
GE Healthcare employees should use the iTrak System to report all documentation errors or omissions.
iv -
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change

1 July 01, 2005 Initial Release for M3
List of Effected Pages
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision
1 Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Title Page
pages 2-1 to 2-10 1 pages 7-1 to 7-88 1
Important Precautions Chapter 3 - Installation Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures

pages i to iv 1 pages 3-1 to 3-62 1 pages 8-1 to 8-156 1
Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Replacement Parts

pages v to vi 1 pages 4-1 to 4-48 1 pages 9-1 to 9-38 1
Table of Contents Chapter 5 - Theory Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance

pages vii to xxxviii 1 pages 5-1 to 5-100 1 pages 10-1 to 10-32 1
Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index

pages 1-1 to 1-12 1 pages 6-1 to 6-10 1 pages I to VI 1
Back Cover 1
v
vi -
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Mechanical Safety ..........................................1-7
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12
vii Table of Contents

CHAPTER 2
Pre-Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
viii Table of Contents

CHAPTER 3
Installation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Connection of Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Connection of Auxiliary Devices - if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed . . . . 3-8
Connection of Auxiliary Devices - if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed . . . . . . 3-9
Monitor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Foot Switch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
ECG-preamplifier Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Global Modem Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
S-VHS Video Recorder Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Mitsubishi HS-MD3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
Sony SVO-9500MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
B/W Video Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Line Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Digital Color Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Bluetooth Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
External USB-Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21

Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Power Off/ Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Table of Contents ix
Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Transducer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Printer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver . . . . . . . 3 - 27
Installing Bluetooth Printer HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210 . . . . . . 3 - 29
Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software . . 3 - 29
Configuration of the Bluetooth Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
Advanced Bluetooth Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Prepare the Printer and connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter . . . . 3 - 35
Prepare the Color Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
If no Test page is printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
Install the printer software/driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
Printer Installation manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
Adjustment of Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43
HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
HP 5600 Series / Olivetti Job Jet 210 - Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 47
Printer Remote Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 48
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Weight without Monitor and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Acoustic Noise Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 50
How to enter Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
How to enter Hospital Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
How to change Language and the EUM Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
How to change Video Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
How to change the Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53
External I/O Connection Panel (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54
External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 55
Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56
Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
Software/Option Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
x Table of Contents
Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59
Network IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60

Map Network Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
Table of Contents xi
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Menu Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
2D Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
MCFM Mode Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Spectral Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
Color Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Volume Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Pre-Volume Mode Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Functions after the 3D Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating 2D Auto Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating 3D Rotation Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Activating 4D Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Generic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode) . . . . . 4 - 22
Circumference/Area Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Volume Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Multiplane Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Auto Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Manual Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
xii Table of Contents
Worksheet (Report) Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25

Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Connecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Activating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Deactivating the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Disconnecting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Image Management (Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Formatting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder . . . . . . 4 - 30
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31

Save User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . . 4 - 35
Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . . 4 - 37
Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) . . . . . 4 - 39
Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
ECG Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43

Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43
Brakes and Direction Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44
Site Log - System (Service Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 44
To review the Service Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 45
Site Log - Paper Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
Table of Contents xiii

CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Description of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
B-Mode or 2D-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Color Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Color Flow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Power Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Tissue Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Pulsed (PW) Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
3D Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
3D Data Collection and Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
3D Image Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
3D Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Block diagram Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Special B Mode Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler) . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum) . 5 - 13
CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging)* . . 5 - 14
Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder) . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Description of Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Real Time 4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
DICOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Real Time 4D Biopsy* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
TUI* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Description of Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
CW - Continuous Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
ECG Preamplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
xiv Table of Contents
MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18

Scan/Freeze Foot switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Global Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Data Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Main board Chassis GEZ Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
FrontEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
FrontEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
CPV - Probe Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
CPD-Beamformer-Sub-board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
CPZ - Cover Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
CPK - Motherboard of GEZ-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
CRS - Signal Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
CPP- Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . 5 - 31
Motor Power stage (Motor driver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
BackEnd Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
BackEnd - Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
Block diagram CKV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
BackEnd - Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
SBC - Single Board Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Graphic Adapter Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
CPP- Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage . . . . . 5 - 37
Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
Internal I/O - if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39
Internal I/O - if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 49
External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
Table of Contents xv
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
Magneto-Optical Drive (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 52
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
CPN - Primary Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Mechanical Concept and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Major Functions of CPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53
Power Distribution Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Fuses on Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Fuses inside CPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 57
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Power Off / Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Mechanical Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Rotation of the Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63

Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Air Flow Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Service Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
iLinq Interactive Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66

Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Proactive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Remote System Shutdown and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
File and/or Image Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Service Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
xvi Table of Contents
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Generate NLS Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
Auto Tester File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
Service Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
Connected probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
Service Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 73
Console test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Delete all Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Export System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Maintenance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Hardware Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Beamformer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Front-End Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
BMTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Pattern Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Transmitter Power Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
CRS Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
RAM Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Analog Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
PW Doppler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
“Geräte” Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
NLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
EUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
UIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
SSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
is for updating the Service Software
Operation see: Section 8-5 "Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-15.Console
5 - 84
Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
(Extended) Access to Windows Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Description of Sub folder “GE Field Engineer” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Further functions in the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
FACTORY ONLY functions in the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
LINUX - Service Function Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Table of Contents xvii
Access/Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
General Operation and Selection in LINUX (and BIOS) menu . . . . . 5 - 87
Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Linux “Maintenance System” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
SaveSett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Format M/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Exit/Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Halt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Advanced Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
SSHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Restore C: from recovery partition (R:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93
Clone Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Initialize Hard disk (C: and D:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
After Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 98
CD-ROM Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 99
Memory Check in LINUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 100
xviii Table of Contents

CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Monitor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Color Temp - Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Contrast and Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Color temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
B-Mode Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Control Console, Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5

Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Trackball Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Modification of Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

Setup the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Keyboard Language Layout . . . . . 6 - 7
4D Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Table of Contents xix

CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Check Points Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4

How to check power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Screen Captures and Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5

Capturing a screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
Export Log’s and System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
Export Log´s and System Data (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Dump-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9
Virtual Console Observation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Use of “Virtual Console Observation” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Common Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
CPU Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Hard Drive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status - Reporting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
Memory Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
CD/DVD Drive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
Video Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
USB Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
PCI Board Configuration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
SCSI Device Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
AGP Video Card Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Network Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Keyboard Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Audio Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Monitor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
xx Table of Contents
How to use the Auto Tester program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
How to repair Databases (*.mdb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
How to delete the Service Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Beamformer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Summation Bus Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Preparations for Summation Bus Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Asic Select / Apertur Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Purpose of the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Check probes for missing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Check Transmitter/Receiver Sub boards (CPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Minimum boards and connections necessary to boot up to certain levels . 7 - 34
Minimum Configuration to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
User Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36

Control Console Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38

System Does Not Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 40
No Echo visible in Ultrasound field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 41
How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply . . 7 - 42
Bad B-Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44
Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46
Noise disturbs the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47
Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 48
Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 49
Unable to record Volumes (no Volume sweep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 50
Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
No Audio Output on Loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53
No ECG line or ECG signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 54
Monitor Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 55
Unable to Record to VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 56
Printer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 57
DVD/CD-(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
MOD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Network Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
No Connection to the Network at All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Table of Contents xxi
Enhanced Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
To debug Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 63
xxii Table of Contents

CHAPTER 8
Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Software - Installation Procedure (via Windows Explorer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . 8 - 14

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14
Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
EUM - Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
Replacement or Activation of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21

Operation for activating Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Operation for installing a “Demo Key” or a “Permanent Key”: . . . . . 8 - 21
Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Transfer of Patient Database and Images using cross-over network cable 8 - 22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Table of Contents xxiii
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Operation ("new" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24
Changing the Computer Name ("new" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Operation ("old" System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
After the Transfer of the Database (from “old” to “new” system) . . . . 8 - 29
Transfer of Patient Database and Images using “Full Backup” function . . . 8 - 30
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Save “Full Backup” data (including all images) of the “old” system . . 8 - 30
Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system . . 8 - 31
Restoring various “Full Backup” data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Backup all Exams of the “old” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system . . . . . . 8 - 36
Replacement of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Rear Cover - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Rear Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Rear Cover - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Top Cover - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Top Cover of Trolley - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Top Cover of Trolley - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40
Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Side Panel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Side Panel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Guide for Probe cables - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
xxiv Table of Contents

Guide for Probe cables - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43

Guide for Probe cables - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Connection Panel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Connection Panel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Replacement of the Standby Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Standby Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Standby Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 46
Replacement of the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
Monitor - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 47
Monitor - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 48
Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Removal Procedure . . . . 8 - 49
Right Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Top Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Left Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50
Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Installation Procedure . . 8 - 50
Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Monitor Front Housing - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Table of Contents xxv

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Monitor Switch Assembly - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Monitor Switch Assembly - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Task Lamp - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Task Lamp - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Monitor Mounting Plate - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Monitor Plate - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Replacement of Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Rear Wheel - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Rear wheel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Rear wheel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Front Wheel - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Front wheel - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 57
Front wheel - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 58
Replacement of the Foot Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Foot rest- Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Foot rest- Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Replacement of User Interface (GEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
xxvi Table of Contents
User Interface - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60

User Interface - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62
Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Distance Rod - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Distance Rod - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 63
Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Bottom Housing - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Replacement of the Front Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Front Handle - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Front Handle - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Replacement of the Trackball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Trackball - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Trackball Kit - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Replacement of the Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Table of Contents xxvii

Replacement of the Wheel control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Wheel control - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Wheel control - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Keyboard - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Keyboard - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Hardkey Board(s) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Replacement of the Hardkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Hardkeys - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Hardkeys - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Loudspeaker - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Loudspeaker - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 77
Replacement of the Top Housing of the User Interface (GEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Disk Drive Module - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
xxviii Table of Contents

Disk Drive Module - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 80
DVD+(R)W-Drive - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 82
Replacement of the MO-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
MO-Drive - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
MO-Drive - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
CRB - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
CRB - Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
CRB - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 85
Replacement of the Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Fan - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Fan - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 87
Voltage Modifications at CPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Change mains input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 89
Exchange Fuse (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Power Supply - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Table of Contents xxix

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
CPY Power Switch - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
CPY Power Switch - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Replacement of the CCF - Power Primary Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
CCF-Board - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
CCF-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Replacement of the Mains Power Switch and Input Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Power Switch + Input Connector - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Power Switch + Input Connector - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 93
Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Fan for Primary Power Supply - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Fan for Primary Power Supply - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 94
Removement of the GEZ-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
GEZ-Box - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
GEZ-Box - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 98
Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99

Removal of the Frontend Cover of the GEZ-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Removal of the Backend Cover of the GEZ-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 100
Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
CRS - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
CRS - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 101
Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
xxx Table of Contents
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
CPZ - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
CPZ - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 102
Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
CPR - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
CPR - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 103
Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
CRW - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
CRW - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 104
Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
CPP - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
CPP - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 105
Replacement of CPK - Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
CPK-Board - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
CPK-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 107
Replacement of CPV - Probe Connector Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
CPV-Board - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 108
CPV-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 110
Replacement of the BackEnd Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111

BackEnd Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 112
Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
CKV-Board - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 113
CKV-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 114
Serial Number - Re-programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 115
Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
Table of Contents xxxi

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
CPE-Board - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 116
CPE-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Replacement of the PC-Board (Single Board Computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
PC-Board - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 118
PC-Board - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 120
BIOS Settings for PC-Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
BIOS setting if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 123
BIOS setting if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 124
Replacement of the ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Add-On card - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Add-On card - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Configure the Extended Desktop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 125
Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Lithium Battery - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Lithium Battery - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 128
Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 129
Hard disk - Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 130
Hard disk - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 131
Configure the Universal Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 132
Customizing the Universal Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (single) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Fan for GEZ (single)- Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 138
Fan for GEZ (single) - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 139
xxxii Table of Contents
Hardware check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 140
Reassembly the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 146
Key Caps - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Key Caps - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 147
Reassembly the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Replacement of ECG Module (MAN6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
ECG Module - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
ECG Module - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Replacement of the Global Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
Global Modem - Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 153
Global Modem - Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 154
Table of Contents xxxiii

CHAPTER 9
Renewal Parts
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
Parts List Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
User Interface (GEU Top Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
Monitor + Monitor replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8
Disk Drives (GEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9
Main Power Module (CPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
Main Board Module (GEZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11

FrontEnd (US-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
BackEnd Processor (PC-Part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Options and Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Miscellaneous Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Optional Peripherals and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 27
2D-Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 27
Real-Time 4D Volume Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 29
CW-Pencil Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31
Biopsy Needle Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
Compatibility (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
xxxiv Table of Contents

CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Standard GE Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Functional Checks (see also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13

Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Table of Contents xxxv

Dale 600 - Ground Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17

Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Dale 600 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Dale 600 Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27
Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
xxxvi Table of Contents

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS - KRETZTECHNIK DRAFT VOLUSON® 730PRO / 730PROV (BT´05)
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual
before installing or servicing a unit.
Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1
Section Description Page Number

1-1 Overview 1-1
1-2 Important Conventions 1-3
1-3 Safety Considerations 1-7
1-4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-10
1-5 Customer Assistance 1-11
1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual

This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Ultrasound Scanning System and contains the following chapters:
1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.

2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV.
3.) Chapter 3 - Installation: Contains installation procedures.
4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional
explanations of the electronics.
6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to
the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related
routines for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly
procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the Voluson®
730Pro / 730ProV.
10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the Voluson®
730Pro / 730ProV.
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

1-1-3 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual

• Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.).
• Hospital’s Service Personnel
• Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
1-1-4 Models Covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 Voluson® 730Pro Model Designations
Part Number Description

H48651FF Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 230V/50Hz
H48651FG Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 115V USA
H48651FH Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 115V
H48651FJ Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 100V JAPAN
H48651FK Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 230V KOREA
H48651FL Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 230V CHINA
H48651FM Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 230V AUSTRALIA
H48651FN Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05) Console 230V INDIA
Table 1-3 Voluson® 730ProV Model Designations
Part Number Description

H48651GL Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 230V/50Hz
H48651GM Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 115V USA
H48651GN Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 115V
H48651GP Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 100V JAPAN
H48651GR Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 230V KOREA
H48651GS Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 230V CHINA
H48651GT Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 230V AUSTRALIA
H48651GW Voluson® 730ProV (BT´05) Console 230V INDIA
NOTICE The Voluson® 730Pro V is a downgraded version of the Voluson® 730Pro.

That means not all options are available on the Voluson® 730Pro V
(marked with * in the sections of the Manuals).
The Voluson® 730Pro V is only distinguished by the System type, see: Figure 7-1: System Setup -
System Info page (e.g. V730 Pro) on page 7-2; it has NO own serial number!
NOTICE This manual applies to:

• Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems with Serial number A34001 - A34500,
• A35001 - (onwards), and/or
• Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems with Software version 5.0.x (or higher) installed
NOTICE Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems that were upgraded to BT´05 have different hardware installed.
For upgraded systems, please refer to BT´04 manual.
1-2 Section 1-1 - Overview

1-1-5 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
Section 1-2
Important Conventions
1-2-1 Conventions Used in Book
Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
Safety Precaution Messages
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury
and property damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible

Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Example: Disk drive will crash.
NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure.

Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.

1-2-2 Standard Hazard Icons

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained
within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several
different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types
of hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-4 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
t
Table 1-5 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
& EYE
LOCKOUT PROTECTION
Signed Date
1-4 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

1-2-3 Product Icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-6 Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Manufacturer's name and address Rear side of the unit

Identification and Rating Plate Model and serial numbers Monitor rear side
Electrical ratings On each probe
Laboratory logo or labels denoting

Rear side of the unit
Device Listing/Certification Labels conformance with industry safety standards
Rear side of the monitor
such as UL or IEC.
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
Indicates the degree of protection provided by

IP Code (IPX 1) Footswitch
IP Code (IPX 7) the enclosure per IEC 529. IPX 1 and IPX 7
Probes
indicates drip proof.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol)

IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment Probe connectors
having even more electrical isolation than Front side of the ECG-preamplifier (MAN)
standard Type B equipment because it is Rear of Power Supply
intended for intimate patient contact.
“CAUTION
This unit weighs...
Special care must be used to avoid..."
This precaution is intended to prevent injury
that may result if one person attempt to move
the unit considerable distances or on an incline
due to the weight of the unit.
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually

used in combination with other symbols to Various
advise or warn the user.
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying

documents " is intended to alert the user to
refer to the operator manual or other Rear side of Power Supply
instructions when complete information cannot
be provided on the label.

Table 1-6 Product Icons (Continued)
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning

flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is Rear side of Monitor
used to indicate electric shock hazards.
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of

Rear of system at mains switch (F1)
the mains power switch.
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/

standby position of the power switch.
Adjacent to On-Off/Standby switch left below the
CAUTION Control panel.
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE
Mains Supply
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of

Rear of system at mains switch (F1)
the mains power switch.
ON switch of the isolation transformer for

Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary devices (F2)
auxiliary devices.
OFF switch of the isolation transformer for

Rear of system at the switch for auxiliary devices (F2)
auxiliary devices.
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective

Internal, Rear side of Power Supply
earth (grounding) terminal.
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be

used for connecting equipotential conductors
Rear side of Power Supply
when interconnecting (grounding) with other
equipment.
1-6 Section 1-2 - Important Conventions

Table 1-6 Product Icons (Continued)
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and

electronic equipment must not be disposed of
as unsorted municipal waste and must be
Rear side of the unit
collected separately. Please contact an
on each probe
authorized representative of the manufacturer
for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
Section 1-3
Safety Considerations
1-3-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-3-2 Human Safety

Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized
personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Training are
authorized to service the equipment.
1-3-3 Mechanical Safety

WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING THE UNIT, OR IF IT IS RAISED FOR A
REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE. IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE WHICH
COULD CAUSE THE UNIT TO TIP OVER.
WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT

CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN
HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A
DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS
CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK,
IT MAY BE DAMAGED.
CAUTION Always lower and center the Operator I/O Panel before moving the scanner.
CAUTION The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV weighs 136 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals,
(300 lbs., or more) when ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its
parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and
costly damage.
ALWAYS:
Be sure the pathway is clear and use slow, careful motions.
Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).

1-3-3 Mechanical Safety (cont’d)

CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
• Secure the unit in an upright position.

• Lock the wheels (brake)
• DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.
• Place the probes in their carrying case.
• Eject any DVD, CD or Magneto Optical disk (MOD) from their drive.
1-3-4 Electrical Safety
1-3-4-1 Safe Practices

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.
The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total
current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
WARNING CONNECTING A VOLUSON® 730PRO / 730PROV SCANNER TO THE WRONG

VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
1-3-4-2 Probes
Follow the guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- Housing
- Cable strain relief
- Lens
- Seal
• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
1-8 Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations

1-3-5 Labels Locations
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 1-1 Labeling
1.) Caution Label

2.) CE-Label
3.) UL-Label
4.) Identification plate
5.) CW-Doppler (only if the CW-Doppler option is installed)
6.) Homologation label (for Japan only)
1-3-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings

Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT

IN THIS EQUIPMENT.
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT
INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
OF THE EQUIPMENT.

1-3-7 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains
plug.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
Unplug the system
Maintain control of the system power plug
TAG
LOCKOUT
& There are no test points to verify isolation, you must wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to
Signed Date
discharge.
Beware that the Power Supply (CPN), Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized
even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.UT
1-3-8 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
Section 1-4
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-4-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
For applicable standards refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV.
1-10 Section 1-4 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1-4-2 Compliance
The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits
and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and
power line transient requirements.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in
good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-4-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED
ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER
(TO THE RIGHT OF THE POWER CONNECTOR).
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles
designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have
the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making
contact.
Section 1-5
Customer Assistance
1-5-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the Basic User Manual, or if
you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource,
as listed below.
NOTE: Prepare vital system information (see: Section 7-2 on page 7-2) before you call:
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup version
• additional information about installed software

Table 1-7 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location Phone Number
1-800–437–1171
USA/ Canada
GE Medical Systems
Ultrasound Service Engineering
4855 W. Electric Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53219
1-800-682-5327
Customer Answer Center 1-262-524-5698
Fax: +1-414-647-4125
1-262-524-5300
Latin America
GE Medical Systems
Ultrasound Service Engineering
4855 W. Electric Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53219
1-262-524-5698
Customer Answer Center
Fax: +1-414-647-4125
Europe
Tel: +43 7683 3800-26
GE Medical Systems Kretztechnik GmbH & Co OHG
Fax: +43 7682 3800-47
Service Department - Ultrasound
Tiefenbach 15
A-4871 Zipf
Austria
Tel: +33-13083-1300
Customer Answer Center
Asia Tel: +65 6291-8528

GE Ultrasound Asia +81 426-482950
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Central Plaza
Singapore 169730 Fax: +65 6272-7006
1-5-2 System Manufacturer
Table 1-8 System Manufacturer
Manufacturer Telephone FAX
GE Medical Systems
Kretztechnik GmbH & Co OHG
Tiefenbach 15 +43-7682-3800-0 +43-7682-3800-47
A-4871 Zipf
Austria
1-12 Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance

Chapter 2
Pre-Installation
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a Voluson®
730Pro / 730ProV. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the
purchaser of the unit.

2-1 Overview 2-1
2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2
2-3 Facility Needs 2-6
Chapter 2 Pre-Installation 2-1

Section 2-2
General Console Requirements
2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements
Operating Operating Storage

Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation Temperature Storage Humidity
10 to 40oC 30 to 80% rH -10 to 40 oC < 90% rH non-

3446 BTU pr hour
(50 to 104oF) non-condensing (14 to 104oF) condensing
2-2-1-1 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV is 3446 BTU/hr. This figure does not
include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room
places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2 Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.
2-2-2 Electrical Requirements

NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system. The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other
circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please
note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main
facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-2-1 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Power Requirements
Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100 VAC ±10% 9,2 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
115 VAC ±10% 8.00 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
130 VAC ±10% 7.10 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
230 VAC ±10% 4.00 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
240 VAC ±10% 3,85 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
2-2-2-2 Inrush Current

Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power
supplies.
2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit
overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other
equipment operating on the same circuit.
2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate
outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5 Unit Power Plug

If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the
installation engineer must supply what is locally required.

2-2-3 EMI Limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect.
These sources include:
• medical lasers,
• scanners,
• cauterizing guns,
• computers,
• monitors,
• fans,
• gel warmers,
• microwave ovens,
• light dimmers
• portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
see Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips
Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule Details
Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be
Be aware of RF sources required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video
broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the
Ground the unit
power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any
Replace all screws, RF cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the
gaskets, covers, cores front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with
the ultrasound signals.
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not
Replace broken RF gaskets
turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
RF gaskets touch metal leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable
and peripherals length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop
Properly dress peripheral
the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the
cables
frame.
2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements

Operation: Ambient temperature 18° to 30° C
Storage: -10° to 50° C
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to degrees F = °C (9/5) + 32).
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF
-10 TO + 50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE
PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
2-2-5 Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six
weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
CAUTION Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.

Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser
responsibility includes:
• Procuring the materials required.

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces
of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The
products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special
engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the
requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified
personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-3-2 Required Features

NOTE: GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system. The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other
circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please
note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main
facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.

• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE: The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on
board peripherals.
2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

2-3-3 Desirable Features

• Door is at least 90 cm (3 ft.) wide
• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
• Sink with hot and cold water
• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
• Emergency oxygen supply
• Storage for linens and equipment
• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals

2-3-4 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan

2-3-5 Networking Pre-installation Requirements
2-3-5-1 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function

DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) services provide the operator with clinically
useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network.
Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring
images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-
board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues.
With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2-3-5-2 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements

To configure the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV to work with other network connections, the site’s network
administrator must provide some necessary information.
Information must include:
• A Station name, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
• The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION. Only if necessary (e.g. for Internet access).
Installation see: Section 3-12 "Network IP Address Configuration" on page 3-60.

This page was intentionally left blank.

Chapter 3
Installation
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to install the unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack
and configure the equipment.

3-1 Overview 3-1
3-2 Installation Reminders 3-1
3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4
3-4 Preparing for Installation 3-6
3-5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices 3-7
3-6 Completing the Installation 3-21
3-7 Printer Installation 3-24
3-8 System Configuration 3-49
3-9 Available Probes 3-57
3-10 Software/Option Configuration 3-58
3-11 Connectivity Installation Worksheet 3-59
3-12 Network IP Address Configuration 3-60
3-13 Paperwork 3-62
Section 3-2
Installation Reminders
3-2-1 Average Installation Time
Table 3-2 Average Installation Time
Description Average Installation Time Comments

Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours
Scanner /options / printers 0.5 to 1.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration
DICOM Option 0.5 - 1.5 hours Dependant on the configuration amount
Chapter 3 Installation 3-1

3-2-2 Installation Warnings

1.) Since the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV weighs approximately 136 kg (300 lb.) without options, two
people are required to unpack it. Two people are required for installing any additional items in
excess of 16kg / 35 pounds (e.g., Monitor).
2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord. Only qualified service
personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to
acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment it's temperature is
below 10°C or above 40°C.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site
may cause the system to be damaged.
Table 3-3 Acclimation Time
°C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
°F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
When pulling, moving or lifting the system,

grasp it only at the rear handle of the trolley and
the handle underneath the foot rest.
WARNING
Do NOT pull or lift the system with the front handle

of the user interface (operator panel).
Figure 3-1 pulling, moving or lifting the system
3-2-2-1 Brake Pedal Operation
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front wheels are engaged for transportation, pressing the release
brake pedals (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest) once disengages the lock.
3-2-2-2 Operator I/O Panel Position

If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in it’s extended position the console could tip over.
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended.
Move the Operator I/O Panel to it’s centered and locked position.
WARNING Monitor mounting mechanism may break if not properly supported (e.g., with packing
foam) during transportation.
3-2 Section 3-2 - Installation Reminders

3-2-3 Safety Reminders
DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever
a part weighing 16kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted.
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate
to its operating environment.
CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use
a three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is
present.
CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord.
This unit requires a dedicated 16 A circuit.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
System performance and cooling require this.
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson®
730Pro / 730ProV and kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV probe is
within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure.
Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
Figure 3-2 Environmental Labels

Section 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION
Transport only with forklift or stracker truck.
During transport pay attention to the point of gravity (“tilt and drop” indicator)!
Have two people available to unpack the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.

Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.
The envelope with delivery address, packing list and

invoice is located on the front panel of the crate.
Check whether delivery is complete (according to

packing list) and check visual damage!
Figure 3-3 envelope at front panel of the crate
NOTICE The device must only be transported in the original packaging!

Unpack the devices such a way that packaging can be reused.
A drill with size 20 torx bit and/or a Phillips 2 screwdriver is needed to open the crate.
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
1. Loosen the screws and remove top panel from crate; top panel is used for the ramp.
tilt and drop

indicator
center
of
gravity
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
2. Open front panel by removing the screws from the side panels. Remove probes and accessories from the wooden box.
probes and accessories
WARNING
Do not open side panels prior to

screws screws removing the front panel!
Accessories could drop down
and DAMAGE the user interface!
packing
3. Loosen all screws to remove the wooden rack for accessories as well as the left, right and back panel.
wooden rack
for accessories
4. Carefully remove foam packing material and plastic bag from the ultrasound unit and monitor.
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.
5. Disengage the brakes and slowly move unit down the ramp (top panel).
brakes
Brakes
top panel
is used for ramp
Note: Packing crate and material should be stored for future use.

Section 3-4
Preparing for Installation
3-4-1 Verify Customer Order

Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order.
Report any items that are missing, back ordered or damaged.
3-4-2 Physical Inspection
3-4-2-1 System Voltage Settings

Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage. The Voltage settings for the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV Scanner is found on the identification plate, on the rear of the system.
Figure 3-4 Identification Plate
WARNING CONNECTING A Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE

LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
3-4-3 EMI Protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by
this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured
before the unit is put into operation.
3-6 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Installation

Section 3-5
Connection of Auxiliary Devices
NOTE: Normally the auxiliary devices and peripherals come already installed with the system.
1.) Carefully remove plastic caps using a knife and loosen screws and washers. (see: Figure 3-5)
2.) When the cover is loose on top, pull the rear cover out and move it upwards.
plastic caps; screw and washers
Figure 3-5 Remove rear cover plate
NOTE: The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
cover of System DVD

on the back of the
rear cover plate
Figure 3-6 System DVD on the back of the rear cover plate
3.) Disconnect the GND ground cable from the back of rear cover plate.
Figure 3-7 GND ground cable
4.) Connect all Peripherals according to correct connection scheme:

- if “Kontron SBC-board is installed, see: Figure 3-8 on page 3-8,
- if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed, see: Figure 3-9 on page 3-9.
5.) Connect the ground cable at the rear cover plate.
6.) Mount rear cover plate, reattach screw and washers and plug-in the caps.

3-5-1 Connection of Auxiliary Devices - if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed
GES - External IO Board

wall power socket VGA MODEM NET USB COMP VIDEO
cable OUT
GEM - Disk Drive Module
LINE PRINTER USB Bluetooth Adapter

(used for Line Printer)
SUPPLY
USB
Bluetooth
POWER
Printer MODEM ECG
Adapter USB
RS232 TEL IN OUT OUT
Power POWER
supply
SW PRINTER
REMOTE VIDEO IN
S-VHS-VIDEORECORDER PC
COLOR PRINTER IN Out PS2 PS2
AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO RS232 Keybd. Mouse
USB
POWER
POWER USB USB2
POWER GEM
RS-232
Out
CKV
S-VHS1 VHS1 UI Disp.
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS2 VHS2 VHS S-VHS
USB3
LAN
USB4
CPE AUX SUPPLY
Audio
AUDIO IN REMOTE CONSOLE CPN LAMP RS232 ECG AUDIO
SOUND BW PRINTER OUT IN
DVI Out
USB5 USB6
Foot Switch
DVI In
CPN
Primary-Power-Supply
FootSwitch RS-232 In
Figure 3-8 Connection of Peripherals (“Kontron” SBC-board installed)
NOTE: If “Tyan” SBC-board is installed,

see: Figure 3-9: Connection of Peripherals (“Tyan” SBC-board installed) on page 3-9.
3-8 Section 3-5 - Connection of Auxiliary Devices

3-5-2 Connection of Auxiliary Devices - if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed
GES - External IO Board

wall power socket VGA MODEM NET USB COMP VIDEO
cable OUT
GEM - Disk Drive Module
LINE PRINTER USB Bluetooth Adapter

(used for Line Printer)
SUPPLY
USB
Bluetooth
POWER
Printer MODEM ECG
Adapter USB
RS232 TEL IN OUT OUT
Power POWER
supply
SW PRINTER
REMOTE VIDEO IN
S-VHS-VIDEORECORDER PC
COLOR PRINTER IN Out PS2 PS2
AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO RS232 Keybd. Mouse
USB
POWER
POWER USB2
POWER
UI Disp.
CKV
S-VHS1 VHS1
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS2 VHS2 VHS S-VHS Audio
USB
GEM
USB2
CPE AUX SUPPLY

USB3
LAN
USB4
SOUND BW PRINTER OUT IN
DVI Out
USB5 USB6
Foot Switch
DVI In
CPN
Primary-Power-Supply
FootSwitch
Figure 3-9 Connection of Peripherals (“Tyan” SBC-board installed)
NOTE: If “Kontron” SBC-board is installed,

see: Figure 3-8: Connection of Peripherals (“Kontron” SBC-board installed) on page 3-8.

3-5-3 Monitor Connection

NOTE: The monitor comes already installed with the system.
3-5-4 Foot Switch Connection

NOTE: To adjust the Foot Switch, refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual,
Chapter 17.3.3, System Setup - Peripherals.
Figure 3-10 Foot Switch Connection Scheme

3-5-5 ECG-preamplifier Connection
Figure 3-11 ECG Connection Scheme

3-5-6 Global Modem Connection
Figure 3-12 Global Modem Connection Scheme
WARNING Never install the telephone wiring, or use the modem during an electric storm;
there may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
CAUTION Use only the power adapter supplied with the modem and connect it as shown.
Use of any other power adapter will void the warranty and could damage the modem.

3-5-7 S-VHS Video Recorder Connection
3-5-7-1 Mitsubishi HS-MD3000
CAUTION ONLY the specific GE - Kretztechnik Version of this video recorder type may be used in
connection with the system!
Figure 3-13 Mitsubishi - Video Recorder Connection Scheme
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.
see: Section 9-12 "Optional Peripherals and Accessories" on page 9-23.

3-5-7-2 Sony SVO-9500MD
Figure 3-14 Video Recorder Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the VCR as shown:

Switch 1: OFF-Audio is muted during fast playback
Switch 2: OFF-FF/REW mode is used during searches.
Switch 3: ON-VCR counter is reset upon cassette ejection.
Switch 4: OFF-The VCR can be controlled by the system.
Switch 5 + 6: ON-The Baud rate is set to 19200 bit/sec
(must be the same as Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV)
Figure 3-15 DIP Switches
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set and remote cable.

3-5-8 B/W Video Printer Connection
Figure 3-16 B/W Video Printer Connection Scheme
Set DIP Switches on back of the Black/White printer as shown in the image (all DOWN).
NOTICE Please use the proper connection set.

see: section Section 9-12 "Optional Peripherals and Accessories" on page 9-23.

3-5-9 Line Printer Connection
Figure 3-17 Line Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the Line Printer (HP 990cxi or HP 995c) has to be located outside of the
patient environment (acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 2601-1).
NOTICE The switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system.
Leave printer switch always in the ON position.
NOTE: For further installation instructions see:

Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-25.

3-5-10 Digital Color Printer Connection
Figure 3-18 Digital Color Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Pay attention to lateral distances. See Instruction Manual of the printer!
CAUTION The Printer Supply Voltage must be the same as the Output Voltage of the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV Power Out Connectors (Power Supply)!

CAUTION The Sony UP-D23MD printer must never be connected to USB-ports on the SBC backplane.
Please use one of the two outlets on the back of the GEM (Disk Drive Module) only.

Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD" on page 3-27.

3-5-11 Bluetooth Printer Connection
Figure 3-19 Bluetooth Printer Connection Scheme
CAUTION Please observe that the complete Bluetooth Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the
patient environment (acc. IEC 60601-1 / UL 2601-1).
CAUTION The used printer may not be a medical device. The Bluetooth Printer Set and the Power Supply
of the Bluetooth Printer Adapter is also not a medical device.
The equipment meets the requirements of the EN60950 Standard.
NOTICE Please use the proper Bluetooth Printer Connection set.


Section 3-7-3 "Installing Bluetooth Printer HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210" on page 3-29.

3-5-12 External USB-Devices
3-5-12-1 Connection
When an external USB-storage device (such as a USB-memory stick or external hard disk) is connected
to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a
driver. During this process, several dialogs may pop up, starting with the „Found New Hardware“ dialog.
Figure 3-20 Found New Hardware - USB Device
The device is then accessible using the drive letter the system assigned to it.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual.
3-5-12-2 Disconnection
Before an external USB-device (e.g., USB-memory stick) can be disconnected, the system has to be
informed about the removal of the device! For this purpose the System Setup - BACKUP page (see:
Figure 4-22 on page 4-31) has a STOP USB DEVICES button.
NOTE: Unplugging or ejecting devices without first stopping them can often cause to crash and lose of
valuable data.
By clicking the STOP USB DEVICES button, the „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog is started.
Using this dialog, the USB-devices can be stopped before they are physically disconnected.
Figure 3-21 Unplug or Eject Hardware
The „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog shows all USB-devices that are connected to the system.
On every system is an USB mass storage device, the DVD/CD writer, which has the drive letter (F:).
If the system has an optional MO-drive installed as well, it is listed too, and has the drive letter (E:).

3-5-12-2 Disconnection (cont’d)
To stop the external device, select it and click the STOP button.
A dialog shows which components will be stopped. To finish the process, click [OK].
Figure 3-22 Stop a Hardware device
Finally, a dialog shows that the device was stopped successfully.

The device can now be safely disconnected from the system.
Figure 3-23 Safe to Remove Hardware
By clicking OK, the „Unplug or Eject Hardware“ dialog is active again.
Close this dialog by clicking CLOSE.
Afterwards select OK to reboot the system.
WARNING Do not connect or disconnect any external USB-devices to or from the system while
scanning a patient! The appearing dialogs could distract you from the scan!
CAUTION If the system’s DVD/CD writer or (optional) MO-drive was stopped by accident, simply stop the
external device as well and reboot the system.
During reboot, the DVD/CD writer and the MO-drive will be installed again.

Section 3-6
Completing the Installation
3-6-1 Power On / Boot Up
3-6-1-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground.
3.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Circuit Breaker
Connector for
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-24 Circuit Breaker at rear of system
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the control panel is illuminated,
indicating that the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
3-6-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up

Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel.
ON/OFF Standby Switch
Figure 3-25 ON/OFF Standby Switch
When the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel is pressed once, the System (including
the Back-end Processor) starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
Boot up time is about 2 minutes.
NOTE: The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with
the Standby switch. The switch of printers has to be in ON position before starting the system.
However, be aware some auxiliary equipment may switch itself to standby mode when
Standby power is on (e.g., Color video printer) and must therefore be switched on separately.

3-6-2 Power Off/ Shutdown

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again.
The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-6-2-1 Back-end Processor Power Down

1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel; see: Figure 3-25.
3-6-2-2 Scanner Shutdown

1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel.
2.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
the Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
3.) Disconnection of the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Repairing the scanner.
Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the cable from the system,
or unplug the cable from the wall socket.
Circuit Breaker
2 screws
pull-out Protection
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-26 Circuit Breaker, Protection and Power Cable on back of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
4.) Press once on the brakes to block the front wheels (brakes on front wheels under the foot rest).
5.) Prior to disconnect a probe freeze the image.
6.) Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the connector straight out of the probe port.
CAUTION If a probe is disconnected while running (Write-Mode) a software error may occur.
In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
3-22 Section 3-6 - Completing the Installation

3-6-3 Transducer Connection

NOTE: Prior to connecting or disconnecting a probe, freeze the image.
It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
Connect a transducer to one of the three rightmost transducer receptacle as follows:
1.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is at horizontal position.
2.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating
surface.
3.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.
Twist the lever to the horizontal position to disconnect the transducer..
Figure 3-27 Transducer Connection

Section 3-7
Printer Installation
NOTE: For Connection schemes refer to Chapter 21 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV or see: Figure 3-8 on page 3-8 respectively Figure 3-9 on page 3-9.
For further installation instructions see:
• Section 3-7-1 "Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c" on page 3-25.

• Section 3-7-2 "Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD" on page 3-27.
• Section 3-7-3 "Installing Bluetooth Printer HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210" on page 3-29.
• Section 3-7-4 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-38.
• Section 3-7-5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-43.
CAUTION The Bluetooth Printer Connection Set as well as the color printer
(HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210) MUST NOT be installed by the user!
For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
3-24 Section 3-7 - Printer Installation

3-7-1 Installing Line Printer HP 990cxi or HP 995c

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-2 on page 3-22.
2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-7 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE: For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-9 on page 3-16.
NOTICE Do not connect the USB-cable to the printer!
NOTE: “Mouse functions” can be performed by using the trackball for moving the cursor.
“Normal select” (Click) = left/right trackball key ; “Opening a context menu” = upper trackball key
3.) Turn ON the printer, then switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
NOTE: The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system!
3-7-1-1 Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver

Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV!
4.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows ‘Searching for Drivers …’,
‘Found new Hardware …’ and finally the following windows appear.
select “Search for a suitable driver for my

device (recommended)”
Click on “Specify a location”
Figure 3-28 Found New Hardware Wizard

3-7-1-1 Install the HP 990cxi or HP 995c printer software/driver (cont’d)

5.) Click the NEXT buttons to start the Hardware Wizard and to locate the driver files.
6.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path on the hard disk (see: Figure 3-29)
- C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet990c for HP 990cxi
- C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HPDeskjet995c for HP 995c, and then click OK.
Figure 3-29 Search for Network path on hard disk
7.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied.
8.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-30 Confirm correct path and finish the Installation
9.) Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE After boot up of the system, verify the correct settings in the printer “Properties”, see: Section 3-7-5
Ver
"Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-43.

3-7-2 Installing Digital Color Printer Sony UP-D21MD or UP-D23MD

1.) Power off/Shutdown the system as described in: Section 3-6-2 on page 3-22.
2.) Connect the printer as described on page 3-7 and reinstall the rear cover plate.
NOTE: For connection schemes refer to Section 3-5-10 on page 3-17 .
NOTICE Do not connect the USB-cable to the printer!
“Normal select” (Click) = left/right trackball key ; “Opening a context menu” = upper trackball key
3.) Turn ON the printer, then switch ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
NOTE: The power switch of the printer has to be in ON position before starting the system!
3-7-2-1 Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver

Perform the following steps if this printer was never installed on the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV!
4.) Connect the USB cable to the printer and the system. The windows ‘Searching for Drivers …’,
‘Found new Hardware …’ and finally the following windows appear.
select “Search for a suitable driver for my

device (recommended)”
Click on “Specify a location”
Figure 3-31 Found New Hardware Wizard
5.) Click the NEXT buttons to start the Hardware Wizard and to locate the driver files.

3-7-2-1 Install the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD printer software/driver (cont’d)
6.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path (see: Figure 3-32)
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\SonyUP-D21MD or
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\SonyUP-D23MD and then click OK.
Figure 3-32 Search for Network path
7.) Confirm the correct path and click NEXT to install the driver. All necessary files are copied.
8.) The Message: Digital Signature Not Found appears. Click YES.
9.) Confirm the installation by clicking FINISH to close the Hardware Wizard.
Figure 3-33 Confirm correct path and finish the Installation
10.)Close all open windows and restart the system (turn off and on the system).
Ver

3-7-3 Installing Bluetooth Printer HP 5600 Series or Olivetti Job Jet 210
NOTICE Before installing the Bluetooth color printer (see: Section 3-7-3-4 on page 3-36):
• the Bluetooth Printer Set (see: Section 3-7-3-1 on page 3-29) MUST be installed,
• the Bluetooth Software has to be configured (see: Section 3-7-3-2 on page 3-32) and
• the Bluetooth Printer Adapter has to be connected (see: Section 3-7-3-3 on page 3-35).
“Normal select” (Click) = left/right trackball key; “Opening a context menu” = upper trackball key
3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software
1.) Turn ON the system and wait till the system has booted.
2.) Connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB connector(s) on the rear of the system.
As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up. Remove the dongle.
3.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (password changes all six month) and click ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT + F4 key simultaneously to close the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
5.) Press the ALT + F4 key again to close the Ultrasound Application.
6.) Insert the USB Bluetooth Adapter CD into the system´s DVD drive.
7.) Open the Windows Start menu by pressing CTRL + ESC on the keyboard and click on “Run”.
Figure 3-34 select “Run” and enter F:autorun in “Run” window
8.) Enter F:autorun into the “Run window and click OK. The following window appears:
Install Bluetooth Software
Figure 3-35 Install Bluetooth Software
9.) Click on “Install Bluetooth Software”.

3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
10.)Confirm the following dialog window with NEXT. The “License Agreement” window appears:
Figure 3-36 Welcome to Install... and License Agreement
11.)Select “I accept the terms in the license agreement” and then click on NEXT.
12.)Confirm the following dialog with NEXT. The “Ready to Install the Program” window appears.
Figure 3-37 Ready to Install the Program
13.)Click on INSTALL and then confirm the following “Driver Signature Notice” dialog box with OK.
14.)When the dialog “Bluetooth device not found” appears, connect the Bluetooth Adapter (DBT-120)
on an available USB port on the rear of the system.
Figure 3-38 Bluetooth Adapter connected to USB port on rear of the system

3-7-3-1 Installing the USB Bluetooth Adapter and the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
15.)After plugging in the Bluetooth Adapter, wait a few seconds until the “Found New Hardware Wizard”
has installed the Bluetooth Dongle.
NOTICE If prompted to enter a security code, enter it as shown in Figure 3-39.

(This depends on the Version of the Bluetooth Adapter). Otherwise you can skip step 16.).
16.)Enter the 32-digit security code (8 digits per field), which is located on the back flap of the driver
CD-cover and then click OK.
Example shows
fictive security code!
Figure 3-39 if prompted to, enter security code
NOTE: If you have misplaced or lost the security code included with the USB Bluetooth Adapter, you
can obtain the security code from this site: http://66.45.42.85/dlink/.
NOTE: If you cannot access your USB Bluetooth Adapter using the software, the security code was If
you have misplaced or lost the security code included with the USB Bluetooth Adapter, you can
obtain the security code from this site: http://66.45.42.85/dlink/.
NOTE: If you cannot access your USB Bluetooth Adapter using the software, the security code was
entered incorrectly. Please refer to the Troubleshooting section of the manual for help.
17.)When the “InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog appears, click on FINISH.
Figure 3-40 Finish installation and restart the system
18.)Finally click on YES to restart the system.

3-7-3-2 Configuration of the Bluetooth Software

1.) After the system has restarted, connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB
connector(s) on the rear of the system.
2.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password, click ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT + F4 key again to close the Ultrasound Application.
5.) Press CTRL + ESC to open the Windows Start menu and open “My Bluetooth Places”.
Figure 3-41 select “My Bluetooth Places” and click on Next
6.) In the “Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard” dialog click on NEXT.

7.) In the following window, enter an unique computer name (e.g., A07006 = Serial number of the
system) and then click NEXT.
enter an unique
computer name
Figure 3-42 Device Name and Type
8.) Confirm the following dialog with NEXT.

The “Bluetooth Service Selection” window (see: Figure 3-43) appears.

3-7-3-2 Configuration of the Bluetooth Software (cont’d)
9.) In the displayed “Bluetooth Service Selection” window deselect all services and then click NEXT.
deselect ALL services

in this window
Figure 3-43 Bluetooth Service Selection
10.)In the “Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard” window click on SKIP.
Figure 3-44 Click on Skip and then Finish configuration
11.)In the following window select FINISH to complete configuration.

3-7-3-2-1 Advanced Bluetooth Configuration
1.) Press CTRL + ESC to open the Start menu and open “My Bluetooth Places” (see: Figure 3-41).
2.) Select “Find Bluetooth Devices”, press the upper trackball key and select Properties.
3.) Select the ACCESSIBILITY page and deselect “Let other Bluetooth devices discover this computer”.
deselect
Let other Bluetooth devices discover this computer
Figure 3-45 Accessibility page
4.) Select the DISCOVERY page and deselect “Look for other Bluetooth devices”.
deselect Application Name Printer must be set to

Look for other Bluetooth devices Not Required
Figure 3-46 Discovery and Client Applications page
5.) Select the CLIENT APPLICATIONS page, select Printer and click the PROPERTIES button.
The “Security Connection” of the Application Name “Printer” must be set to “Not Required”.
6.) For saving the adjusted Bluetooth Configuration settings click APPLY and then OK.

3-7-3-3 Prepare the Printer and connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter
3-7-3-3-1 Prepare the Color Printer
Following steps are illustrated on the HP quick-start poster “Windows Quick-Start”:
- Attach automatic two–sided printing module

- Connect the power cord
- Load white paper
- Turn on the printer and install print cartridges
3-7-3-3-2 Connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter
NOTE: For connection scheme refer to Section 3-5-11 on page 3-18 or see: Figure 3-47.
1.) Switch off the printer.

2.) Connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter to the USB port of the printer using the enclosed cable.
3.) Switch on the printer.
4.) Connect the included Power Adapter to the Bluetooth Printer Adapter and to the power socket.
Figure 3-47 Connection of Bluetooth Printer Adapter
5.) The test page is printed after approx. 10 seconds.

The Bluetooth Printer Adapter can now be used for Bluetooth printing.
3-7-3-3-3 If no Test page is printed

1.) Restore factory defaults of Bluetooth Printer Adapter as follows:
- While the Bluetooth Printer Adapter is on, hold the black test button on the MPI Printer
Adapter down for approx. 12 sec. until the yellow LED flashes.
(Please see the Bluetooth Printer Adapter Quick Guide for troubleshooting.)
2.) Disconnect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter and Printer Power.
3.) Continue again with Section 3-7-3-3-2 "Connect the Bluetooth Printer Adapter" .

3-7-3-4 Install the printer software/driver
1.) Press CTRL + ESC to open the Start menu and open “My Bluetooth Places” (see: Figure 3-41).
“Normal select” (Click) = left/right trackball key; “Opening a context menu” = upper trackball key
2.) Double-click “Bluetooth Setup Wizard”. The Bluetooth Setup” window appears:
Figure 3-48 Bluetooth Setup
3.) Select “I want to find a specific Bluetooth device...” and then click on NEXT.
4.) In the following “Bluetooth Device Selection “ dialog window select “deskjet 5600 Bluetooth
Printer Adapter” and then click NEXT.
5.) In the “Bluetooth Security Setup” window click on SKIP PAIRING.
Figure 3-49 Bluetooth Security Setup and Service Selection
6.) Finally, select “Hardcopy Cable Replacement” and then click FINISH.

3-7-3-4 Install the printer software/driver (cont’d)
7.) Wait until the “Add Printer Wizard” window appears. In this window click on HAVE DISK....
Figure 3-50 Install Printer Driver from Disk
8.) Use the BROWSE button to search the following path (see: Figure 3-50)
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\HpDeskjet5600 or
• C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\Olivetti P210 and then click OK.
9.) In the following window select hp deskjet 5600 series respectively Olivetti JOB_JET P210 and
then click OK.
10.)In the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.
11.)Select the PAPER/QUALITY page and select the adequate paper size.
Figure 3-51 General and Paper/Quality page
12.)For saving the adjusted paper size settings click APPLY and then OK.
13.)In the next window, click OK again and then close all open windows.
14.)Start the Ultrasound Application (Start menu -> Programs -> Kretz V730 -> Kretz V730).
15.)Assign the printer as Report Printer; see: "Printer Remote Control Selection" on page 3-48.

3-7-4 Printer Installation manually

1.) On the control panel, press the UTILITIES key.
2.) In the “Utilities” menu on the left side of the screen, select SYSTEM to invoke the setup desktop.
3.) If not already done, connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle to the USB connector(s) on the
rear of the system. As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up.
5.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard simultaneously to switch from “GEMS Service Home
Page - Netscape” to “Kretz UISApp” ( = Ultrasound Application); see: Figure 5-50 on page 5-64).
6.) Select the SERVICE page.
“Printer” button
Figure 3-52 Service window
7.) Click on the SERVICE TOOLS... button.

8.) Click on the PRINTER button.

3-7-4 Printer Installation manually (cont’d)

9.) Click the ADD PRINTER button.
A warning message appears:
Please read this message carefully and click YES if you have skills to do this.
Figure 3-53 Add Printer and Printer Installation/Properties
10.)Click the NEXT button to start the Add Printer Wizard.

11.)Select the ‘Local Printer‘, deselect “Automatically install Plug and Play printer” and then click NEXT.
Figure 3-54 Add Printer Wizard

12.)Select the corresponding Printer Port (e.g., Figure 3-55 = USB001) and click NEXT.
Figure 3-55 Select Printer Port
13.)In the following window select the HAVE DISK button.
Figure 3-56 Have Disk...
14.)Use the BROWSE button to search the Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\xxxx).

Figure 3-57 Select Printer Driver path (C:\Utilities\PrinterDriver\....)
15.)Click OPEN.
16.)Verify the selected Printer Driver path and confirm with OK.
Figure 3-58 verify selected Printer Driver path


17.)Select the manufacturer and model of your printer and confirm with the NEXT button.
18.)Assign a name, decide if the printer should be used as default printer and confirm with NEXT.
see: Figure 3-59.
Figure 3-59 Assign name and select Printer Sharing - no
19.)Select ‘Do not share this printer‘ and confirm the “Printer Sharing” window (Figure 3-59) by clicking
NEXT.
20.)The “Complete the Add Printer Wizard” window appears on the screen.
Figure 3-60 Complete manual Printer Installation
21.)Complete the manual Printer Installation with the FINISH button.

22.)Close all open windows, close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT and restart the system
(turn off and on the system).
Ver

3-7-5 Adjustment of Printer Settings

1.) After system restart, press the UTILITIES key, and then select SYSTEM from the menu area.
6.) Click on the SERVICE TOOLS... button.
7.) Click on the PRINTER button.
8.) Select the desired printer from the pull-down menu and click the EDIT SETTINGS button.
9.) Confirm the warning message with the YES button. The “Printer Properties” appear.
select the desired printer

from the pull-down menu
Figure 3-61 Select the desired printer
To adjust the HP 990cxi / HP 995c printer see: Section 3-7-5-1 "HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings" .
To adjust the UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD Printer see: Section 3-7-5-2 "UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer
Settings" .
To adjust the Bluetooth HP 5600 Series printer see: Section 3-7-5-3 "HP 5600 Series / Olivetti Job Jet
210 - Printer Settings"
WARNING After each printer installation, the leakage currents have to be measured
acc. IEC 60601-1 resp. UL2601-1.

3-7-5-1 HP 990cxi / HP 995c- Printer Settings

1.) Call up the ‘Printer Properties’; operation see: Section 3-7-5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" .
2.) Select the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.
3.) Select the SETUP page for adjusting print quality and paper size.
“Paper type” should be set to ‘Automatic’. See left Figure 3-62.
4.) Select the FEATURES page for adjusting ‘Two-Side Printing’ if desired.
“Orientation” must be set to ‘Portrait’. See right Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 HP Printer - Settings
5.) For saving the adjusted printer settings click APPLY and then OK.
6.) Select the PORTS page and selct/verify the correct USB printer port.
Finally close the ‘Printers’ -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT.
8.) Assign the HP 990cxi / HP 995c printer as Report Printer;
see: Section 3-7-6 "Printer Remote Control Selection" on page 3-48.
9.) Print report page(s) containing measurements.
For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
10.)Turn off the system!

3-7-5-2 UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings

NOTICE Settings for Paper Size MUST match with the used Paper (large/small) and also the right color ink
cartridge has to be used. Otherwise you will get an error message at printing.
2.) Select the PAPER page and select:

- Paper Size: UPC-21L (large) / UPC-21S (small)
- Orientation: Landscape (recommended when using large paper size)
- High Speed (check mark on)
Figure 3-63 Paper page

3-7-5-2 UP-D21MD / UP-D23MD - Printer Settings (cont’d)

3.) Select the GRAPHICS page. From the “Color Adjust” pop-up menu select:
a.) Color Balance: Cyan = 0; Magenta = 0; Yellow = 0
b.) Gamma Select: Gamma 1
Figure 3-64 Graphics page (Color Balance + Gamma Select)
c.) Color Correction: set Printer Hardware Color Correction

d.) Lightness: Sharpness = 7 or 8; Dark = 0; Gamma = -12; Light = 8
Figure 3-65 Graphics page (Color Correction + Lightness)
Finally close the ‘Printers’-window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT.

3-7-5-3 HP 5600 Series / Olivetti Job Jet 210 - Printer Settings
CAUTION The Bluetooth Connection Set as well as the color printer MUST NOT be installed by the user!
For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
2.) Select the GENERAL page and click the PRINTING PREFERENCES... button.
3.) Select the PAPER/QUALITY page and select the adequate paper size.
Figure 3-66 Paper/Quality page
4.) For saving the adjusted paper size settings click APPLY and then OK.
5.) In the next window, click OK again.
Finally close the ‘Printers’ -window with the close button and exit System Setup with SAVE&EXIT.
6.) Assign the HP 5600 Series respectively the Olivetti Job Jet 210 printer as Report Printer;
see: Section 3-7-6 "Printer Remote Control Selection" on page 3-48.
7.) Print report page(s) containing measurements.
For operation see Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
8.) Turn off the system!

3-7-6 Printer Remote Control Selection

To assign the Remote PRINT A key, Remote PRINT B key and Report Printer to desired Printer:
1.) On the control panel, press the UTILITIES key.

2.) In the “Utilities” menu on the left side of the screen select SYSTEM to invoke the setup desktop.
3.) Select the PERIPHERALS page.
Foot Switch
Remote
Control
Report Printer
Print B
Print A
Figure 3-67 Peripherals page
• Remote Print A: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT A key.
• Remote Print B: Select the desired Printer for the remote control PRINT B key.
NOTE: Optionally the Remote Control can be done by Foot switches.

Therefore select “Print A” or “Print B” in “Foot Switch Left” or “Foot Switch Right” - section.
• Report Printer: Select the desired Report Printer from the drop-down menu.
NOTICE The selected Report Printer is usually used for printing reports and images from Sonoview.

Section 3-8
System Configuration
3-8-1 System Specifications
3-8-1-1 Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV

The physical dimensions of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV unit are summarized in Table 3-5.
Table 3-6 lists the size of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV, with monitor and without on-board peripherals.
Table 3-5 Physical Dimensions of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Height Width Depth

142 cm / 55.9 inches 68 cm / 26.8 inches 100 cm / 39.4 inches
3-8-1-2 Weight without Monitor and Peripherals
Table 3-6 Weight of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV with Monitor and without other Peripherals
Model Weight [kg] Weight [lbs.]

Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV 136 300
3-8-1-3 Acoustic Noise Output

max. 57dB(A)
3-8-2 Electrical Specifications
Table 3-7 Electrical Specifications for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100 VAC ±10% 9.2 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
115 VAC ±10% 8.00 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
130 VAC ±10% 7.10 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
230 VAC ±10% 4.00 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)

240 VAC ±10% 3.85 A 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
Power Consumption nominal 920 VA including all options.
Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories.
All mains outlets are co-switched by the unit’s mains switch via built-in isolation transformer.
Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!

The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to
these outlets must not exceed 350VA !

3-8-3 System Setup

Modifications of system parameters are supported by diverse dialog pages and windows on the system
setup desktop:
• General - Date, Time, Clinic Name, Language, Screen saver, etc.

• User Settings - to save User programs, 3D/4D programs, Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.
• Peripherals - to adjust assignment of PRINT keys, Foot Switch, selection of Save Destination, etc.
• Option - shows which options are installed in the system
• Service - connect the USB “standard GE” dongle and enter the “standard GE revolving” password
(changes every six month) to get access to the Service Tools functions
• Backup - Save/Load User Settings Only, Save/Load/Delete Full Backup
• Network - to set up all DICOM, Sonoview and Network configuration nodes
• System Info - shows which Software/Hardware version is installed in the system
To invoke the Setup procedure:
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu.
2.) Select the SYSTEM item to activate the setup desktop screen.
In general operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys (mouse emulation).
Trackball (mouse position):

positions the pointing device (arrow) on the desktop
left trackball key (left mouse button):

sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
upper trackball key (right mouse button):

no function in system desktop
right trackball key (left mouse button):

sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
3-50 Section 3-8 - System Configuration

3-8-3-1 How to enter Date and Time

Select the GENERAL page in the System Setup see: Figure 3-68.
1.) Select the “Date Format” (only one can be active).

2.) Click the DATE/TIME button to activate a sub dialog window to enter date, time and time zone.
3.) Click the TIME FORMAT button to activate a sub dialog window to choose the preferred time
format.
4.) Click SAVE&EXIT to save Settings and exit System Setup.
select Date Format
Display options
select Time Format
select Date/Time
and Time Zone
enter Clinic Name change Language

change EUM
Language
Exit without saving Save Settings & Exit
Figure 3-68 System Setup - General page
3-8-3-2 How to enter Hospital Name

1.) Select the text box to enter a new “Clinic Name” with the keyboard.
The clinic name will be copied into the Hospital ID in the information header.
3-8-3-3 How to change Language and the EUM Language

1.) Select the desired language from the pop-up menu.

NOTE: After changing the language the system has to reboot.

3-8-3-4 How to change Video Norm

1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control Panel.
2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the “Utilities” menu - which is shown in the menu area on the left side
of the screen - to activate the setup desktop screen.
3.) Select the SERVICE page in the System Setup.
select
Video Norm
Exit without Save Settings &

saving Exit
Figure 3-69 Service Functions window
4.) If not currently selected, click the desired field PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz).
NOTE: The Adjustment of the Video Norm will take about 3 minutes!
5.) Click SAVE&EXIT to exit System Setup.

6.) The system will reboot.
3-8-3-5 How to change the Keyboard Layout

see: Section 6-6-1 "Setup the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Keyboard Language Layout" on page 6-7

3-8-4 On-Board Optional Peripherals

Mains outlets: Mains socket ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 for accessories.
All mains outlets are co-switched by the unit’s mains switch via built-in isolation transformer.
Output voltage for: ST1 - ST5: 115V or 230V.
CAUTION Modification of voltage setting only by an authorized service person!

The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color video monitor) connected to
these outlets must not exceed 350VA !
Table 3-8 Approved Peripherals
Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal

B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MD NTSC/PAL
Digital Color Video Printer SONY UP-D21MD USB-Port

Digital Color Video Printer SONY UP-D23MD USB-Port
SVO-9500MD NTSC
SONY
SVO-9500-MDP PAL
Video Cassette Recorder
HS-MD3000U NTSC
Mitsubishi
HS-MD3000E PAL
Line Printer Hewlett Packard hp deskjet 990cxi

Line Printer Hewlett Packard hp deskjet 995c
Hewlett Packard HP 5600 Series
Bluetooth Printer
Olivetti Olivetti Job Jet 210
Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) Fujitsu MCM3130AP
Global Modem Multi-Tech MT5634ZBA
ECG Preamplifier MAN6

Footswitch MFT7

3-8-5 External I/O Connection Panel (GES)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 3-70 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 3-9 External I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Table Number Description
1 VGA OUT Table 3-10 print out VGA signal with monitor/printer
2 MODEM Table 3-11 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection
DICOM input/output
3 NETWORK Table 3-12
twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
4 USB-1 Table 3-13 USB port
5 USB-2 Table 3-13 USB port
6 COMP VIDEO OUT Table 3-14 BNC Connector, Color Video Output

3-8-5-1 External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-10 VGA OUT Connector, Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 VGA OUT1 R Red
2 VGA OUT1 G Green
3 VGA OUT1 B Blue
4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND
13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync
14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync
Table 3-11 Modem, RJ-11 Modular 6 Pin
2 TEL L4 Telephone L4
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-12 Network Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin
1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+
2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD-
3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+
6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD-
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-13 USB 1, 2 Connectors
1 VCC USB Power Supply
2 - Data USB Data (-)
3 + Data USB Data (+)
4 GND USB Power Ground

Table 3-14 COMP VIDEO OUT Connector
Pin No Signal Description
1 (Center Pin) Signal
2 (Coax Pin) Signal GND
Table 3-15 Footswitch Connector (located at Power Supply Module CPN - rear side)
Pin No Input Signal Description

1 Signal GND
2 right switch normally open
3 left switch normally open
4 not connected not connected
3-8-6 Video Specification

Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
Table 3-16 Video Specifications VGA Connector
Timing Parameter Value
Visible Resolution 800 x 600
Horizontal Rate [kHz] 47.20
H Total cycle time [µs] 21.20
H Sync width [µs] 1.50
H Back Porch [µs] 2.94
H Active Video Time [µs] 16.15
H Front Porch [µs] 0.616
Horizontal +/- pos
Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.00
Vertical Total cycle time [ms] 13.30
V Sync Width [ms] 0.170
V Back Porch [ms] 0.276
V Active Video Time [ms] 12.68
V Front Porch [ms] 0.174
Dot Clock [MHz] 49.54

Electrical Specifications on VGA Connector
• Signal Level: 700 mV at 75 Ohm

• H/V Sync: TTL Level
Table 3-17 Video Specifications for Composite, Video Connector
S-Video Output set to: PAL NTSC

Timing Parameter 50Hz 60Hz
Visible Resolution 800 x 600 800 x 600
17.734475 MHz 14.318 MHz

Pixel Clock = 4* ft = 4* ft
Horizontal Total Line 64µs / 1135 Pixel 63.56µs / 910 Pixel
Horizontal Active Display 50.50µs / 902 Pixel 52.50µs / 752 Pixel
Horizontal Front Porch 1.96µs / 35 Pixel 1.62µs / 23 Pixel
Horizontal Sync Width 4.62µs / 82 Pixel 4.68µs / 67 Pixel
Horizontal Back Porch 6.52µs / 116 Pixel 4.76µs / 68 Pixel
Vertical Total Lines 20ms / 312.50 Lines 16.68ms / 262.50 Lines
Vertical Active Lines 18.18ms / 284 Lines 15.22ms / 239.50 Lines
Vertical Front Porch 256us 4 Lines 381us / 6 Lines
Vertical Sync 160us / 2.50 Lines 190us 7 3 Lines
Vertical Back Porch 1408us / 22 Lines 890us / 14 Lines
Serration Pulses 5 6
Interlaced yes yes
Aspect Ratio pixel size 14.75 (H) : 17.734475 (V) 14.75 (H) : 14.318 (V)
Video levels on 75 Ohm:
white level 1020mV 1020mV
black level 370mV 370mV
blanking level 320mV 320mV
sync level* 20mV 20mV
Section 3-9
Available Probes
See Chapter 9 - Probes, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement service probes.

Section 3-10
Software/Option Configuration
Refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 17.3.1, System Setup - General,
for information on configuring items like Clinic Name, Language, Display, Date/Time, Date Format and
Time Format.
For information on configuring User Settings, refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User
Manual, Chapter 17.3.2, System Setup - User Settings.
For information on configuring assignment of PRINT keys, Foot Switch, Save Destination, VCR Source,
etc., refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 17.3.3, System Setup -
Peripherals.
For information on configuring Software Options, refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User
Manual, Chapter 17.3.4, System Setup - Options.
For information on configuring Connectivity, refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User
Manual, Chapter 17.3.7, System Setup - Network.
For information on configuring the Measure Setup, refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User
Manual, Chapter 18.
3-58 Section 3-10 - Software/Option Configuration

Section 3-11
Connectivity Installation Worksheet
Site System Information
Floor: Comments:
Site:
Dept: Room:
Serial #: Type: REV:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title Phone E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings Remote Archive Setup
IP Address: Remote Archive IP:

Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name:
Default Gateway:
Services (Destination Devices)

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Section 3-12
Network IP Address Configuration
NOTE: Following Information must be provided by customer or hospital engineer before you can start:
A Station name, AE Title, IP address and Port Number for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION. Only if necessary (e.g. for Internet access).
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the Control panel once to display the Utilities menu.
2.) Select SYSTEM and then open the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
3.) Click the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button, read the message and confirm with YES.
click Network Configuration button, read

message and afterwards confirm with Yes
Figure 3-71 Network Configuration
4.) The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page appears.
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if

your network supports this capability.
You need to ask your network administrator for
the appropriate settings.
Type in:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
NOTE:This example shows fictive numbers!
Figure 3-72 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
To specify a DICOM Address, follow the instructions of described in the Basic User Manual,
Chapter 17.3.7 of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
3-60 Section 3-12 - Network IP Address Configuration

3-12-1 Map Network Drive
1.) Select the MAP NETWORK DRIVE button (in the System Setup - Network page, see: Figure 3-71)
to open a dialog where the system can be connected to a shared network drive of another server.
Figure 3-73 Map Network Drive window
2.) Enter the name of the shared network folder in the „Network Folder Name“ field.
3.) Supply a valid user name and a password for this folder.
NOTE: If you check the „Automatic Reconnect“ box, the system tries to establish the connection
again when starting up.
Otherwise, the connection must be re-established manually after a shutdown or reboot.
4.) Select the CONNECT button to establish the connection to the remote machine.
If successful, the DISCONNECT button becomes active.
NOTICE If there is an error during the connection, a warning message appears inside the dialog.
In this case, please verify the data in the dialog.
NOTICE If there already is a connection to the remote server, the CONNECT button is grayed.
To change the existing connection, first click on DISCONNECT and then enter the new settings.
WARNING Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable.
For details, contact your local system administrator.
If you backup Sonoview data to this server, all the patients’ demographic data will be
copied to this server!

Section 3-13
Paperwork
NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manual, Installation Manual,...) for the
peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all
relevant safety and user information is available during the operation and service of the complete
system.
3-13-1 Product Locator Installation

NOTE: The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator
card.
Figure 3-1 Product Locator Installation Card
3-13-2 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the
installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available.
Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.
3-62 Section 3-13 - Paperwork

Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments.

4-1 Overview 4-1
4-2 Required Equipment 4-1
4-3 General Procedure 4-2
4-4 Functional Checks 4-7
4-5 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images 4-31
4-6 Software Configuration Checks 4-41
4-7 Peripheral Checks 4-42
4-8 Mechanical Function Checks 4-43
4-9 Site Log 4-44
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV (BT´05) Basic User Manual; see: Table 9-16, “System Manuals,” on page 26.
Section 4-2
Required Equipment
• An empty (blank) DVD/CD+(R)W or MO Disk.
• At least one transducer. See ”Probes” on page 9-27 for an overview.
(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

Section 4-3
General Procedure
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power Cable
on the system.
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Screw on the pull-out protection of the mains power cable with the 2 screws.
3.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet.
Circuit Breaker
2 screws
pull-out Protection
Mains Power Cable
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber,
indicating the System (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
4-2 Section 4-3 - General Procedure

4-3-1-1 Scanner Power On (cont’d)
5.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the control panel.
ON/OFF Standby switch
Figure 4-2 ON/OFF Standby Switch
When the ON/OFF Stand-By switch left below the control panel is pressed, the System (including the
Back-end Processor) starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
Depending on the BIOS-Version no status messages are displayed during this process.
Boot up time is about 2 minutes.
the Standby switch. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
4-3-2 Power Off / Shutdown

NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again.
The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
4-3-2-1 Scanner Shutdown

1.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel.
2.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
3.) Disconnection of the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.
Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the cable from the system,
or unplug the cable from the wall socket.
Circuit Breaker
2 screws
pull-out Protection
Mains Power Cable

4-3-3 System Features
4-3-3-1 Control Panel
1 2 3
4
19
18 5
17
16 6
7
15 8
14 13 12 11 10 9
Figure 4-4 Control Panel Tour
1.) Ultrasound scanning gel holder

2.) Sonoview (Image Management) key
3.) VCR Remote Control key
4.) TGC - Slider Controls
5.) Mode/Gain keys
6.) 3D Volume Mode, 4D Volume Mode and Harmonic Imaging key
7.) Inter memory keys to save to Sonoview or send to DICOM server
8.) Print A-, Print B-Trigger key
9.) Freeze / Run key
10.)Trackball and Trackball keys
11.)Trackball Menu Navigation key
12.)Annotation and Measurement keys
13.)Menu Control digipots and toggle switch controls
14.)Exit key
15.)Navigation wheel (Menu control element)
16.)Probe key
17.)Patient Data Entry key
18.)Utilities key
19.)Keyboard with shortcut function keys and F1 key to invoke the Electronic User Manual (EUM)

4-3-3-2 Menu Control
4 5
Figure 4-5 Menu Control Area- 2D Main Menu
1.) User Program: shows all setting for the active application. The active one is highlighted
2.) Additional functions which are supported by the selected Mode.
3.) Sub Menu: to adjust settings of the selected Scan mode.
4.) Status Area: shows the current functionality of the digipots, toggle switch controls and the trackball
5.) Status of the FREEZE key
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Mode is selected.
DIGIPOTS, TOGGLE SWITCH CONTROLS and TRACKBALL
Activated functions are easily controlled by these controls. By rotating resp. switching, they deliver
digital pulses and can be selected by program call-up.
They are displayed in the status area by their location, their function, and their actual value of setting.
NAVIGATION WHEEL and corresponding KEYBOARD-SHORTCUT FUNCTIONS
The available menus are shown in the menu area on the left side of the screen. The current menu
selection is highlighted. Roll the navigation wheel and the blue arrow moves to another selection.
Press the navigation wheel to select the desired item.The corresponding keyboard shortcuts (1, 2, 3,
etc.) are shown to the right of the actual function.
If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned to
select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen.
Pressing SET (the left or right trackball key) starts selected menu function.

4-3-3-3 Monitor Display
Figure 4-6 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-2 Monitor Display Features

1. Logo 14. Image Area
2. Patient Name (Last-, First-, Middle Name) 15. Measurement results
3. Patient ID-number ; GA (Gestational Age) 16. Status (volume box, saved images, gray map)
4. Probe / Application 17. Status area of the Freeze key

5. Depth / Frame rate 18. Status area of the trackball
6. Mechanical Index 19. Status area of digipots and flip switch controls
7. Thermal Index 20. Menu (Softkey) area

8. Sonographers Name 21. Bodymarks
9. Hospital Name (Identification) 22. Depth scale markers
10. Date 23. Gray scale wedge

11. Time 24. Focal zone marker(s)
12. Image Info 25. Orientation marker
13. TGC curve

Section 4-4
Functional Checks
For a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, following pages will familiarize you with
image optimization for:
• 2D Mode (B Mode)
• M Mode
- MCFM Mode
• Spectral Doppler Modes
- PW - Pulsed Wave Doppler
- CW - Continuous Wave Doppler
• Color Doppler Modes
- CFM - Color Flow Mode
- PD - Power Doppler
- TD - Tissue Doppler
• Volume Modes
- 3D Static
- 4D Real Time
- 4D Biopsy*
- VCI* Volume Contrast Imaging (A-Plane, C-Plane and VCI Static)
- STIC*
- TUI*
- VOCAL II*
NOTE: Some software may be considered standard depending upon system configuration.
If any Modes or Options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Mode is selected.
Some function only appear in the menu area and the status area of the digipots and flip switch controls
if they are available for the selected Probe.
NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson® 730Pro V (marked with * in this manual).

4-4-1 2D Mode Checks
Figure 4-7 2D Main and 2D Sub
Table 4-3 2D Mode Functions
Step Task Expected Results
1 Rotate the 2D MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire
2D Mode Gain
image.
Transmit Power
2 Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity.
Depth
Adjusts the depth range of the ultrasound image for the region of interest.
3
The number of image lines and the frame rate are automatically optimized.
Screen Format (Dual, Quad, Single) Press this keys to change the display Mode from Single to DUAL or QUAD
4 display mode.
Press the SINGLE format key or the 2D MODE key to change from Dual or
Quad to Single display.
Image Orientation
Use the LEFT/RIGHT respectively the UP/DOWN keys on the control panel
5 to alternate the image orientation.
The orientation marker on the screen shows the actual orientation.
2D Automatic Optimization
Pressing the AUTO key causes automatic optimization of the gray scale to
6 enhance the contrast resolution.
Pressing again: optimization will be updated and remain active.
Press the AUTO key twice to switch off the Automatic Optimization in 2D.
Pulses are transmitted not only perpendicularly to the acoustic window, but
XBEAM-CRI * (CrossBeam
7 also in oblique directions. The advantages of XBeam-CRI are enhanced
Compound Resolution Imaging) contrast resolution with better tissue differentiation and clear organ borders.
4-8 Section 4-4 - Functional Checks

Speckle Reduction Imaging is a smoothing type filter to reduce speckle in the

8 SRI * (Speckle Reduction Imaging)
ultrasound image.
Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left
9 2D+2D/SRI * frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode
image with SRI information.
Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left
10 2D+2D/CRI/SRI * frame shows only the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode
image with XBEAM CRI and SRI information.
FFC combines a low frequency to increase the penetration and higher

11 FFC (Focus and Frequency Composite) frequency to keep a high resolution.
It reduces speckle and artifacts in the 2D image.
12 Coded Excitation improves image resolution and penetration in the far field.
CE (Coded Excitation)
This allows to use a higher frequency on technically difficult patients.
Advantage of the Trapezoid Mode: The scan area is very increased in

13 LINEAR / TRAPEZOID relation to the linear display by steering the ultrasound lines in the border of
the probe.
High Resolution Zoom Press this key in write mode. The displayed zoom box can be placed over
14 the entire 2D image area, also the size and position of the zoom box can be
changed. Press the HR-ZOOM key again to activate the zoom and again to
exit the High Resolution Zoom function.
Harmonic Imaging
15 Press the HI key on the control panel to switch on/off the Coded Harmonic
Imaging function in 2D Mode provided the active probe allows this function.
To adjust the range of the receive frequency.

FREQUENCY resp.
16 high resolution / lower penetration, mid resolution / mid penetration, or
HARM.FREQU. in case of Harm. Imaging
lower resolution / high penetration
17 OTI (Otimized Tissue Imaging) OTI™ allows to “fine tune” the system for scanning different kinds of tissue.
Increases the number of transmit focal zone, so that you can tighten up the
18 FOC #
beam for a specific area.
19 To select the depth position of the actual focus zone(s). Arrows at the left
FOC DEPTH
edge of the 2D image mark the active focal zone(s) by their depth position.
Use this control to select a part of interest of the 2D image. The advantage
20 ANGLE of the decreased field-of-view is an increased 2D frame rate due to the
smaller sector width.
This function allows the adjustment of the Volume O-Axis position of 3D

21 BETA VIEW probes in 2D Mode. The green line in the displayed symbol indicates the
position of the acoustic block.
22 ZOOM Image magnification (Pan Zoom) in read-/ and write mode.
23 Control to improve the resolution by reducing the frame rate.

QUALITY
Respectively reducing the resolution by increasing the image frame rate.
The signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the
actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and
24 LINE FILTER
signal-to-noise ratio.
This function is only available if CRI is switched off.

Enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing

25 ENHANCE the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures.
Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.
Dynamic Range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of

26 DYN.CON.
gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.
Persistence is a temporal filter that averages frames together.

27 PERSIST. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
This function is only available if CRI is switched off.
If this filter is set to “high”, the XBeam-CRI image is smoothed.

28 CRI ENHANCE * CRI Enhance setting “off” leads to a sharper impression of the XBeam-CRI
image. This function is only available if X-BEAMCRI is switched on.
29 Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have
REJECT
a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).
30 EXIT Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the 2D Sub menu.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, 2D Mode.

4-4-2 M Mode Checks
Figure 4-8 M Main and M Sub
Table 4-4 M Mode Functions

1 Cursor Position Adjust the M Cursor position with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image.
2 Activation of M Mode Press the right or left trackball key to activate both Modes (2D/M).
3 M Mode Gain Rotate the M MODE key to adjust the sensitivity (brightness) of the entire M image.
4 M Mode Depth Common with 2D Mode Depth.
Invert
This function inverts the M mode trace from up to down in the M mode display area.
5
(The Invert function is only available with endovaginal probes.)
6 SPEED By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected.
7 FREQUENCY Common with 2D Mode Frequency resp. Harm.Frequ. in case of Harm. Imaging.
8 FORMAT For selection of three different rations of display format.
9 DYN.CON. Dynamic Range enhances a part of the grayscale to make it easier to display pathology.
10 ENHANCE Due to this function a finer, sharper impression of the image is produced.
11 REJECT It determines the amplitude-level below which echoes are suppressed (rejected).
Exit
12 Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the M Sub menu.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 6, M Mode.

4-4-2-1 MCFM Mode Check
By pressing the M control and the C control, the MCFM mode is switched on in the preparation mode.
The M-cursor with M-Color window appears on the active 2D image.
Figure 4-9 MCFM Main and MCFM Sub Menu
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 6.4.

4-4-3 Spectral Doppler Mode Checks

NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Spectral Doppler Mode (PW or CW) is selected.
NOTE: The Continuous Wave Doppler Mode is an Option. The CW key is only illuminated if the option
is installed and the selected probe is capable for the Continuous Wave Doppler Mode.
Figure 4-10 PW Main and PW Sub
Table 4-5 Spectral Doppler Mode (PW, CW) Functions
1 Adjust the Gate- position resp. size with the TRACKBALL in the 2D single image.
Gate Position and Gate Size
The upper trackball key changes from Gate position to Gate size.
2 Press the right trackball key to activate the motion display.

Activation of Doppler Mode
Press the left trackball key to activate both Modes (B/D).
3 Doppler Gain Rotate the PW MODE key to adjust the amplification of the entire spectrum.
Steering
4 The steering function is only possible with linear probes.
5 The envelope curve of the Doppler spectrum (maximum velocities) and the
RT TRACE (Real Time Auto-Trace)
corresponding evaluations are automatically displayed on the monitor.
Invert
6 This function inverts the Doppler spectrum display in relation to the direction of
the flow. (The Invert function is possible in read and write mode.)
7 SPEED By touching up or down, four different sweep speeds can be selected.
8 BASELINE Adjusting the baseline is possible in read- and write Mode (up/down in 8 steps).
9 WMF (Wall Motion Filter) Used to eliminate Doppler “noise” that is caused by vessel wall motion.

Table 4-5 Spectral Doppler Mode (PW, CW) Functions
The Velocity Range display is governed by the pulse repetition frequency (PRF)
10 PRF
Exceeding the maximum PRF, the HPRF-Mode is automatically switched on.
11 The angle cursor can be turned in both directions without stop. By pressing the
ANGLE
angle knob repeatedly the angle correction switches from +60° to 0° and to -60°.
12 SCALE To select the displayed measuring unit (in relation to the zero-line).
13 FORMAT For selection of either one of three formats.
14 FREQUENCY Serves for selection of the required transmit frequency for actual gate position.
15 DYNAMIC Dynamic Range adjusts the display cutoff of the Doppler analysis waveform.
Exit
16 Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the PW or CW Sub menu.
For further details see: Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual:
• Chapter 7.1, PW Mode (Pulsed Wave Doppler)

• Chapter 7.2, CW Mode (Continuous Wave Doppler)

4-4-4 Color Doppler Mode Checks
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD or TD) is selected.
Figure 4-11 CFM Main and CFM Sub Menu
Table 4-6 Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, TD) Functions
1 Color Box Position and Adjust the Box- Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2DSingle image.
Color Box Size The upper trackball key changes from Box position to Box size.
CFM Gain Rotate the C MODE key to ensure that continuous flow is displayed, where appropriate.
2 PD Gain Rotate the PD MODE key to adjust the Power Doppler Gain.
TD Gain Rotate the C MODE key to adjust the Tissue Doppler Gain.
Changes the Single image display to two simultaneous half images. The left frame shows only
3 2D+2D/C (PD or TD)
the 2D Mode image. The right frame shows the 2D Mode image with color information.
Steering
4 Beam Steering is only possible with linear probes in CFM and PD Mode.
Invert
5 The color of the color wedge inverts around the baseline. (impossible in PD Mode)
6 QUALITY Improves the Color Resolution by reducing the image frame rate, respectively vice versa.
7 It serves for selection of the Transmit Frequency which also depends on the Color Box
FREQUENCY
position.
8 Used to eliminate Doppler “noise” that is caused by vessel wall or cardiac wall motion.
WMF (Wall Motion Filter)
(CFM,PD)
9 PRF By touching toward up the PRF increases. By touching toward the PRF decreases.
10 ZOOM Image magnification (PAN-Zoom) in read- and write mode.

Table 4-6 Color Doppler Mode (CFM, PD, TD) Functions

11 DISPLAY MODE To select the CFM- Display Mode (V; V-T; V-Pow; Pow-T; or T).
12 SCALE (CFM, TD) The maximum velocities are displayed above and under the color scale in kHz, cm/s or m/s.
13 With “Line Filter” the signals of the neighboring pulses are less weighted for the display of the
LINE FILTER
actual pulse which considerably improves the detail lateral resolution and signal-to-noise ratio.
14 Gently means the transition between color and gray scale information.
GENTLY COLOR
The embedding of the color into 2D Mode is performed smoothly with less colored splashes.
15 ARTEFACT (on/off) Switch on/off the artifact suppression.
The baseline shift can be used to prevent aliasing in one flow direction similar to the Doppler
16 BASELINE
baseline shift. There are 8 steps in each direction. (impossible in PD Mode)
17 ENSEMBLE Controls the number of pulses to constitute one Color- or Power-Doppler line in the display.
18 Determines the line density within the Color-Box.

LINE D.
The lower the line density, the larger the line distance and the size of the color pixels.
Provides selectability of the color coding for an optimization of the display of blood flow (similar
19 C-MAP (PD, TD) to the post-processing curves with grayscale 2D scans).
After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.
20 To select different filter periods for raising velocity.

SM. RAISE
Filtering of the rise velocity leads to noise suppression.
21 To select different filter periods for falling velocity.

SM. FALL
This filter leads for “prolongation” of the display flow.
The “Flow Resolution” function controls the axial resolution of color in the display.
22 FLOW RES.
It adjusts the axial sample depth of color pixels.
23 The Balance controls the amount of Color display over bright echoes and helps to confine
BALANCE
color within the vessels wall.
24 After FREEZE you can adjust the Color Threshold. It eliminates small color noise or motion
THRESHOLD
artifact signals in the color image. (small number cuts off fewer signals than a higher setting)
Exit
25 Press the EXIT key on the control panel to exit the CFM, PD or TD Sub menu.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual:
• Chapter 8, CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode)

• Chapter 9, PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode)
• Chapter 10, TD Mode (Tissue Doppler Mode)

4-4-5 Volume Mode Checks
NOTICE Real Time 4D (freeware on Voluson® 730ProV), RT_4D_Biopsy*, VCI*, STIC*, TUI* and VOCAL II* are
Options. If these options is not a part of the system configuration, the appendant checks can be omitted.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Menu and which Volume Mode
(Static 3D, Real Time 4D, 4D Biopsy, VCI A-Plane, VCI C-Plane, STIC, TUI) is selected.
4-4-5-1 Pre-Volume Mode Functions
1. select the desired Volume Acquisition Mode:
Volume Acquisition: Static 3D Volume Acquisition: Real Time 4D
The Volume Mode function is switched on, the “3D Pre” respectively “4D Pre” menu appears
on the screen (write mode) and the volume box appears on the Image area.
2. select Acquisition and/or

Visualization Mode
3. select an User Program
4. Start the Volume Acquisition with the Freeze key resp. the right trackball key.
Figure 4-12 Pre-Volume Mode menus
Table 4-7 Pre-Volume Mode Functions

1 3D RENDERING 3D Static volume acquisition + rendered 3D image (also in combination with PD or CFM Mode)
1 SECT. PLANES 3D Static volume acquisition resp. 4D volume acquisition without rendered 3D image

Table 4-7 Pre-Volume Mode Functions

2 4D REAL TIME Real Time 4D - continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered images
Volume Contrast Imaging - improves the contrast resolution ans the signal / noise ratio and
3 VCI A-PLANE *
therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs
Volume Contrast Imaging (coronal plane) - improves the contrast resolution ans the signal /
4 VCI C-PLANE *
noise ratio and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs
With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D.
5 STIC *
(also in combination with PD or CFM Mode)
Real Time 4D Biopsy

6 4D BIOPSY * continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D rendered image.
- Quarter size display of Sectional Planes without 3D image or

7 - Quarter size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image
(Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!)
Dual size display of Sectional Planes + rendered 3D image.

8 (Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!
This format is not possible for Static 3D Acquisition)
- Full size display of a the reference image or

9 - Full size display of the rendered 3D image.
(Note: The display depends on selected Acquisition- and Visualization Mode!)
Volume Box Position Adjust the Volume Box (ROI) Position resp. Size with the TRACKBALL in the 2D Single image.
10
and Volume Box Size The upper trackball key to change the Trackball function from Box Position to Box Size.
11 QUALITY Changes the line density against the acquisition speed (low, mid1, mid2, high1, high2).
12 VOL. ANGLE To select the Volume Sweep Angle.
13 Start Acquisition Press the FREEZE key resp. the right trackball key to start the Volume acquisition.
4-4-5-2 Functions after the 3D Acquisition
Figure 4-13 3D/4D Main - Sectional Planes and Image Rendering

Table 4-8 Functions after the 3D Acquisition
X-ROT: Rotation about X-axis of the reference image.

1 Y-ROT: Rotation about the Y-axis of the reference image.
Z-ROT:Rotation about the Z-axis of the reference image.
PAR. SHIFT: Movement along Z-axis of the reference image.

2
TRACKBALL: Movement along X- and Y-axis of the reference image.
Parts of the orthogonal sections A, B and C are complied to a 3D section aspect.

3 NICHE
The aspect shows quasi a spatial cut into the reference image.
4 O.H. GRAPHIC Display of orientation help image figure.
Choosing a reference image

Press the left trackball key repeatedly to choose the Reference image among A,
B or C.
5
Choosing a reference image automatically determines the control functions of the
rotary controls and the trackball for the liberal adjustment of a sectional plane.
Initial Condition
6 Resets the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial (start)
position.
3D Image Orientation
7 To change the image orientation of the rendered 3D image.
8 ZOOM The 3D image as well as the sectional planes can be varied by their aspect ratio.
9 S.TXT/S.SM. MIX To adjust the mix ratio between two calculated modes.
TH. LOW respectively All echoes below the level will be disregarded for calculation of the surface.
10
PD LOW in case of 3D+PD All color values below the level will be disregarded for calculation of the surface.
11 MAGI CUT Ability to electronically manipulate the images and cut way “3D artifacts”.
12 RENDER PARAM. To select the Render Mode (Basic Mode and Render Algorithm)
13 RESET CURVE Reset the curvature of render start to default position

4-4-5-3 Sub Menu
Figure 4-14 3D/4D Sub Menu
Table 4-9 Sub Menus
RENDER VIEW To select the desired Render View Direction (green line symbolizes direction of the view).
1
DIRECTION Note: The Render View Direction keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes.
2 GRAY/CHROMA Depending on individual requirements a “harder” or “softer” image can be obtained.
3 3D/4D INFO On/Off switch to show full or reduced Image Info parameter on screen.
4 On/Off switch to show an acquired 3D+CFM or 3D+PD image with or without the color
COLOR OFF
information.
Speckle Reduction Imaging (SRI) can be activated in all 3D/4D modes (except Full size
5 SRI * display) to reduce speckle which interferes with the sectional planes (A, B and C).
Note: The rendered 3D image is not affect.
Adjusts the contrast of the screen background from dark to bright.

6 BACKGR.
Note: This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode.
To set the start point of the gamma curve bending. (Graphic display on screen)
7 CONTR. POS
To set the contrast of the bending. (Graphic display on screen)

8 CONTRAST
Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.

9 POWER THRESH.
Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.
Only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.

10 BALANCE
Note: This key is only available if a 3D+CFM or a 3D+PD image is acquired.
11 PROBE ORIENTATION Adjust and activate the display of direction markers at border of the image.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 11.

4-4-6 Using Cine
4-4-6-1 Activating Cine

Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence one by one.
4-4-6-2 Cine-Split Function (Multiple Format)

After FREEZE of a sequence in 2D Mode two or four different images of the sequence can be displayed
simultaneously in Dual respectively Quad Display Mode.
Move the TRACKBALL to display the images of the stored sequence. Use the FORMAT keys to
change to the next (part of) frozen 2D image sequence to play back the cine memory.
NOTE: The Cine-Split function (multiple format) is also possible in 2D Auto Cine mode.
4-4-6-3 Activating 2D Auto Cine

1.) After Freeze press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
2.) Select the start image of the sequence by rotating the START digipot. The selected image is
simultaneously displayed.
3.) Turn the END digipot to the end image of the sequence. The selected image is displayed.
4.) Select the review SPEED and the read ZOOM factor.
5.) Select the Cine Mode review direction.
6.) To start/stop the Cine Loop playback press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
After stopping the sequence, move the TRACKBALL to display the images one by one.
4-4-6-4 Spectral Doppler- or M Cine Loop

Press FREEZE, then roll the TRACKBALL to display the Cine / Loop one by one.
The UPPER TRACKBALL KEY changes from the 2D Cine to the D Loop (respectively M Loop).
NOTE: The active Cine is displayed on the screen: Cine xxx/Loop or Cine/Loop xxx.
4-4-6-5 Activating 3D Rotation Cine

1.) After 3D Volume acquisition select the 3D ROT. CINE item from the menu area.
2.) Select the ROTATION ANGLE from the menu area or select it manually with the START and END
digipot rotary controls.
3.) Select the STEP ANGLE and the ROTATION AXIS.
4.) Select CALCULATE or press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY to start the calculation.
5.) To start/stop the 3D Rotation Cine sequence press the RIGHT OR LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
4-4-6-6 Activating 4D Cine

1.) After Real Time 4D acquisition press the Freeze key to display the “4D Cine” menu.
2.) Press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY (Toggle function: Start/Stop).
3.) Select the Cine Mode direction and the review SPEED.
4.) To start/stop the Real Time 4D Cine sequence press the LEFT TRACKBALL KEY.
NOTE: After stopping a 3D Rotation Cine sequence or a Real Time 4D Cine sequence, move the
TRACKBALL to display the images one by one.

4-4-7 Generic Measurements

NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on:
• the currently selected Application and Display Mode,
• the selected “Study”,
• and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 13.
General remarks to perform Generic Measurements:

• By pressing the CALIPER key on the control panel the Generic Measurement function is switched on.
• Selection of the desired measurement marks is done with the NAVIGATION WHEEL or by pressing
the corresponding keyboard shortcuts.
• If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned
to select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen.
• Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL.
• Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key).
• To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
• Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming the
last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement.
• To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, select CANCEL or press BACKSPACE.
• To delete the results of the last measured item, select DELETE or press BACKSPACE.
• To delete all measurement results of the selected “Study” from the monitor as well as from the
corresponding Worksheet, select the CLEAR GROUP or press the DELETE key.
• All measurement results will be automatically included in the “Generic” patient worksheet.
• To erase measurement results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the
DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
• • To exit from Generic measurements, press the CALIPER key or the EXIT key on the control panel.
NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press FREEZE.
4-4-7-1 Distance and Tissue Depth Measurements (2D and M Mode)

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC DIST. in the menu area.
2.) Select the appropriate item from the menu area. An active cursor appears.
3.) To position the active cursor at the start point (distance) or the most anterior point (tissue
depth), move the TRACKBALL.
4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key).
The system fixes the first cursor and displays a second active caliper.
5.) To position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point
(tissue depth), move the TRACKBALL.
6.) To complete the measurement, press SET.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
Before you complete a measurement:
To toggle between active calipers, or to re-adjust the traced line, press the upper trackball key.
To erase results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the DELETE MEAS. key on
the keyboard.
NOTE: To alternate the control from one cursor to the other, press CHANGE (the upper trackball key).
To re-adjust a traced line, press UNDO (the upper trackball key) repeatedly.

4-4-7 Generic Measurements (cont’d)
4-4-7-2 Circumference/Area Measurements

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC AREA in the menu area.
2.) Select the corresponding item from the menu area. An active cursor displays.
3.) To position the active cursor, move the TRACKBALL.
4.) To fix the start point, press SET (the right or left trackball key). The system fixes the first cursor
and displays a second active caliper.
5.) To position the second caliper, move the TRACKBALL and press SET (Rt. / Lt. trackball key).
NOTE: If you have selected a “trace” item, the measurement is finished and the area and
circumference results appear on the screen.
6.) An ellipse appears the axis of which is defined by these two points.
To adjust the width of the ellipse, move the TRACKBALL.
7.) To toggle between calipers, or to readjust a traced line, press the upper trackball key.
8.) To complete the measurement, press SET (right or left trackball key). The system displays the
circumference and area in the measurement results area.
Before you complete a measurement:
- To erase the ellipse resp. trace and the current data measured, select DELETE or press the
BACKSPACE key on the keyboard.
The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.
- To exit the measurement function, press the CALIPER key or EXIT key on the control panel.
4-4-7-3 Volume Measurements

1.) Press the CALIPER key and then select the GENERIC VOLUME in the menu area.
2.) Select the appropriate item.
3.) Perform the measurement(s) using the TRACKBALL and SET (right or left trackball key).
For further details: see 4-4-7-1 and 4-4-7-2.
4-4-7-3-1 Multiplane Measurements
NOTE: This volume measurement is only possible in 3D Mode.
1.) Select the reference image in which the measurement is to be performed (A, B or C).
2.) Press the CALIPER key once and then select the MULTIPLANE item in the menu area.
3.) Select the first section through the body by rotating the REF.SLICE digipot (first section should
be set at the edge of the object).
4.) Position the start dot of the area which should be surrounded and store it with SET.
5.) Surround the area with the trackball, then press SET (right or left trackball key). The area is
calculated and displayed. It may even be “zero”. Press the SET key twice.
6.) Select the next parallel section with the REF. SLICE digipot and measure the area.
7.) Repeat 5. and 6. until the edge of the measured object is reached.
NOTE: The contour of the measured area is not erased if a new section is adjusted.
To call back the measured areas touch the PREV / NEXT flip switch control.
NOTE: To erase the results, select the INIT item at the menu area.

4-4-7 Generic Measurements (cont’d)
4-4-7-4 Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode
NOTE: The Spectral Doppler image is displayed based on time (X-axis) and velocity (Y-axis).
4-4-7-4-1 Auto Trace

1.) Press the CALIPER key.
2.) Select AUTO TRACE item from the menu area on the left side of the screen.
It traces the Spectral Doppler image automatically and displays the results.
3.) Select the SENSITIVITY of the envelope curve (to eliminate artifacts).
4.) Select the TRACE MODE channel of the envelope curve (upper, both, lower).
5.) If necessary, select the Angle and the Baseline.
6.) Press the right or left trackball key SET to finish the measurement.
Before you complete the measurement:
- To readjust the start cycle (vertical yellow line), press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
Press SET (right or left trackball key) to fix the line.
- Press the CHANGE key again to readjust the end cycle (vertical green line).
Press SET to fix the line.
NOTE: The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low-noise record of the
Doppler spectrum. Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may
not be ensured!
4-4-7-4-2 Manual Trace

2.) Select the MANUAL TRACE item from the menu area. A cursor appears on the screen.
3.) Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the measurement and press SET
(right or left trackball key) to fix the marker.
4.) Trace to the end of the period and press the SET key again to fix the mark.
The measurement results appear on the screen.
Before you complete the measurement:
To readjust the traced line, press UNDO (upper trackball key) repeatedly.
4-4-7-4-3 Heart Rate

2.) Select the HR item from the menu area. A line appears on the screen.
3.) Move the line with the TRACKBALL to the start point of the period and press SET (right or left
trackball key). A second line appears.
4.) Move the second line to the end point of the period.
5.) Select the number of “HR cycles” for the measurement with the digipot.
6.) Press the SET (right or left trackball key) again to fix the line. The Heart Rate is displayed.
NOTE: For further Doppler Measuements and other details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Basic User Manual, Chapter 13

4-4-8 Calculations
The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system supports calculation packages and application-oriented
patient Worksheets (Reports) for following applications:
• Abdomen Calculations
• Small Parts Calculations
• Obstetric Calculations
• Cardiology Calculations
• Urology Calculations
• Vascular Calculations
• Gynecology Calculations
• Pediatric Calculations
• Neurology Calculations
• Orthopedics Calculations
NOTE: Confirm that the patient information is correct and the probe and application are selected properly.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on:

• the currently choosen Application
• the selected Display Mode,
• the selected “Study”,
• and the settings in the Measure Setup - MEASURE & CALC page.
For further details refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic User Manual, Chapter 14
General remarks to perform Calculations:
• By pressing the CALC key on the control panel the Calculation function is switched on.
• Selection of the desired measurement marks is done with the NAVIGATION WHEEL or by pressing
the corresponding keyboard shortcuts.
• If the TRACKBALL MENU NAVIGATION key is illuminated, the trackball is consequently assigned
to select the menu items in the menu area on the left side of the screen.
• Positioning of measurement marks is done with the TRACKBALL.
• Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with SET (right or left trackball key).
• To change measuring marks before completion press CHANGE (upper trackball key).
• Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup, also the FREEZE key can be used for confirming the
last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement.
• To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item, select CANCEL or press BACKSPACE.
• To delete the results of the last measured item, select DELETE or press BACKSPACE.
• To delete all measurement results of the selected “Study” from the monitor as well as from the
corresponding Worksheet, select the CLEAR GROUP or press the DELETE key.
• All measurement results will be automatically included in the “Generic” patient worksheet.
• To erase measurement results, press the CLEAR ALL key on the control panel or the
DELETE MEAS. key on the keyboard.
• To exit from Generic measurements, press the CALIPER key or the EXIT key on the control panel.
4-4-8-1 Worksheet (Report) Pages
Press the WORKSHEET key on the control panel to view the “application dependent” patient worksheet
pages that contain the results of calculations and measurements. Any stored patient worksheet can be
edited, printed, transferred, saved to Sonoview or sent to DICOM server.

4-4-9 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-4-9-1 Connecting a probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Open the right-hand side door, lay the cable into the intended cable holders and close the door.
So it is free to move, but not resting on the floor.
4-4-9-2 Activating the probe

1.) Press the PROBE key to activate the “Probe Select” menu.
2.) Select the appropriate probe using the TRACKBALL and the TRACKBALL KEYS.
3.) Upon selection of an “Application”, the programmed user presets appear.
4.) Clicking a “Setting” field causes loading of the preset.
The probe is initialized, the main menu (2D mode) and the ultrasound image appears on the monitor in
write mode (real time display).
4-4-9-3 Deactivating the probe

When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode (read mode).
1.) Press the FREEZE key.
2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV for complete cleaning instructions.)
3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-4-9-4 Disconnecting the probe

Prior to disconnect a probe freeze the image. It is unnecessary to switch the unit off.
CAUTION If a probe is disconnected while running (write mode) a software error may occur.
In this case switch the unit OFF (perform a reset).
1.) Open the right-hand side door, remove the cable from the cable holder and close the door.
2.) Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of
the probe port.
3.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of
the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.

4-4-10 Image Management (Sonoview)

For Sonoview - Image Management functionality refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV. It talks about several topics:
• Clipboard
• Sending Exams
• Printing Exams / Images
• Export Exams / Images
• Backup Exams
• Restore the Backup Exams
• DICOM Print / Send
• Verifying and Pinging a Device
• Sending Images via e-mail
• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s stored Image
• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation
• Configuring Connectivity
• Services (Destinations)
• Input of comments and voice annotations
• Measure Distance and Ellipse
• Buttons
• Views
• DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Erasing/Formatting
• Changing Backup Folder on mapped Network Drive
• etc.
Figure 4-15 Sonoview

4-4-11 Using the MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)
NOTICE The MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) is an Option.
The optional 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical disk drive supports the following medias:
1.3GB; 640MB; 540MB; 230MB and 128MB
Eject Button
Magneto-Optical Drive
(MOD)
Figure 4-16 Magneto-Optical Drive
1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels
which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set
so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and
the MOD could break.
3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. Manual ejection methods are listed below
in preferred order from best (1) to worst (3).
a.) Press the EJECT switch on the MOD while system is ON.
b.) Press and hold the EJECT switch while the system is booting.
c.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the EJECT switch while
system power is OFF.
NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator
unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot
the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection
methods.

4-4-11-1 Formatting Media
To erase/format the backup media, DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD, press the SONOVIEW key on the Control
panel.
The Sonoview screen appears on the monitor; see: Figure 4-15 on page 4-27.
a.) Select the “DVD/CD+(R)W and MO Formatting” tool on the left side of the Sonoview screen.
b.) Insert the medium and select the DVD/CD+(R)W or the MO icon.
By selecting MO cartridge the unit displays the “MO Disk Formatter” window as shown in Figure 4-17.
1.) Select a Format Type from the drop down menu. If desired, mark the Low Level Format icon.
2.) Click the START button to start the formatting process.
MO and DVD/CD+(R)W Formatting tool
MO icon
DVD/CD+(R)W icon
Format Type Selection
Low Level Format Selection
Start Formatting Process
Figure 4-17 MO Disk Formatter Window
3.) A message box appears on the screen. Confirm with OK.

4.) When the formatting has been completed, click OK to continue.
Figure 4-18 MO Disk Formatter messages
5.) Select the CLOSE button and press the EXIT key on the control panel to return to the Scan Mode.

4-4-11-1 Formatting Media (cont’d)
By selecting DVD/CD the unit displays the “Erase DVD/CD” window as shown in Figure 4-19.
1.) Select the “Erase Mode” and click the [OK] button to start the process.
NOTICE It is highly recommended to use the complete erase mode, to avoid problems with the CD-(R)W or
DVD-(R)W! When using a DVD-(R)W, the complete erase mode is not possible.
Figure 4-19 Erase DVD/CD Window
2.) During erasing the Ultrasound system displays following message.
Figure 4-20 Erasing disk
3.) Press the EXIT key on the control panel to return to the Scan Mode.
4-4-11-1-1 Adjusting the Write Speed of the DVD/CD Recorder

1.) Click the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the Sonoview screen.
2.) Select DVD/CD RECORDER from the tool bar.
Settings
icon
Figure 4-21 Settings of the DVD/CD Recorder
3.) Choose the “Write Speed” from the corresponding pop-up menu.

Section 4-5
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
1.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel. The menu area changes to the Utilities menu.
2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to activate the setup desktop screen.
3.) Select the BACKUP page.
“User Settings Only” “Full Backup” group

group
Stop USB Devices
Figure 4-22 System Setup - Backup page
The “Backup” page is subdivided in two main groups:
A.) User Settings Only

• Section 4-5-1 "Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-32
• Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
B.) Full Backup
• Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35
• Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-37
• Section 4-5-5 "Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-39
The User Settings and/or Full Backup can be saved to the following destinations:
• D: partition of internal hard disk

• DVD/CD+(R)W
• MOD (if present)
• Mapped Network Drive Z:
see: Section 3-12-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-61
• USB-Stick
• Any other drive connected to the system (e.g.; an external USB-hard disk)
Note: This function is only available in the Full Backup utility.
For further details review: Section 3-5-12 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-19.
NOTICE When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in Chapter 2 of the
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) Basic User Manual.

4-5-1 Save User Settings Only (Application Settings)
The User Settings contains:
• User Programs
• Auto Text
• 3D/4D Programs
1.) Insert a DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive.
4.) Select the BACKUP page.
5.) Click the SAVE button of the “User Settings Only” group.
Choose the media

and
then click Save
Figure 4-23 User Settings Only - Save window
6.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the SAVE button.
7.) Select the NEW FILE... key and enter a file name (without extension).
8.) Click the OK key to start the process. When the saving has been completed, click OK.
4-32 Section 4-5 - Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images
4-5-2 Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)
CAUTION The loading procedure overwrites the existing application settings on the local hard drive. Make sure to
insert the correct DVD/CD or MO. Additionally you can load the backup from D:\User Settings.
1.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MO (Magneto-Optical Disk) into the drive.

4.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the “User Settings Only” group.
Choose the media

and
then click Load
Figure 4-24 User Settings Only - Load window
5.) Choose the media (e.g., DVD/CD+RW) and click the LOAD key.
6.) Select the appropriate file and click OK. The “Load Backup Data” window appears.
NOTICE It is highly recommend to use Application settings which are adapted for the systems software version!
Complete Backup
>> button
Load button
Figure 4-25 Load Backup Data

4-5-2 Load User Settings Only (Application Settings) (cont’d)
7.) Select the Complete Backup (marked blue; see: Figure 4-25) and click the >> button to copy the
Complete Backup into the Load Data field.
8.) Click the LOAD button to start the loading procedure of the complete backup into the system.
NOTE: Also only parts of a User Settings Only “Backup” can be loaded into the database to overwrite,
restore, copy, etc.... the database in the system.
1.) Click the + sign to open the content tree.
sign to open the

content tree
>> button
<< button
Load button
Figure 4-26 Load only parts of the Backup
2.) Click the >> button to copy the selected item into the Load Data field.
3.) To return selected items from the Load Data field to Backup Data field select the << button.
4.) Click the LOAD button to start loading procedure of the selected Backup item into the system.
4-5-3 Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)
A full backup always contains the following data
• Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements)
• SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD)
• User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.)
• Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings)
• V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options)
• Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the service platform)
• VP (additional system data)
CAUTION It is recommended to create a full backup of the settings once a week.
NOTE: Always “Full Backup” any presets, configurations and application settings to HDD and/or DVD
or MO-disk before upgrading the software and/or application settings. This ensures that if the
presets need to be reloaded, will be the same ones the customer was using prior to service.
3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the SAVE button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
enter description
click Next
Figure 4-27 Full Backup Save
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive).

5.) Enter the description of the full backup.
6.) If desired and possible (Network Drive and Other drive only), activate “Include Images.
NOTE: The “Include Images” option may result in a large amount of data: up to 70 Gigabytes!
7.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process.

After copying the data, the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV reboots and the application starts again.

4-5-3 Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
When the Full Backup is stored on a network drive (to map a network drive see: Section 3-12-1 "Map
Network Drive" on page 3-61), it may be desirable to move the data (e.g., for backup or maintenance).
The backups reside in sub folders of the main “fullbackup” -folder found at the root of the drive.
For Example: Backups on the mapped Network Drive are below path Z:\fullbackup.
The directory structure of the full backup data is as follows:
The sub folders have the names fbX where X is a number

(e.g., Z:\fullbackup\fb1).
The data resides within a directory structure within these sub folders.
It is possible to move the fbX sub folders, even leaving gaps in the
numeration sequence.
However, NO change MUST be made to the contents of the fbX folders
itself, otherwise the backup data cannot be restored!
Figure 4-28 directory structure of full backup data
If the destination „Other drive“ is selected, the available drives

(e.g., external USB-memory stick) can be chosen from the drop down menu.
Figure 4-29 “Other drive” drop down menu
NOTICE When the backup is saved to an external USB-device, the system has to be informed about the removal
of the hardware. For this purpose every last dialog of "Full Backup Save" and "Full Backup Delete" has
a STOP USB DEVICES button (see: Figure 4-30).
Figure 4-30 Please stop USB Devices before unplugging!
For further details review: Section 3-5-12 "External USB-Devices" on page 3-19.
4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)
WARNING Always backup any data before an upgrade; see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
The “Full Backup” loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL the existing data on the
local hard drive of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system!
CAUTION There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data.
The following rules specify the restrictions:
1.) Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was
created on is prohibited.
2.) Options can only be restored on the same Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system within the same
major software version.
3.) When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x), the following items will not be restored:
A.) User Settings
B.) Options
C.) State of the Service Platform (new model type necessary for VOLC)
4.) The user is only allowed to restore data to a different system if and only if the software version on
this system is the same as in the backup.
5.) The user is only allowed to restore data onto the same system if and only if the software version
on this system is equal or higher than the version in the backup.
6.) The user is not allowed to restore the following items to a different system:
A.) Windows Network Settings
B.) Options
C.) DICOM AE Title
D.) DICOM Station Name
E.) State of the Service Platform
7.) The field engineer (service mode, e.g. activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore data to a
different machine, if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the
version in the backup.
Operation see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-33.
8.) The field engineer (service mode, e.g. activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore all data
with respect to the rules to 1.) to 3.).
Operation see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-33.

4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the LOAD button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
click Next
Figure 4-31 Full Backup Load
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., Network Drive).

5.) Click on the backup to be restored (additional information is displayed in the table).
6.) Select the NEXT button. The following window will be displayed.
Figure 4-32 Select Data to be restored
7.) Select the data to be restored to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system.
NOTE: For description of the check box names review: A full backup always contains the following data
4-5-4 Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings) (cont’d)
8.) Click the NEXT button and then select YES to start, or NO to cancel the restore procedure.
Figure 4-33 Start Restore Backup now?
WARNING When clicking “YES”, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by
the data of the backup and can not be restored!
After restoring the data, the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV reboots and the application starts again.
4-5-5 Delete Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)

3.) Select the BACKUP page and click the DELETE button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
select Delete
Figure 4-34 Full Backup Delete
4.) Choose the Destination (e.g., HDD = Hard disk).

5.) Click on the backup to be deleted (additional information is displayed in the table).
6.) Select the DELETE button.
WARNING There is no “ UNDO” function for this action!

4-5-6 Archiving Images

1.) Press the SONOVIEW key on the control panel.
2.) Insert the DVD/CD+(R)W or MOD into drive.
If required, format/erase the media, see Section 4-4-11-1 "Formatting Media" on page 4-29.
3.) When you click the OPEN button on the upper left side of the screen, a list of all the exams is
displayed see Figure 4-35.
capacity
of selected
exams
Open button
Backup
button
Figure 4-35 Sonoview Screen
4.) Select the exam(s) using the TRACKBALL, the CTRL or SHIFT key on the alphanumeric keyboard
and the right trackball key SET.
The number of all exams, the number of currently selected exams, the number of images and the
capacity of selected images are displayed automatically at the right and upper corner of the exams list.
5.) Click the BACKUP button.

6.) Select the destination for the backup.
NOTE: For destination NET perform Section 3-12-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-61 first.
7.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
Figure 4-36 Backup windows
NOTICE If you select to delete the exam after finishing the backup, it will be absolutely deleted from the hard
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV!
For further information refer to Chapter 15 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
Section 4-6
Software Configuration Checks
Press the UTILITIES key and select the SYSTEM item from the “Utilities” menu - which is shown in the
menu area on the left side of the screen. The System Setup desktop offers different pages to check:
Table 4-10 Software Configuration (System Setup) Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)

1 General: Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct
2 General: Check that Location (Clinic Name) is correct Location Name is correct
3 General: Check Language settings desired Language is displayed
4 User Setting: Check all the User Settings settings assigned as desired by the customer
5 User Settings: Check settings of the “Patient ID” field settings assigned as desired by the customer
6 Print A and Print B keys are assigned as desired by the

Peripherals: Check assignment of Printer keys
customer
Foot Switch left and right are assigned as desired by the

7 Peripherals: Check assignment of Foot switch
customer
8 Peripherals: Check Save Destination assignment assigned as desired by the customer
9 Peripherals: Check 2D Save key assignment assigned as desired by the customer
10 Peripherals: Check Remote Print A, Remote Print B,

settings assigned as desired by the customer
Report Printer and DICOM Print Job assignment
11 Option: Check that all options are set up correct D = Demo , I = Inactive , P = Permanent
12 Network:
settings assigned as desired by the customer
Check DICOM, Sonoview and Network configurations
Service: Check the Video Norm standard as described in

13 settings assigned as required for the country
Section 3-8-3-4 on page 3-52
Press the UTILITIES key and select the MEASURE item from the “Utilities” menu - which is shown in
the menu area on the left side of the screen.
The Measure Setup desktop offers three different pages to check.
NOTICE Parameters and possible adjustments depend on the selected Application.

To view, add, delete, reorder, edit or when creating a new parameter (in the MEASURE & CALC page), it
is very important that all items are chosen correctly and that the relevant item is highlighted.
For further information refer to Chapter 18 in the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
Table 4-11 Measurement Setup Checks
11 Measure & Calc:

setting assigned as desired by the customer
Check all settings for all applications
Application Parameters:
2 setting assigned as desired by the customer
Check all settings for all applications
3 Global Parameters: Check all settings setting assigned as desired by the customer

Section 4-7
Peripheral Checks
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-12 Peripheral Checks
Step Task to do Expected Result(s)

1 Press the FREEZE key. Stop image acquisition.
2 The image displayed on the screen is printed on printer,

Press the PRINT A or PRINT B key on the Control Panel.
depending on the key assignment configuration
3 Press the VCR key on the Control Panel twice. VCR starts recording (REC - will be displayed on the screen)
4 Press the VCR key twice again. VCR stops recording
The “VCR Remote Control” menu is displayed in the menu

5 Press the VCR key on the Control Panel once.
area as well as the status area on the screen.
to start recording
Press the RECORD digipot or select the RECORD item
6 A red dot is displayed in the VCR status area on the Title bar
from the menu area.
to indicate that recording has begun.
7 Press the STOP digipot or select the STOP item from the To Stop recording
menu area. The video status icon is changed to (Pause)
Press the PLAY digipot or select the PLAY item from the
8 To start, Play back an examination
menu area.
9 Press the EXIT key on the control panel. to return to the scanning mode
Use the assignable keys on the control panel (their to perform actions on the recorded session, such as stop,
10 functions are shown in the status area) or select the pause, rewind or fast forward.
corresponding item from the menu area on the screen. The video status icon is updated accordingly.
4-7-1 ECG Check Out

Connect the ECG preamplifier MAN and check:
Table 4-13 ECG preamplifier Check
Connect the ECG at the Connector on the rear panel of the

1 It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the image
scanner. Press the ECG key on the control panel to
sector
display the “ECG” menu on in the screen.
4-7-2 Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supplies. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside
the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a
component connected to that specific power outlet.
4-42 Section 4-7 - Peripheral Checks

Section 4-8
Mechanical Function Checks
4-8-1 Rotation of the Control Console
locking lever
for locking and unlocking
the control console
Figure 4-37 locking lever under Control Console
Table 4-14 Rotation of the Control Console
1 Pull the locking lever under the Control Console forward, It is possible to rotate the Control Console up to 30° to
grasp it at the front grip and rotate the console. the right.
WARNING Do not put your hand between the control console and the main unit when moving the
console to the 0 position: Danger of injuries!
4-8-2 Brakes and Direction Locks
steer able
Brake Front Wheel
pedal
Figure 4-38 Front Wheel with Brake
Table 4-15 Brakes and Direction Lock
1 Flap the foot rest up and press the release brake pedals on The front wheels are engaged / disengaged for
the front wheels. transportation.

Section 4-9
Site Log
4-9-1 Site Log - System (Service Database)
3.) Select the SERVICE page. The “password window” appears automatically.
4.) Enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button to display the Service Tools window.
Figure 4-39 System Setup Service page and Service Tools window
5.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 4-40 Maintenance Report
6.) Fill in the requested information and click OK.

7.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the EXIT button on the System Setup
Service page.
NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the “Maintenance Report” message box
(Figure 4-40) appears automatically on the screen.
4-44 Section 4-9 - Site Log

4-9-1-1 To review the Service Database

As soon as the dongle is detected the login window pops up.
Figure 4-41 System Setup Service page and Service Functions window
7.) Click the SERVICE TOOLS... button. The Service Tools window will be displayed.
Figure 4-42 Service Tools Window

4-9-1-1 To review the Service Database (cont’d)
8.) Select the SERVICE VIEWER... button to get access to the E-Service page. Figure 4-43
Figure 4-43 Kretztechnik E-Service
9.) After selecting “Service Operations” from the links on the left side of the screen, the V730 Service
Database will be displayed. Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 E-Service V730 Service Database

4-9-2 Site Log - Paper Documentation
Table 4-16 Site Log
Date Service person Problem Comments


Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV’s system concepts, component arrangement, and
subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.

5-1 Overview 5-1
5-2 General Information 5-2
5-3 Main board Chassis GEZ Module 5-22
5-4 FrontEnd Processor 5-24
5-5 BackEnd Processor 5-33
5-6 Internal I/O 5-38
5-7 Top Console 5-43
5-8 Monitor 5-49
5-9 External I/O 5-50
5-10 Peripherals 5-51
5-11 Power Distribution 5-53
5-12 Mechanical Descriptions 5-60
5-13 Air Flow Control 5-63
5-14 Service Platform 5-64
5-15 Service Home Page 5-66
5-16 Service Page 5-70
5-17 Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) 5-85
5-18 LINUX - Service Function Page 5-87
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

Section 5-2
General Information
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV is a digital beamforming curved-, linear- and phased array ultrasound
imaging system. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono.
A CW-Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:

- 2D Mode and Color Doppler Imaging (CFM, PD and TD)
- M Mode + MCFM Imaging
- Doppler (PW, CW)
- 3D Mode and Real Time 4D Imaging
- Different combinations of the above modes
Monitor
Monitor Controls
Gel Holder
Control Console TGC - Slider Controls
Name Plate
Standby switch
Front Grip
DVD/CD+(R)W Drive
Lever to rotate and lock
3.5” MOD Drive the Control Console
(optional) (mounted at the front
below the Console)
Place for ECG Module

Place for B/W and/or
Color printer and/or
Probe Connectors part Video Recorder (VCR)
incl. CW Connector and
Probe storage connector
(not active for scanning)
Foot rest
Brakes to block the

front wheels
(under the foot rest)
Figure 5-1 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Major Components
5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information

Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)
Monitor
GEU
GEM GES
GW
without GEU GEZ
CPN
Figure 5-2 Major System Components
Major System Components:
• GEZ: Main Board Chassis: Section 5-3 on page 5-22

- Front-End processor Section 5-4 on page 5-23
- Back-End processor Section 5-5 on page 5-33
• GEU: Top Console User interface (System I/O with hard keys)
Section 5-7 on page 5-43
• MONITOR: Section 5-8 on page 5-49
• GES: External I/O Connection Module Section 5-8 on page 5-49
• GEM: Removable Disk drive module (MO-Drive and ECG-preamplifier - optional)
• CPN: Primary Power supply and Isolation transformer for the peripherals Section 5-11 on page 5-53
• GW: System mechanical chassis, stand alone trolley to keep all major components

Monitor
GEU User-Interface-Module
GW Trolley
(housing, mechanical
framework).
GEM-
ECG+Diskdrive GES External IO
The following components
Module are part of GW:
- monitor-table,
- shaft for GEU,
- GES External IO,
GEZ Main board Chassis - GEM ECG-Diskdrive,
- framework,
- cover-panels,
- CPN MainPowerSupply
PC Box Subboards: PC-Motherboard with - wheels.
Processor and Memory, ADD2 DVI Card,
CKV(Video-Card, DMA Control), CPE(Backplane-
Card)
CPP Powersupply- Secondaryboard
CRS RFI-Board:
MKD Proc/SysCtrl/MotCtrl/PW Doppler
CRW CW-Dopplerboard (Optional)
Subboards: 32xCPD
CPR Beamformer-Motherboard
CPV Probeboard
CPN MainPowerSupply Module
Figure 5-3 Basic Block diagram of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV


The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV used digital beamforming technology which provides high resolution
and high penetration performance. It is a general purpose, mobile, software controlled diagnostic
ultrasound scanner. Its function is to acquire ultrasound data and to display the data of different modes.
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV gives the operator the ability to measure anatomical structures and offers
analysis packages that provide information that is used to make a diagnosis by competent health care
professionals.
The Calculation and Report function supports following application packages:
• Abdomen (ABD)
• Obstetrics (OB)
• Gynecology (GYN)
• Cardiology (CARD)
• Urology (URO)
• Vascular (VAS)
• Neurology (NEURO)
• Small Parts (SM P)
• Pediatrics (PED)
• Orthopedics (ORTHO)
The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV supports a variety of linear-, curved-, phased array and pencil probes
for various clinical applications. Any three probes may be connected at the same time (+ one pencil CW-
probe).
Medical application fields include:
• Obstetrics
• Gynecology and Fertility
• Radiology
• Internal Medicine
• Neurology
• Cardiology
• Oncology
• Urology
• Orthopedics
• Pediatrics
The system is designed for follow-up expansion.
In addition to the initial operational settings for each transducer pre-programmed in the system, user-
customized parameter settings for each transducer may be inserted by the operator and stored for recall
as needed via the system control panel. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all
necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
Biopsy guidelines are provided on screen to assist in the collection of tissue samples, using biopsy
guide adapters offered as an optional accessory.
The system provides the ability to perform remote viewing of images without compression, via DICOM
3.0 compatible output. Management of patient history is possible by “Sonoview” image-filing function.
High-resolution images are provided by utilizing a technology called digital dynamic receive focusing.


Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End
Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
For more detailed explanations of functions and controls refer to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Basic
User Manual.
5-2-1 Description of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Operating Modes
5-2-1-1 B-Mode or 2D-Mode

B-Mode or 2D-mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for
location and measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other
modes. In 2D-mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such
as the heart is displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different
gray scale or color values in the display. The outline of the 2D cross-section may be a rectangle,
parallelogram, sector or 360-degree circle, depending on the particular transducer used.
2D-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5-2-1-1-1 Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI)

In Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue are minimized by receiving and processing
the second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV`s high performance HI provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding
contrast resolution, excellent acoustic clutter rejection and an easy to operate user interface.
Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for improved small parts imaging as well as far
field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise and improves imaging technically
difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic lesions in shallow-depth
anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy.
Coded Harmonics may improve the B-Mode image quality without introducing a contrast agent.
5-2-1-2 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on
the X-axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness
when accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display.
M-mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam.
Depth is arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used
in conjunction with a 2D image for spatial reference. The 2D image has a graphical line (M-line)
superimposed on the 2D image indicating where the M-mode beam is located.
5-2-1-2-1 MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode)

Color Flow Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color-coded qualitative
information concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid motion within the 2D mode or M
mode image. Color Flow overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color
maps. The Color Flow wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline.

5-2-1-3 Color Doppler Mode

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display.
There are three applications of this technique:
• Color Flow Mode (C) - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
• Power Doppler (PD) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
• Tissue Doppler (TD) - used to visualize tissue motion direction and velocity
5-2-1-3-1 Color Flow Mode

A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is
presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow (velocity,
variance, power and/or direction). Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-
section is overlaid on top of the grayscale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel
in the overlay, the decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo) information or a
blended combination is based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft tissue structures
and from the red blood cells. Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine the display
colors, but power and variance may also used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the
signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by
assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may
also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color flow can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral
Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode.
5-2-1-3-2 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented
as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in blood flow echoes. Often,
to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid on top of the gray scale
cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether
to display color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on
the relative strength of return echoes from the soft-tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high
pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures.
Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the
surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination.
The power in the remaining signal after wall filtering is then averaged over time (persistence) to present
a steady state image of blood flow distribution. Power Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and
Spectral Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode.
5-2-1-3-3 Tissue Doppler

The Tissue Color Doppler Imaging is used for color encoded evaluation of heart movements.
The TD image provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity.
5-2-1-4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In
spectral Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time
on the X-axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of
spectral broadening indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed
Doppler signals. This information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the
sample volume. PW Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image
with an M-line and sample volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating the position of the
Doppler sample volume. The sample volume size and location are specified by the operator. Sample
volume can be overlaid by a flow direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator, with the direction of
flow in the vessel, thus determining the Doppler angle. This allows the spectral display to be calibrated
in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency (Hz). PW Doppler also provides the capability of
performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and sample volume size. PW Doppler can be used
in combination with 2D and Color Flow modes.

5-2-2 3D Imaging
The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Ultrasound System will be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D
images which can be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 3D images are useful
in visualizing three-dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal relationships
between the images in the 2D sequence. The 3D image is presented using standard visualization
techniques, such as surface or volume rendering.
5-2-2-1 3D Data Collection and Reconstruction

2D gray scale images including Color Flow or Power Doppler information may be reconstructed.
The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by sweeping 2D-scans with special transducers
(called 3D-transducers) designed for the 2D-scans and the 3D-sweep.
2D ultrasound imaging modes are used to view a two dimensional cross-sections of parts of the body.
For example in 2D gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-dimensional soft-tissue
structure such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typically, the user of an ultrasound machine
manipulates the position and orientation of this 2D cross-section in real time during an ultrasound exam.
By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are obtained,
and these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body.
To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D images which
span a volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by translating
it in a direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another example method is to rotate the cross
section about a line contained in the cross section. The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Ultrasound System
uses the automated so called C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a
representative set of 2D cross-sections are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used
to construct other 2D cross-sections, or to view the collection of the cross-sections as a 3D images.
5-2-2-2 3D Image Presentation

Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D image as
a representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and present the
resulting sequence of 2D projections to the observer. The changing direction of observation helps the
observer to separate the features in the volume according to their distance from the observer.
5-2-2-3 3D Rendering
The 3D (volume) rendering is a calculation process to visualize certain 3D-structures of a scanned
volume by means of a 2D-image. The gray value for each pixel of the 2D-image is calculated from the
voxels along the corresponding projection path (analyzing beam) through the volume. The render
(calculation) algorithm, surface or transparent mode, determines how 3D-structures are visualized.
VOXEL
X
X PROJECTION WAY
PIXEL
Z
Y
VOLU
ME -
BLOC
K
Y
- DISPLA
2D
Figure 5-4 Principle: Volume Rendering

5-2-3
Front End Board CKV

Board CRS
RFI
Probe
PCI to Video
MUX
Local I/F Mgmt
and Beamformer
DMA
Connectors Board CPR
DIRECTION KTI105992, REVISION 1
Board
CPU CRT
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS - KRETZTECHNIK
Monitor
15”
System Control User

Control Dig. VGA I/F
PCI 32 Bit /
Out
33 MHz
Motor Control Aux. VGA

DRAFT
IPC–Pentium 4 AGP
Block diagram Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
3.06 GHz VGA RS232

768 MB
Figure 5-5 Top Level Architecture

HDD LAN 10/100
HVPS LVPS USB 2.0
80 GB MBit
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

Motor
Power DVD MO
Drive +RW Drv
PS Unit
PROPRIETARY SERVICE MANUAL
5-9
VOLUSON® 730PRO / 730PROV (BT´05)
5-10
5-2-3
5V,12V
Harddisk
Data
LineOut
PC-Motherboard eg. for Sonoview-
Sound Records
Components: Network, USB, Sound LINE OUT
CW-Channels selected by Relais MajorTasks: SystemControl, 3D-Rendering,
ImageProcessing (ScanConversion, CFM,CRI, etc) PS2-Adaptercable
PS/2
Monitor
CPZ Coverboard RS232 OUT
Power Connector
CPV CPR CRW
6x USB2.0
T/R(192) UI-Disp.
CWTX(16)
Aux-Power
Connector ADD2 DVI Graphic Adatper
CPV CPR Beamformer-Motherboard CRW CRS CPP
Transmitter-Receiver CW-Dopplerboard MID-Processingboard Powersupply- DVI-Out
Probeboard
(Optional) Secondaryboard
1 CW-PrbConnector for B,C,D modes: System Control:
32 x CPD -Separate -Multibeam-DeInterleave Clock Oscillator (60 MHz)
3 Prb-Connectors ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator -SubtractionFilter (for THI) - PRF-Generator Powersupply:
PRF,FN -Dig.TGC, DC-Canceling - BeamformerConfiguration 59VDC to: CKV-Video-Card
260pol Overlay-Logic, VGA-Adapter,Video-Converter RGB-VHS,
1 Dummy-PrbConn. -TxDelayMatrix -Mixer with NCO - TX/RX Focus Timing +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V, DVI-In
-Transmitter, -FIR-Low Pass - Line number (lateral +FAN(17...24VDC) +- etc
260pol
-RxAmp, Position) TX_POW(+-90V) DMA-Controller
-RxDelayMatrix - contains Tx-Power US-LineMemory, FrameMemory
CPD-Beamformer-Subboard -Analog: Mixer, Amps, B mode: Doppler + CFM: Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp DSC(Dig.ScanConverter) f. 2D S-VHS IN
Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) -Magnitude Calculator - CFM-Processing: DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer
-Probe Select 1x : Beamformer-ASIC VHS IN
generates TX-Pulses+TxFocus+TxApodisation, -PRF-SampADC16Bit, -Logarithmic Amplifier - Color Doppler shot lines Motherboard CPU-Memory
Relais
-Probe Recognition RxFocusDelay+Summation. -Resample transfer to CKV VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS1 S-VHS2 VHS1 O VHS2
16x : TX-PowerAmplifier -Edge Enhance -Doppler Processing:
(Signals to CPC) O
8x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC -LineFilter - DSP, Audio DAC
-Blending Motor Control:
Each CPD capable of -Frame Filter - Master of Control of 3D
16 TX-Channels, Sweep CPE-Backplane-Card RS232 In
4 RX-Channels - Sin Cos Motor Drive Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio
- Frame Start-On Trigger Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc.
- Write Logic Trigger CKV
DRAFT
(DMA Controller)
Aux_Supply CPN Console Sound IN
CPU-Control Beamformer-
"EBF_D"(18)
"MCPU_A"(12) Configuration-Data: CW-Data serial, SIN-COS Additional CPE-Connectors:
trobes "EH_DATA"(16) - Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3
"MCPU_D"(8) D,Q,16Bit each
N-COS "EH_ADR"(8) - Remote B/W Printer
US-Data
owered - Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN
Section 5-2 - General Information

CPK Motherboard of GEZ-Module:
Block diagram Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (cont’d)
CPV CPR PCW CRS CPP

VGA-Signal to V730EXPERT-
Touchscreen. (Signal is in fact
analog, but is re-sampled and
GEM- digitalized in Touchscreen.) Cable
KVN does not exist at V730PRO
ECG+Diskdrive- CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module (59VDC, GEU-User-Interface-
USB Cable Power-OFF-Signals)
Module: Module PC-Keyboard,
Figure 5-6 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV - Block diagram

External Diskdrives Trackball
ECG-Module CPH
PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V
Trafo StdbySwitch
(User Power ON/
OFF)
CPY
CCF Powerswitch-
Powersupply- Plugboard
FootSwitch
Primaryboard
5-2-4 Dataflow Control Description

This section describes functions of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Boards vs different Operation Modes.
• CPR - Beam former Board

• CRS - Mid-Processor, System Control and Spectral Doppler Audio Board
• CKV - DMA Controller / Video Management Board
(CKV-Block diagram) see Figure 5-21 on page 5-35
5-2-4-1 B-Mode
1.) CRS
The CRS contains the Clock-Oszillator(60MHz) and PRF-Generator.
It generates(drives) BF(=Beamformer)-ASIC-Clock(60MHz) and Shot-Trigger for the CPR.
Configures CPV (Probe board) and Beamformer (CPD-Subboards on CPR) with TX-Frequ, TX-
Focus, RX-Focus, LineNo (lateral Position), TX- Apodisation, RX-Apodisation, Multibeam, etc.
CRS also contains the TX-Power-Reference-DAC.
Furthermore it contains Multibeam-DeInterleave, Subtraction Filter (for HI-Mode, see: Section 5-2-
4-1-1 "Special B Mode Techniques" on page 5-12, DigitalTGC, DC-Canceler, Mixer (Part of
Demodulator), LowPassFilter, Decimation (Pixelrate Conversion), MagnitudeCalculator (Part of
Demodulator), Logarithmic Amplifier, Re-Sample, Edge Enhance (Contrast Enhancement through
differentiation), LineFilter, Blending (adapting Brightness in order to perfectly combine Nearfield-
Frame with Farfield-Frame in FFC-Mode, see: Section 5-2-4-1-1 "Special B Mode Techniques" on
page 5-12, FrameFilter.
Multibeam-DeInterleave means: Incoming Pixelorder

shot1pix1-shot2pix1-shot3pix1-shot4pix1 -
shot1pix2-shot2pix2-shot3pix2-shot4pix2...
is converted to the new order:
shot1pix1-shot1pix2-shot1pix3..... - shot2pix1-shot2pix2-shot2pix3.....
After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the
LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation, and
Logarithmic Amplifier arrange the conversion from High-Dynamic LinearSignal to the Low-
Dynamik(e.g.8Bit) Log-Signal. Several Postprocessing steps (LineFilter, FrameFilter, ReSample,
Edge Enhance) enable smooth image quality while keeping contrast high.
2.) CPR
Contains 32 CPD (Beamformer-Subboards).
The CPD consists of Beamformer-ASIC, TX-Amplifier, RX-TGC-Amplifier, Signal-ADC.
Each CPD can support 8 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels.
- TX-Channel: ASIC generates TX-Freq through dividing 60MHz by 2,3,4,5,... and TX-Focus.
- RX-Channel: ASIC generates Sample-Clocks for the ADC, manages RX-Focus (Delay and
Chain-Adder) and Apodization.
3.) CKV - Direct Memory Access (DMA) section
B-mode-Data from CRS is written via Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer
memory. DMA Controller 0 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is
performed per software.
Cine Mode: Reserved area in PC main memory is used.
4.) CKV - Video section

Video information is provided by the PC on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) output connector.
The signal is connected to CKV, where the analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video
timing outputs are generated.

5-2-4-1-1 Special B Mode Techniques

a.) HI (Coded Harmonic Imaging)
In one method of HI the RX-Frequency is doubled, so that the radial resolution is increased
due to the higher RX-Frequency.
The second method of HI is pulse-inversion: 2 TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location,
one with positive, one with negative polarity. The subtraction of both shots (Subtraction Filter)
brings to bear the nonlinear-echo-reflection-properties of the tissue (especially in usage of
Contrast-medias), which is very useful with extremely difficult-to-image patients.
b.) FFC (Frequency and Focus Composite)
2 or more TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location. The Beams have different TX-foci.
By means of Blending (adaption of Brightnesses) they are composed to one whole RX-Line.
c.) XBeam-CRI (CrossBeam - Compound Resolution Imaging)*
Does not need any special functions of CRS.
Image is composed of more than one different-direction-steered images. PC-calculated.
5-2-4-2 M-Mode
1.) CRS
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
3.) CKV - DMA section

B-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is performed per
software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines).
CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory.
CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory.
Software has to take care that M-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the
other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

5-2-4-3 D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler)

1.) CRS
- PRF-generator; see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
- After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum,
where the LowPassFilter cuts HF.
Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation.
- D-Mode Data uses the dedicated 16-bit Bus SP0 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
DMA Controller 1 transfers the data into PC main memory where FFT and scan conversion is
performed per software, i.e. the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between
lines).
CineMode: CineMode-Memory is the PC main memory.
CineMode with ECG: CineMode-Memory for the ECG-Curve is inside PC-Memory.
Software has to take care that D-Mode-Image and ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon the
other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-2-4-4 D-Mode Autotrace (draws PC-calculated envelope to D-Spectrum)

(ECG-Curve is similar to Autotrace-Curve)
1.) CRS
- D-Mode Data use the dedicated 16-bit Bus SP0 to the CKV.
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

D-mode-Data from CRS is written via SP0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer memory.
PC calculates Autotrace-Curve from D-Mode data.
Cine Mode with Autotrace/ECG: Cine Mode-Memory for the Autotrace/ECG-Curve is inside PC-
Memory.
Software has to take care that D-Spectrum and Autotrace/ECG-Curve are placed exactly one upon
the other, means: have the same Cine-Shift.

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

5-2-4-5 CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode)

1.) CRS
2.) CPR
see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-2-4-6 3D-Mode (Freezes after 1 volume sweep)

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-2-4-7 Real Time 4D-Mode (nonstop volume rendering)

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-2-4-8 XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging)*

see: 5-2-4-1 B-Mode
5-2-4-9 Extern-Video-Mode (display Video from Video-Recorder)

1.) CRS
Not used for Signal-Processing
2.) CPR


Analog input from an external video source (YC or CVBS) is converted to a digital RGB data stream
by a video decoder. It is mixed with the DVI video output from PC in an overlay unit (Chroma keying
mechanism).
Generation of analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing outputs follows this
block.

5-2-4-10 Sonoview write mode (store Image to Sonoview)

1.) CRS
Not used
2.) CPR
Not used

Not used

Not used
5-2-5 Description of Software Options

NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson® 730Pro V (marked with * in the following sections of the
Service Manual).
To activate the software options:
2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area and then select the OPTION page.
For details see: Basic User Manual Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV, chapter 17.3.4
Table 5-2 Software Options
SW-Options Description
1 Real Time 4D 5-2-5-1 Real Time 4D
2 DICOM 5-2-5-2 DICOM
3 VOCAL II* 5-2-5-3 VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis
4 RT_4D_Biopsy* 5-2-5-4 Real Time 4D Biopsy*
5 SRI* 5-2-5-5 SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging
6 STIC* 5-2-5-6 STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)
7 VCI* 5-2-5-7 VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging
8 TUI* 5-2-5-8 TUI* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging
NOTE: Additional options are not yet implemented in the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
5-2-5-1 Real Time 4D

Real Time 4D mode is obtained through continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D
rendered images. In Real Time 4D mode the volume acquisition box is at the same time the render box.
All information in the volume box is used for the render process. In Real Time 4D mode a “frame rate”
of up 16 volumes/second (at Voluson® 730Pro V up to 10 volumes/second) is possible. By freezing the
acquired volumes, size can be adjusted, manipulated manually as known from the Voluson 3D Mode.

5-2-5-2 DICOM
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV software package providing following DICOM functionality:
• Storage Service Class

• Print Management Service Class
• Modality Worklist Management Service Class
• Structured Reporting Service Class
• Storage Commit Service Class
• Modality Performed Procedure Step Service Class
Sending of reports - Additionally all OB/Gyn measurements can be sent to a PC*. Receiving of these
reports is supported by ViewPoint workstation “PIA” only. All other workstations can be adapted
individually.
* Without using structured reporting.
5-2-5-3 VOCAL II* - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis

Diagnosis and therapy of cancer is one of the most important issues in medical care.
The VOCAL II - Imaging program allows completely new possibilities in cancer diagnosis, therapy
planning and follow-up therapy control.
VOCAL II offers additional functions:
• Manual or Semi automatic Contour detection of structures (such as tumor lesion, cyst, prostate,
etc.) and subsequent volume calculation.
The accuracy of the process can be visually controlled by the examiner in multi-planar display.
• Construction of a virtual shell around the contour of the lesion. The wall thickness of the shell can
be defined. The shell can be imagined as a layer of tissue around the lesion, where the tumor
vascularization takes place.
• Automatic calculation of the vascularization within the shell by 3D color histogram by comparing the
number of color voxels to the number of grayscale voxels.
5-2-5-4 Real Time 4D Biopsy*

For minimal invasive procedures like biopsies, ultrasound is a widely used method to visualize and
guide the needle during puncture. The advantage in comparison with other imaging methods is the real-
time display, quick availability and easy access to any desired region of the patient. The 4D biopsy
allows for real time control of the biopsy needle in 3D multi-planar display during the puncture. The user
is able to see the region of interest in three perpendicular planes (longitudinal, transversal and frontal
section) and can guide the biopsy needle accurately into the centre of the lesion.
5-2-5-5 SRI* - Speckle Reduction Imaging

A type of image noise or interference is generally considered undesirable and can obscure the quality
or interpretation of B-mode images. Although somewhat associated with the underlying echogenicity of
tissue scatters, image speckle characteristics such as brightness, density or size have no apparent
value in determining tissue structure or related properties. The elimination of or significant reduction in
speckle improves the quality or diagnostic potential of the image.
The method applied in the subject modification utilizes a nonlinear diffusion filtering technique that
permits effective speckle reduction in real time. The speckle reduction filter is available to the user in all
B-mode imaging, independent of the transducer used.

5-2-5-6 STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)

With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D.
It is not a Real Time 4D technique, but a post processed 3D acquisition.
In order to archive a good result, try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to be as
small as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial resolution will be.
A good STIC, STIC CFM (2D+CFM), STIC PD (2D+PD) or STIC HD (2D+HD-Flow) data set shows a
regular and synchronous pumping of the fetal heart or of an artery.
The user must be sure that there is minimal movement of the participating persons (e.g., mother and
fetus), and that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period. Movement will cause
a failure of the acquisition. The acquired images are post processed to calculate a 4D Volume Cine
sequence. Please make sure that the borders of the fetal heart or the artery are smooth and there are
no sudden discontinuities. If the user (trained operator) clearly recognizes a disturbance during the
acquisition period, the acquisition has to be cancelled.
• STIC - Fetal Cardio is only available on RAB & RIC probes in the OB/GYN application.
• STIC - Vascular is only available on the RSP probe in the Peripheral Vascular applicat
5-2-5-7 VCI* - Volume Contrast Imaging

Volume Contrast Imaging utilizes 4D transducers to automatically scan multiple adjacent slices and
delivers a real-time display of the ROI.
This image results from special rendering mode consisting of texture ans transparency information.
VCI improves the contrast resolution ans threfore facilitates finding of diffuse lesions in organs.
VCI has more information (from multiple slices) ans is of advantage in gaining contrast due to improved
signal/noise ratio.
Static VCI is a part of the VCI option, which allow to apply the contrast enhancing VCI method to 3D
data sets after the acquisition.
5-2-5-8 TUI* - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging

TUI is a new visualisation mode for 3D and 4D data sets. The data is presented as slices through the
data set which are parallel to each other. An overview image, which is orthogonal to the parallel slices,
shows which parts of the volume are displayed in the parallel planes. This method of visualisation is
consistent with the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI, present the data to the user. The
distance bertween the different planes can be adjusted to the requirements of the given data set. In
addition it is possible to set the number of planes. The planes and the overview image can also be
printed to a DICOM printer, for easier comparison of the ultrasound data with CT and/or MRI data.

5-2-6 Description of Hardware Options

Table 5-3 Hardware Options
HW-Options Description
1 CW-Doppler 5-2-6-1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler
2 ECG Digital Module 5-2-6-2 ECG Preamplifier
3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) 5-2-6-3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)
4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch 5-2-6-4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch
5 Global Modem 5-2-6-5 Global Modem
5-2-6-1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler

CW Doppler mode provides real time spectral analysis of CW Doppler signals. This information
describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the CW Doppler beam.
CW Doppler can be referenced through a small pencil probe or phased array scan head, but it can also
be used in conjunction with a 2D image which has an M-line superimposed on the 2D image indicating
the position of the Doppler sample volume. For through-the-beamformer CW, this beam is steerable by
the operator, and is done by adjusting the location of the M-line. The CW Doppler beam, or M-mode
line, can be steered allowing interrogation along an operator-selected line within the image.
This option can be upgraded by implementing the CW-Dopplerboard (CRW).
5-2-6-2 ECG Preamplifier

MAN6 (internal, digital version)
For details see: Section 5-10-1-1 "ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)" on page 5-52.
5-2-6-3 MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive)

For details see: Section 5-10-1-3 "Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)" on page 5-52.
5-2-6-4 Scan/Freeze Foot switch
Footswitch connected to Power Supply-Box (below Main Electronic-Box)
Figure 5-7 Foot-switch Connector on CPN
5-2-6-5 Global Modem

The Multi-Tech global modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line.
It provides high-speed data transfers and fax capabilities. Features like remote configuration, callback
security, and 2-wire leased line support set it apart from basic desktop modems.
In addition, it is approved for use in many countries around the world.

5-2-6-5-1 Location in the Unit
Figure 5-8 Modem (placed on the GEZ-box)
5-2-6-5-2 LEDs
The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
TD RD CD 56 33 14 OH TR EC FX
Figure 5-9 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel
Table 5-4 LEDs on Modem
LED Color Description Normally State
- Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use.
- Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use.
ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during communication.

- Red CD (Carrier Detect)
OFF indicates no or broken connection.
- Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly Flashing

These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs
- Red 33 (V.34 Mode) are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or
connected the next time.
- Red 14 (V.32bis Mode) At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.
ON when dialing, online, or answering a call

- Red OH (Off hook) Flashes if puls dialing
Off when modem not in use
ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready
for an outgoing or incoming call.
- Red TR (Terminal Ready)
OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken.
The connected (remote) modem will disconnect.
ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON

EC (Error Correction
- Red Blinking: Compression turned ON
(V.42))
OFF: Normal operation.
- Red FX (Fax) Always OFF

5-20
5-2-7
User Interface and Application Software

Application Layer
User Interface Applications

Measure+ 3D/4D HRS

archiving engine DFE Controls
OCP
Server Real-Time(Driver) Layer
Software Architecture
AUX port
DSC Driver VGA Driver
Driver
Win32 Other System

GDI USER
Service Services
I/O Manager
NT Kernel
DRAFT
Operating System : Windows 2000
Section 5-2 - General Information

Figure 5-10 Software Architecture - Overview
COM
USB KeyBoad DSC / VGA CD-ROM MO Modem
Port Ether Net I/F
Port Mouse Port FD HD (DICOM I/F)
Storage Devices Printer
PC Hardware .
Touch
Panel
Other Video
VCR
Ultrasound Hardware with probes Peripheral Printer
KeyBoard
OCB (S)VGA Monitor Peripheral Devices
800/600
5-2-8 Data Location

The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV has a 80 GB Hard disk divided into 5 partitions:
C: System partition:
- Operating System (Windows 2000), including all Windows settings (IP-address, Network
Name, installed Printers, Printer Settings, …)
- US-Application Software (UIS APP)
- Global Service Platform Software
- Software Options
D: User partition:
- User Presets (Backup) database
- Images (Sonoview), Patient-ID´s and Reports database
- Service database
- System settings database
R: Rescue partition:
- Factory Images of C:Partition for System recovery after HDD (Windows) crash
2x LINUX partitions: (not visible in Windows)
- Linux operating system for rescue functionality
System USER Linux Rescue

(~ 7 GB) (~70 GB) (~ 1 GB) (~2 GB)
Figure 5-11 Data Location

Section 5-3
Main board Chassis GEZ Module
The GEZ Module contains the Front End processor and the Back End processor and the Secondary
Power supply for the full GEZ Chassis.
Additionally GEZ Module is the connection point of the internal I/O wiring.
Front View from Right View from Left

with Internal I/O (PC-part)
Rear with Internal I/O Top View

(Audio Video)
Front End
Secondary
Power Board
CPP
Back End
Figure 5-12 Mechanic of GEZ Module
5-22 Section 5-3 - Main board Chassis GEZ Module

Section 5-4
CW-Channels selected by Relais
CPZ Coverboard
FrontEnd Processor
CPV CPR CRW

T/R(192) CWTX(16)
CPV CPR Beamformer-Motherboard CRW CRS CPP

Transmitter-Receiver CW-Dopplerboard MID-Processingboard Powersupply-
Probeboard
(Optional) Secondaryboard
for B,C,D modes: System Control:
1 CW-PrbConnector 32 x CPD -Separate -Multibeam-DeInterleave Clock Oscillator (60 MHz)
3 Prb-Connectors ClkOsc.+Clockgenerator -SubtractionFilter (for THI) - PRF-Generator Powersupply:
260pol PRF,FN -Dig.TGC, DC-Canceling - BeamformerConfiguration 59VDC to:
1 Dummy-PrbConn. -TxDelayMatrix -Mixer with NCO - TX/RX Focus Timing +3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V,
260pol -Transmitter, -FIR-Low Pass - Line number (lateral +FAN(17...24VDC) +-
-RxAmp, Position) TX_POW(+-90V)
-RxDelayMatrix - contains Tx-Power
CPD-Beamformer-Subboard -Analog: Mixer, Amps, B mode: Doppler + CFM: Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp
Filter(WMF,AntiAliasing) -Magnitude Calculator - CFM-Processing:
-Probe Select 1x : Beamformer-ASIC
Relais generates TX-Pulses+TxFocus+TxApodisation, -PRF-SampADC16Bit, -Logarithmic Amplifier - Color Doppler shot lines
-Probe Recognition RxFocusDelay+Summation. -Resample transfer to CKV
(Signals to CPC) 16x : TX-PowerAmplifier -Edge Enhance -Doppler Processing:
8x : TGC+AntiAliasingFilter+ADC -LineFilter - DSP, Audio DAC
DRAFT
-Blending Motor Control:

Each CPD capable of -Frame Filter - Master of Control of 3D
16 TX-Channels, Sweep
4 RX-Channels - Sin Cos Motor Drive
- Frame Start-On Trigger
- Write Logic Trigger CKV
(DMA Controller)
CPU-Control Beamformer-
"EBF_D"(18)
"MCPU_A"(12) Configuration-Data: CW-Data serial, SIN-COS

Mot-Strobes
"MCPU_D"(8) "EH_DATA"(16) D,Q,16Bit each
Figure 5-13 FrontEnd Processor - Block diagram

SIN-COS "EH_ADR"(8)
US-Data
Powered
CPK Motherboard of GEZ-Module:

CPV CPR PCW CRS CPP
5-23
5-4-1 FrontEnd - Board Descriptions
5-4-1-1 CPV - Probe Connector Board

• 1 CW-Probe Connector
• 3 Probe-Connectors 260pin
• 1 Dummy-Probe Connector 260pin
• Probe Select Relays
• Probe Recognition
32 * Tx/Rx Channels
to CRW
CPV Probe Board CPZ CPR Beamformer Motherboard

CW Probe
Cover Board Transmitter/Receiver

TX / RX
Power
Probe 1
192 TX / RX 32 * CPD Beamformer Subboard

MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
Power
192 * Tx/Rx Channels
Probe 2
192 TX / RX
MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
Power
Probe 3
192 TX / RX
MOT_signals
CTRL-signals
MCPU_A [0..12]
SIN-COS, Mot-Strobes
CTRL-signals EBF_D(18) to CRS
PowerSupply
MCPU_D [0..7]
CPK Motherboard
Figure 5-14 CPV + Beamformer (CPR)
5-4-1-2 CPR - Beamformer-Motherboard

Transmitter-Receiver (192 transmitter channel used, 128 Receiver channels)
CPR contains 32 pieces of CPD (see: Section 5-4-1-3 "CPD-Beamformer-Sub-board" on page 5-25)
5-24 Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor

5-4-1-3 CPD-Beamformer-Sub-board
1x : Beamformer-ASIC
generates TX-Pulses + TX-Focus +TX-Apodization, Rx Focus Delay and Summation
16x : TX-Power Amplifier
4x : TGC + Anti Aliasing Filter + Analogue Digital Conversion (ADC)
Each CPD is capable of 16 TX-Channels and 4 RX-Channels
From ASIC(n-1)
+TX_POW1/ +TX_POW2/
-TX POW1 -TX POW2
El_0 Driver EN_A Tx_0p

Tx_0
Sep. Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_0n
Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_1p
El_128
Tx_1 Driver
EN_B
Sep. Driver EN_A Tx_1n
Driver
EN_B
8*2*
8* Pushpull 8*
Output stage
Driver EN_A Tx_6p
El_3 Driver
Tx_6 EN_B
Sep. Driver EN_A Tx_6n
Driver
EN_B
Driver EN_A Tx_7p
Driver
El_131 EN_B
Tx_7 ASIC
Driver Tx_7n
Sep. EN_A
Driver BFIC
EN_B
2:1 Antialiasing- ADC Rx_0

Mux
TGC Filter 10 Bit
El_1
Antialiasing- Rx_1
2:1 TGC ADC
El_129 Mux Filter 10 Bit
El_2
Antialiasing- ADC Rx_2
2:1 TGC
El_130 Mux Filter 10 Bit
2:1 Antialiasing- ADC Rx_3

TGC Filter
Mux 10 Bit
to ASIC(n+1)
Figure 5-15 Block diagram CPD

5-4-1-4 CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional)

• Separate Clock Oscillator + Clock generator PRF, FN
• TxDelayMatrix
• Transmitter,
• Receiver Amplifiers (RxAmp),
• Receiver Delay matrix (RxDelayMatrix)
• Analogue: Mixer, Amplifier, Filter (WMF, Anti Aliasing)
• PRF-SampADC16Bit
5-4-1-5 CPZ - Cover Board

Transfers the analogue transmitting / receiving signals between the following boards:
• CPV
• CPR
• CRW
192 Transmitter-, 128 Receiver channels, 16 CW-Doppler channels - switched by relays at CPZ
5-4-1-6 CPK - Motherboard of GEZ-Module

Following boards are direct connected to the CPK:
• CPV - Probe connector Board

• CPR - Beam former Board
• CRW - CW-Doppler Board
• CRS - Signal Processing Board
• CPP - Power Supply Board

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board

A.) MID-Processor:
1.) For B, C, D modes:
- Multi Beam-DeInterleave
- Subtraction Filter (for HI)
- Digital TGC, DC-Cancelling
- Mixer with NCO
- FIR-Low Pass
2.) For B mode only:
- Magnitude Calculator
- Logarithmic Amplifier
- Resample
- Edge Enhance
- Line Filter
- Blending
- Frame Filter
B.) System Control:
- Clock Oscillator (60MHz)
- PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) Generator
- Beamformer Configuration:
- Tx (transmitting Frequency, TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Focus timing
- TxRx (transmitting/receiving) Apodization
- Line number (lateral Position)
- contains TX-Power-DAC
C.) Doppler + CFM:
1.) CFM-processing:
- Color-Doppler shot lines transfer to CKV
2.) Doppler-Processing:
- DSP, Audio DAC
3.) Beamformer- Configuration-Data:
- "EH_DATA"(16)
- "EH_ADR"(8)
- B-Mode-Data
D.) Motor Control:
- Master of Control of 3D-Sweep
- Drives Motor via SIN-COS
- Triggers Frame-start on CPR (Beamformer)
- Triggers Write-Logic on CKV (DMA-Controller)

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)
Beam-
Golay Multi Beam Digital TGC Limiter DC-Canceller
former
Filter DeInterleave a
Board
CPR Synt Aperture
FIR Shift Decim. I Data

+ C or MC
a Lim
Mixer
d
Q Data
FIR Shift Decim.
C or MC
+
Lim
NCO Mag. Log

Calculator b
Re-Sample Edge En- Line Filter Blending Persistence

b B
hance (obsolete) (obsolete)
M-Mode
M
To Doppler Audio
Pre-WMF NF-Gain INT&SH WMF
c
FFT PW
CW
Pre-WMF NF-Gain INT&SH WMF
d
To Doppler Audio
ECG
DMA Controller
B Signal Proc. Host EAD
Board CKV
Output I/F
I Channel 0
Q (B,M, IQ)
PCI Bus
SP0 DMA0 B, C-IQ
Demand (and not
M
Mux used Block) Mode
PW Output DMA1
Channel 1 SP1 PW/CW,M,MC-IQ
CW (PW,CW) Block Mode only
Figure 5-16 Block diagram - Data Flow of RFI board CRS

5-4-1-7 CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)

Color Doppler processor
CDP input data IQ is transferred to PC for processing of Power, Velocity and Variance data.
MC for display of Color M-Mode takes the same way.
Line filter / Persistence filter

These functions are done in software. Design ensures, that omitting these blocks in hardware produces
no delay problems etc.
PW/CW Doppler
Processing of FFT data is done in hardware as in BT02 (incl. Audio output). FFT output is asynchronous
to PRF generator operation. Due to this, FFT data is transferred via a separate channel from Signal
Processor board to DMA controller on CKV. For display purposes, FFT output data is transferred to PC
via DMA channel 1.
ECG
Is read by PC via host bus I/F (like BT02). An index (timestamp) is added by signal processor hardware.
ECG index and Spectral Doppler index start are synchronized in hardware to improve current software
solution.
Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0

Width: 16 Bit
Clock rate: 30 MHz
Synchronization signal: Frame, Line, Data Enable
Line length is a multiple of 4 bytes
Used for transfer of PRF generator synchronous

B
C-IQ (Color B-Image IQ data, also referred as C data)
M
MC-IQ (Color M – Mode IQ data, also referred as MC data)
i.e. all but FFT data and ECG at the moment from Signal Processor to CKV.
Signal Processor Channel 1

Width: 8 Bit
Clock rate: 30 MHz (Same Clk as Channel 0)
Synchronization signal: Line
Line length is a multiple of 4 bytes
Used for transfer of FFT (PW,CW) data from Signal Processor to CKV.
DMA0
Transfers B and C-IQ data from DMA Controller board CKV to PC memory via PCI bus.
The two data types are buffered in a single FIFO and transferred on a line-by-line basis (B or C), i.e. a
line is not fragmented in PC memory.
The data is transferred in the same temporal sequence as the PRF generator triggers them, i.e. if the
B frame preceding the C frame is transferred first into PC memory.
DMA1
Depending on the current mode, one or more of the following motion data types has to be transferred
from DMA Controller board CKV to PC memory via PCI bus:
FFT (PW,CW)
M
MC

5-30
5-4-1-7
P LL C lock D river SR A M SR AM C KV (via C PM M otherbd.)
á 133M H z 64Kx16 256Kx36
s0 _data
&
s0-ctrl-
signals
hdctrl header_en
C R S /R FI- header control tstm p_cnt
SRAM
SRAM
comm.
comm.
signals
signals
hd gen
oe_mclk
FPG A
hdctrl_strb
s1_dat
d_d_in_d CP G 2 d_out_bm _d CP G 3
d_in
s1_ctrl
CP G 1 d_q_in_q
(D anube) d_out_bm _q (Y angste)

(Am azon) C PM com m . FIF O
bm -data & linetype_ sign als
bf_prf bm ctrl- (fifo ctlr
M ultibeam DeInterleaving; Log-function & s0_ data &s0 -ctrl-
signals generator sign als _ic_ v2)
Digital TG C auxiliary auxiliary Decim ation
m cw _ser_clk_in control FIR-Filtering & Decim ation control

(Tim e G ain C ontrol); signals signals
Quadrature Dem odulation
s1_dat CP E
cfm -data & dop_dat_ hd gen
cfm ctrl-signals
handler
s1_ctrl
line_valid
D opp ler sp ectral lin e A udio
D S P2
control
signals
auxiliary
D oppler
d_out_cfm_q
d_out_cfm_d
P rocess (H P-
cw _data, FIR ) FFT
CPR (Beam-former)
cw _q_id
CRS - Signal Processor Board (cont’d)
cw _rfs trigger (fft_trans)

CRW CP F D S P1
(CW - cw _dop_latch Spectral D oppler Processing M issing
CPM
D opp ler) Signal
sy_ctr and sy_strobes

Estim ator
R FI-P C-In terfa ce a d_b us an d co ntro l sign als be lon ging to it
SBC (PC board) via

adbus_dir
D SP
com m . M otCtrl
CP R com m . signals signals
DRAFT
C PC DS P
auxiliary
CC M
control D SP_eclk0
AD C com m . signals
ADC signals
dspa and dspd
C PE com m .
Section 5-4 - FrontEnd Processor

signals P RF -G enerator;
ceiver
Trans-
System Control M otor Control 2x S R AM
S R AM com m . 256K x18
C P E com m . signals
signal
CPE
audio_ctr_pw 2x Transceiver
pli-
fier
Am-
sct_tx
sct_rx AD C com m .
signals AD C
pow er
cpp_sync
fan
not connected
D AC
SIN /
signals
signals
signals
signals
Trigger
signals
6x
mots
COS
BYM comm.
A m pli-
tgc_clk
FF-comm.
PCW comm.
D AC com m .
Transceiver
SRAM comm.
SRAM comm.
Transceiver &
comm. signals
Signal
id_scl2
D AC
comm. signals
id_scd2
board
fier signals
mcpu_a and mcpu_d

CPP
d_da
2x D /A-
CPP Mot. Power
S R AM E² P LL 6x Transceiver & 3x D - 2x
C PU CRW SR A M C onver Transceiver
32Kx8 PR O M D evice Schm itt Trigger FF Transceiver
64Kx16 ter
SRAM & D/A-Conv. comm. signals

B YM -CC M -co m m . signa ls
5-4-1-8 CPP- Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage

used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd DC-DC-Converter:
59VDC to following output voltages:
+ 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V,
+ FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software)
• +TX_POW (+/-90V)
• -TX_POW (+/-90V)
• +TX_POW2
• -TX_POW2
BLOCKDIAGRAMM
POWERSUPPLY CPP90
POWER-BOX
INRUSH-
AC -INPUT SWITCH CURRENT FAN
LIMITER
EXTERNAL
TRAFO
AC DEVICES
920VA
max. 350VA
STANDBY
-CTRL
PFC
59V8A
FAN 10-24V 10-24V FAN
5V/12,5A
5V 150 W
5V/12,5A FAN
3V3/18A
3,3 V 150W
3V3/24A
FAN
15V 30W 15V/2A
15V 50W -15V/3A
12V 150W 12V/13A
+/- 5V_RX -5V/1.5A
TX_POW1
+/-10 - 90V
+/- 0-80V / 40W
TX_POW2
+/-10 - 90V
+/- 0-80V / 40W
TX_MUX
+/- 100V
+/- 100V / 2W
MOT_Voltage
+/- 10-32V/50W
MOTORDRIVER
CONVERTER-BOARD
Figure 5-17 Block diagram CPP

5-4-1-8-1 Motor Power stage (Motor driver)

Safety control against temperature rise, short-circuit, output current and faulty operation.
DC-DC Converter for internal power supply of the power stage amplifiers:
• Motor Sinus2 Powerstage Amplifier

• Motor Cosinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
Appropriated Motors:
• 2-phase stepper motors
• electronically commuted DC-motors (3-phases)
In each case only one motor can be operated. Depending on the motor type the power stages amplifiers
are used as power sources or voltage supplies. The change-over is accomplished by an external signal.
Figure 5-18 Block diagram - Motor driver on CPP

5V,12V
Harddisk
Data
Section 5-5
LineOut
PC-Motherboard eg. for Sonoview-
Sound Records
Components: Network, USB, Sound LINE OUT
MajorTasks: SystemControl, 3D-Rendering,
ImageProcessing (ScanConversion, CFM,CRI, etc) PS2-Adaptercable
PS/2
Monitor
Power Connector RS232 OUT
6x USB2.0
BackEnd Processor
UI-Disp.
Aux-Power
Connector ADD2 DVI Graphic Adatper
CPP
Powersupply- DVI-Out
Secondaryboard
Powersupply:
59VDC to: CKV-Video-Card
+3.3V,+-5V,+12V,+-15V, Overlay-Logic, VGA-Adapter,Video-Converter RGB-VHS,
DVI-In
+FAN(17...24VDC) +- etc
TX_POW(+-90V) DMA-Controller
US-LineMemory, FrameMemory
Motor-SIN-COS-PowAmp DSC(Dig.ScanConverter) f. 2D S-VHS IN
DMA-Controller f. HighSpeed DataTransfer
Motherboard CPU-Memory VHS IN
VGA1 VGA2 RGB S-VHS1 S-VHS2 VHS1 O VHS2
O
CPE-Backplane-Card RS232 In
Multiplexer+Amp for PC-Sound<>DopplerAudio
Feedthrough f. Power, Stdby, etc.
DRAFT
Aux_Supply CPN Console Sound IN
Additional CPE-Connectors:
- Lamp, - ECG, - RS232-3
- Remote B/W Printer
US-Data
- Audio VTR OUT, ...VTR IN
CPP

Figure 5-19 BackEnd Processor - Block diagram
VGA-Signal to V730EXPERT-
Touchscreen. (Signal is in fact
analog, but is re-sampled and
GEM- digitalized in Touchscreen.) Cable
KVN does not exist at V730PRO
ECG+Diskdrive- CPN-MainPowerSupply-Module (59VDC, GEU-User-Interface-
USB Cable Power-OFF-Signals)
Module: Module PC-Keyboard,
External Diskdrives Trackball
ECG-Module CPH
PowerSupply-Cable 5V,12V
Trafo StdbySwitch
(User Power ON/
OFF)
CPY
CCF Powerswitch-
Powersupply- Plugboard
FootSwitch
Primaryboard
5-33
5-5-1 BackEnd - Data Flow
On Board Video
Controller Out
PC Main Memory
Pentium 4 PC
1 GB
CPU Controller
(also used for Cine)
PCI Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz
PLX
DMA 0 DMA 1
PCI 9054
Local Bus
32 Bit / 33MHz
DMA 0 I/F DMA 1 I/F

(2D/3D/4D) (Motion Data)
SP0 Data
(from CRS)
16 Bit / 30 MHz 1 us SP0
2 us
SP0 Write slot
Read slot
I/F FIFO
Counters
Doppler Data 64 Meg deep
(from CRS) 1 us SP1
8 Bit / 30 MHz SP0 Read/Write
SP1 Write slot
Address generator
I/F
SP1 Read/Write
Address generator
Data 32 Bit
FIFO Buffer Memory

128 MB / 66 MHz
Figure 5-20 BT03 Ultrasound - BackEnd Data Flow
5-34 Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

5-5-2 Block diagram CKV
DMA Controller
PCI Bus 32 Bit / 33MHz

PLX PCI 9054
DMA 0 DMA 1 Host PC

(Demand (Block Access
Signal Proc. No. 0 Mode) Mode)
data
16 Bit / 30 MHz 1 us
(B/MB/C/MC) SP0 Write slot 0 Local Bus
I/F 32 Bit /
33MHz
Signal Proc.
Channel No.1
data
1 us DMA 0 DMA 1 Ext. UART
8 Bit / 30 MHz SP1 Write slot 1 I/F I/F Bus 16C550
(PW/CW) I/F B/C MB/MC/ I/F
PW/CW
2 us
B / MB / C-IQ / MC -IQ / Read slot VCR
PW / CW VGA Remote
Read/Write Retrace
Address generator Interrupt
To/From
Fifo Buffer Memory
U/S Front-
SDRAM 32 Bit / 66 MHz
end H/W
32 Bit /
16.7 MHz
Video I/O
Local Bus
32 Bit / Boot
33MHz FLASH
FPGA
DVI TMDS I/F Overlay VGA

DAC
(ext. Video)
VGA
Scaler + RGB
YC Video
Decoder Scaler Deflicker CVBS
CVBS Video
Encoder (C)VBS
YC
YC
RAM RAM
Figure 5-21 Block diagram CKV

5-5-3 BackEnd - Board Descriptions
5-5-3-1 SBC - Single Board Computer

Built in or external Components:
- On Board VGA
- 1 Gbit LAN
- USB 2.0
- Sound
Major Tasks:
- System Control
- 2D / 3D-Image processing and Rendering
- RS232 (User Interface)
- PS2 (User Interface PC-Keyboard, Mouse as Trackball)
- Control GEM drives (USB)
5-5-3-2 ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Graphic Adapter Card
5-5-3-3 CKV - DMA-Controller / Video-Card

• DMA-Controller f. High Speed Data Transfer into Slot-CPU-Memory
• VGA- Output (2 Channels) for the System Main Monitor and external device
• Video-Converter VGA RGB to: VHS, S-VHS, RGB.
• Display External Playback Video and adding Overlay graphics to it.
see also: Figure 5-21: Block diagram CKV on page 5-35
5-5-3-4 Hard Disk Drive

Minimum 80GB; IDE
Stores the system programs and Image filing (patient data, Report files)
5-5-3-5 CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card

Multiplexer +Amplifier for PC-Sound<>Doppler Audio
Feed through for DC- Power and signals and for built in Peripherals (User Interface, Disk drive module,
ECG, etc.)
5-36 Section 5-5 - BackEnd Processor

5-5-3-6 CPP- Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage

used for Supply of both FrontEnd and BackEnd
DC-DC-Converter:
59VDC to following output voltages:
+ 3.3V, +/-5V, +12V, +/-15V,
+ FAN (10 -24V / 15 Watt; adjustable by software)
• +TX_POW (+/-90V)
• -TX_POW (+/-90V)
• Motor Sinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
• Motor Cosinus2 Powerstage Amplifier
• +TX_POW2
• -TX_POW2
see also: Section 5-4-1-8 on page 5-31 and Section 5-4-1-8-1 on page 5-32

Section 5-6
Internal I/O
Internal I/O depends on the SBC-board installed.
- If “Kontron” SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-1 on page 5-39.

- If “Tyan” SBC-board is installed, see: Section 5-6-2 on page 5-41.
However, connectors on the Main Module of the GEZ-box are the same (independent of installed SBC).
Figure 5-22 Connectors on the Main Module of the GEZ
Item Connector Name Description

1 VGA1 Connector for the internal color video monitor
2 VGA2 Connector for an external color monitor
3 RGB Output for color video printer
4 S-VHS 1 S-VHS 1 OUT
6 VHS 1 Video 1 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC
7 VHS 2 Video 2 OUT: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, FCC
8 VHS Video IN: 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, PAL / CCIR ; 1Vss @ 75 Ohm, NTSC / FCC
9 S-VHS S-VHS IN
10 Audio IN Sound Audio IN R/L Sound
11 Remote BW Printer Remote control for BW Printer
12 AUX Supply Power Supply for Module GEM
13 Console Connector for Console
14 CPN Connector for Power Supply (CPN) input
15 Lamp Connector for external lamp
16 RS232-3 Remote control for Video Recorder
17 ECG Connector for MAN (ECG-preamplifier)
Diagnostic LED´s (for voltage check; see: Section 7-3-1 on page 7-4)
18 ---------------
1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V
19 Audio OUT / VTR Audio OUT / R/L Video Recorder
20 Audio IN / VTR Audio IN / R/L Video Recorder
5-38 Section 5-6 - Internal I/O

5-6-1 Internal I/O - if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed
StandbySwitch
(User PowerON/OFF)
GES External-IO-Board
GEM Disk-Drive-Module
COMP VIDEO
OUT SUPPLY USB
VGA MODEM NET USB
IN OUT OUT
ECG
DVD
+(R)W
MOD
PC
Keyboard Mouse
PS2-
Adapter
Cable USB USB
USB 2
GEM GEM
RS-232
Out
Monitor UI Disp.
LAN1
USB3
USB4
CKV LAN
S-VHS1 VHS1
Audio
CPE AUX SUPPLY R

DVI Out
L
SOUND BW PRINTER OUT IN USB 5 USB 6
DVI In
RS-232 In
CPN
Primary-Power- GEU User-Interface-
Supply Modul
FootSwitch
* Cable is only used in combination with “Kontron” SBC-board version.

Other versions have internal connector cable, directly connected from CPE flat cable connector (S5) to SBC COM1 (J22) connector
Figure 5-23 Internal I/O (“Kontron” SBC-board installed)

5-6-1 Internal I/O - if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed (cont’d)
1 2
3 4
5
7
8 9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 5-24 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (“Kontron” SBC-board installed)

1 PS2 Kbd. Connector for Keyboard
2 PS2 Mouse Connector for Mouse
3 USB GEM Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM

4 USB 2 USB port connector
5 RS-232 Out Electrical-Signal-Connection between CPS and PIC_MG_Slot-CPU
Connector for User Interface Display

6 UI Disp.
NOT used at Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
7 Parallel Port Parallel Port for PC-Line Printer
8 USB 3 and USB 4 USB port connectors

9 LAN Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabits/s
MIC = Connector for Microphone
10 Audio
Line-Out = Connector for Sound card (green connector)
11 DVI Out Digital Video Interface (TMDS cable) / Out
13 DVI In Digital Video Interface (TMDS cable) / In

14 RS-232 In Electrical-Signal-Connection between CKV and PC-Board (SBC)

5-6-2 Internal I/O - if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed
StandbySwitch
(User PowerON/OFF)
GES External-IO-Board
GEM Disk-Drive-Module
COMP VIDEO
OUT SUPPLY USB
VGA MODEM NET USB
IN OUT OUT
ECG
DVD
+(R)W
MOD
PC
Keyboard Mouse
PS2-
Adapter
Cable
USB
USB 2
GEM
UI Disp.
Monitor
Audio
LAN1
USB
GEM LAN
USB2
CKV
S-VHS1 VHS1
USB3
USB4
CPE AUX SUPPLY R
DVI Out
L
SOUND BW PRINTER OUT IN USB 5 USB 6
DVI In
CPN
Primary-Power- GEU User-Interface-
Supply Modul
FootSwitch
Figure 5-25 Internal I/O (“Tyan” SBC-board installed)

5-6-2 Internal I/O - if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed (cont’d)
1 2
3
5
6
7 8
9 10
11
12
13
Figure 5-26 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (“Tyan” SBC-board installed)

3 ******* *********** not used

4 UI Disp.

6 Audio



Section 5-7
Top Console
The Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Operator Control Panel (OCP) consists of the following electronic
subassemblies and/or functional components:
• Console module:
- C515 micro controller
- Atmel micro controller
- Slide pots TGC with zero raster position)
- Rotary Encoders with integrated push buttons
- PS/2 compatible Trackball (2”) with standard PC interface
- PS/2 compatible Qwerty Keyboard with standard PC interface
- LED indicators with 3 intensity levels (off, 50%,100%)
- 2 Speaker, used for Doppler and voice replay
• DC/DC Converter:
- Converts 12V DC input voltage to 5V DC output voltage for supplying UI components
25 pol. Connector
12V
DC/DC
Converter 5V
RS232
C515 Beeper
PS2
LED's and Hardkeys
TGC- Slider
Speaker
Atmel
Trackball
Keyboard
Figure 5-27 Top Console

Section 5-7 Top Console (cont’d)
Host IO - DB25 Male (pins)

Host Pin Console Notes
Chassis 1 Chassis Gnd Tied to mounting holes & DB25
Headshell
TXD ---> 2 Rx ---> From host to console
RXD <--- 3 Tx <--- From console to host
RTS ---> 4 RS ---> From host to console
CTS <--- 5 CS <--- From console to host
GND 6 GND Common Ground (DTR signal – if
needed)
GND 7 GND Common Ground
Speaker Left 10 Speaker Left
+ +
- -
Speaker 12 Speaker
Right + Right +
Speaker 13 Speaker
Right - Right -
+12VDC 14 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 15 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 16 +12VDC +12V
+12VDC 17 +12VDC +12V
+5VDC 18 This Pins a reserved
+ +
- -
Speaker 24 Speaker
Right + Right +
Speaker 25 Speaker
Right - Right -
Figure 5-28 Host IO - DB25 Male (pins)
5-44 Section 5-7 - Top Console

Section 5-7
156 138
107 106 157 148

Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Delete Delete Delete Delete PrtSc Pause
Line Abc Arrow Meas.
<---
162 153
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
Back-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =
space
|<--
{ } |
-->| Q W E R T Y U I O P 151 140
[ ] \
Tab
Mic
Caps : " ECG
A S D F G H J K L Enter
Lock ; ´
110 111
< > ?
Shift Z X C V B N M Shift
, . /
Top Console (cont’d)
Ctrl Fn Alt
~
Ins
Del
109 144
`
122 155 121 145
123
164 191 165 166 167 168 169 170 120
128 174
1
2 A B PW C
3
101 Util. Menu Inv Init Steer 124
BF TD
M 2D 175
DRAFT
CW PD
173 159 158
104 Abc
102 103 192 4D 3D HI 132 136
auto
Calc
190 172 146
Exit Abc 131
126 127

3D/4D B A
2D 141
163 178 179 180 181
Figure 5-29 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV - Control Console

Freeze
184 186 188 152 160 105
182
183 185 187 189 133
134 177
142
135
5-45
Table 5-5 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV - key codes
key code Description Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV - Functionality X X X
101 PID (patient identification) call-up of the patient data entry menu
102 Probe call-up of the probe program menu
103 Indicator displays a pointer arrow or hand
104 End Exam Patient and measurement data are stored in the “Data manager”
105 Print_b Remote printer trigger key B
106 Sonoview to shift from scan mode to Sonoview
107 Report call-up of the Patient report page
109 Quad Format Quad-Screen format
110 Dual Format (V) Dual-Screen format (vertical distribution)
111 Dual Format (H) Dual-Screen format (horizontal distribution) - not yet implemented
120 Mode_Switch1 M-Mode (Motion mode)
121 Mode_Switch2 PD-Mode (Power Doppler)
122 Mode_Switch3 PW-Mode (Pulsed Wave Doppler)
123 CW Continuous Wave Doppler
124 HI Harmonic Imaging
126 Text Image documentation - to write onto the screen
127 Bodymark Bodymark display - to enter Bodymark symbols
128 ClrScreen to clear graphics, measurements and annotations on the screen
131 MeasCalcs Calculation tables
132 HR_Zoom High Resolution Zoom
133 Trball_b left trackball key
134 Trball_a upper trackball key
135 Trball_c right trackball key
136 B_Depth UP - penetration depth of the B-image
138 AcousticPWr UP - acoustic output (Power)
140 VtrRec call-up of the VCR Remote control menu
141 Print_a Remote printer trigger key A
142 Freeze Read/Write (Freeze/Run)
144 Mode_Switch4 C-Mode (Color Flow mode)
145 Mode_Switch5 2D-Mode (B mode)

146 B_Depth DOWN - penetration depth of the B-image
148 AcousticPWr DOWN - acoustic output (Power)
151 ECG ECG line ON/OFF
152 Trackball Navigation Trackball Menu Navigation
153 MIC Microphone
155 Single Format Single-Screen format
156 Speaker Volume UP - speaker volume
157 Speaker Volume DOWN - speaker volume
158 SieScape SieScape (at the time being this feature is not yet implemented)
159 BiFlow BiFlow (at the time being this feature is not yet implemented)
160 Save 2D to save/send 2D images and sequences
162 NOT USED
163 Exit Exit
164 Utilities Utilities Menu
165 Invert Invert
166 Left/Right image orientation of 3D-image
167 UP/Down up/down image orientation
168 Mirror left/right image orientation
169 Init reset to initial position in volume mode
170 Steering Beam steering
172 NOT USED
173 OTO Automatic Optimization
174 4D-Mode 4D-Mode ON/OFF
175 3D-Mode 3D-Mode ON/OFF
177 Save 3D/4D to save/send 3D and 4D images and sequences
178 Soft 1 Soft_Switch 1
182 Soft_Flip 1 UP - Soft Flip 1 (Toggle switch function)
183 Soft_Flip 1 DOWN - Soft Flip 1 (Toggle switch function)

190 Menu Selector (Wheel Switch) Menu Navigation wheel
191 Change Menu Change Menu
192 Measure_User Basic Measurements
NOTICE Key codes which are not listed in the table are not available at Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.

Section 5-8
Monitor
GG
LEFTG G RIGHTG G
KEY FUNCTION
a. MENU KEY
This button will enable the On Screen Display.
This button is also used to select the function in the Main Menu or to save the setting in the Sub
Menu. (Push for 3sec)
b. DECREASE ᇪ [LEFT]
Use this button to move down the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while
in OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of
contrast of the display screen.
c. INCREASE ᇬ [RIGHT]
Use this button to move up the OSD selection menu and adjust the attribute of the monitor while in
OSD mode. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast of
the display screen.
d. LAMP ON/OFF
Lamp ON/OFF S/W
e. MICROPHONE
Allows to record voice
G NOTE: There is no function of microphone.
Figure 5-30 Monitor Adjustment buttons
For further details refer to: Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.

Section 5-9
External I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 5-31 External I/O Panel Connectors
Table 5-6 External I/O Connector Description

1 VGA OUT print out VGA signal with monitor/printer
2 MODEM RJ-11 with global adapter kit for modem connection
DICOM input/output
3 NETWORK
twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
4 USB-1 USB port
5 USB-2 USB port

6 COMP VIDEO OUT BNC Connector, Color Video Output
5-50 Section 5-9 - External I/O

Section 5-10
Peripherals
5-10-1 General Information
The GEM Module contains the DVD/CD+(R)W Drive.
Additionally the Magneto Optical Drive and the ECG-preamplifier (MAN6) can be installed as an Option.
Function of the GEM Module:
• USB2.0 Interface, Box is connected to PC(SBC board) via USB cable
• USB-IDE converter (CRB board; see: Figure 5-34):
- USB hub to split USB-IN into 4x USB, 2 are used internal for the Drives, 2 are free and
connected to the rear side of the GEM box.
- The two internal USB inputs are converted to IDE and are connected to the MOD and DVD.
• MOD 1.3 GB IDE (not installed at GEM 20)
• DVD+R+RW/CD-R drive (IDE)
• ECG Pre-Amplifier (MAN 6 - optional)
CRB-Board
(USB to IDE
Converter board)
Figure 5-32 GEM-Module (open)
optional ECG (MAN6)
DVD+(R)W Drive
optional
Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD)
Figure 5-33 GEM incl. optional MOD and ECG

5-10-1 General Information (cont’d)
Power-IN 3,3V
LM-317
+ 5V
EE-
Prom
US
B to IDE
IDE
(U1)
DD1
USB2.0 DD2
USB-IN DD3 EE-
HUB DD4 Prom
US
B to
IDE IDE
(U4)
USB-OUT
(P6)
USB-OUT
(P5)
Figure 5-34 Block diagram - CRB (USB to IDE Converter Board)
5-10-1-1 ECG-preamplifier (MAN6 - optional)

The ECG-preamplifier is used for acquiring an ECG-signal to be displayed with the ultrasound image.
This optional peripheral serves for gaining an ECG-signal to mark the systolic and end diastolic
moments in M-Mode and Doppler evaluations.
The ECG-preamplifier must not be used for ECG-diagnostics. It is not intended for use as a cardiac
monitor and must not be used for an intraoperative application on the heart.
5-10-1-2 DVD/CD+(R)W Drive
Read Speed: max. 16x DVD ROM (max. 22000 kByte/s); max. 48x CD ROM (max.7200 kByte/s)
Write Speed: DVD+R: 16x CLV (22000 kByte/s), DVD+RW: 8x CLV (11000 kByte/s),
CD-R: 48x CLV (7200 kByte/s), CD-RW: 24x CLV (3600 kByte/s)
Access Time: DVD: 140ms; CD: 120ms

Recordable and Re-writable DVD´s and CD´s are ideal for any storage purpose and offer complete
security and reliability for important data.
5-10-1-3 Magneto-Optical Drive (optional)

Storage capacity by disk: 1.3GB, 640MB, 540MB, 230MB, 128MB
The MO-Drive allows to read and write any GIGAMO standard 1.3GB disk at twice the liner bit density.
Additionally it retains full read/write compatibility with ISO/IEC 3.5 - inch disks ranging from original
128MB to current 640MB.
MO disks are nearly indestructible and immune from the problems that plague magnetic media.
MO disks can be rewritten an unlimited number of times.
5-52 Section 5-10 - Peripherals

Section 5-11
Power Distribution
5-11-1 CPN - Primary Power Module
Figure 5-35 Primary Power Module - CPN
5-11-1-1 Mechanical Concept and Overview

The AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to
galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an
inrush current limiter is implemented.
Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC.
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
mains outlet on site.
From the Mains Power Input module, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter to a internal
outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
5-11-1-2 Major Functions of CPN

• Inrush Current limiter
• Power factor correction transformer for Sinus load for the mains voltage
• Power down Circuitry + Standby-Switch
• The CPN module generates 57VDC (+/-2V) as an input voltage for the Secondary Power supply of
the GEZ module.
• The CPN module contains also the isolation transformer for the peripherals.
(Maximum load: 350VA) see: Basic User Manual Chapter 23 Technical Data/Information
NOTE: All DC-supply voltages for built in peripherals are generated in GEZ-module not inside CPN.
NOTE: The system mains supply input voltage can be set to: 100V, 115V, 130V, 230V, 240V.
The output voltages may be set to 115V or 230VAC (independent from the input voltages).

5-54
5-11-1-3
Mains CPY Powerswitch-Plug Board
CPN Prim.Power Module 3 4 voltage
GEF Main Electronic Module
Selector
5 Ext. Devices Aux. Fuse F3
9
2 Voltage 7 FANs 2x
6 X20, Mounted on
X7 240V 115V Selector Card section
X18 Rear Panel CPP Power
F1 X22 X25 X24
X1 SEL Secondary Board
X6 230V 0V 5 x Ext.
L for 115V Aux. 230V 1,6A
X3 for 230V 115V 3,2A
Power out
16A X2 115V Fan Regulation
X5 130V Aux. X23
PE X21 8
Mains Power 0V
+5V
X4 FAN
F2 Switch 110V
+3,3V PC section
N Inrush current K1
1 Limiter +15V
16A
CPH -15V
Transformer +12V
CCF Primary X13 (Part 1) DC voltages to all
Power Board -5V boards
Power Distribution Diagram
Tx_POW_1 +80V +SBC (Backend PC)

CPE
10 Power Factor Correction Part (TX_POW_2 +80V)
L1
VOUT
Rear Only BT03
F4 59V
X14 11 X16 59V X1 (X5) TX_MUX +100V
5 16A CPR Beamformer
Motor Control Board
35,9V X8
LT1676i 12 Driver
Common
Mode Coke 24V
CRS Signal Processing Board
TX,RX
PFC MC7815
V23
Control
DRAFT
15V Standby FPGA

Standby X5 (4) _Req
MC7805 Shutdown
5V Control SBC- PC Board
X18 X4
CPH X15 „Kretz shutdown“
GND
Transformer X17 X2 (X5) Program starts to
Section 5-11 - Power Distribution

(Part 2) close Win 2000
GND X5 (2) PS-ON
PLX
Figure 5-36 Power Distribution Diagram

WIN 2000 shut down
X3 X3
was successful
CKV Video
FAN 24V Management Board
14
13 Standby Switch
(Frontpanel)
5-11-1-3 Power Distribution Diagram (cont’d)
CCF Power CPY Power

Primary Board Switch Board
3 11
Inrush PFC
current
Limiter
7
Mains voltage
selector
SEL
4
15V (PFC 59V GND
110V 130V 230V 240V 36VAC control)
ext. devices
voltage
6 selector
240, 230,
130 or 36V
110V (PFC) X5 (DC Out)
input
2x 115V X3 (Std.By)
out Aux.
Foot
36V
to F4 LED
5
CPH 59V OUT
X8 (Fan)
Trafo
9 5x
primary Power Out
fuses 115V/230V
F1
+ 2
F2
14 8 10
Mains Power Fan (24V) fuse F4 for 13

Input Module 1 Control 36V input Standby
(incl. Mains Switch) LED (59V) to PFC 12 switch
fuse F3 for
Auxiliary Devices Cable to GEZ 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
Figure 5-37 Power Distribution Diagram Description

Table 5-7 Power Distribution Diagram Description - CPN
# Item Description X X X
Mains Input Connector (110V - 240V selectable; see: Item No.: 6)

1 Mains Power Input Module
incl. Mains Power Switch
2 Fuse F1 and F2 primary fuses 16A (on rear panel)
3 Inrush current Limiter delays approx. 100ms
4 Mains voltage Selector Wire Bridge Jumper (110V, 130V, 230V, 240V)
5 CPH Transformer including thermal protection
6 External voltage Selector wire bridge, located on CPY Power switch-Plug Board 115V/230V
7 Relay 1 activation of 115V/230V for external devices
8 F3 - Auxiliary fuse fuse protection for 230V = 1.6 Ampere ; for 115V = 3.2 Ampere
9 5x External Power OUT connectors 115V or 230V isolated Outputs
10 Fuse F4 on rear panel, 16A for 36V PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) input
11 PFC (Power Factor Correction Part) Input 2x 36VAC; Output 59V DC
12 Cable to GEZ (59V) Cable to GEZ 59V + Standby control + Foot Switch signal
13 Standby switch Standby switch (located on Front panel), NO mains voltage switch!
14 Fan 24V
5-56 Section 5-11 - Power Distribution

5-11-1-4 Fuses on Rear Panel
F1 + F2: The main Input voltage is fused by two 16 Ampere fuses (rated current 16A) labeled F1 and F2.
F3: The AC Output voltage (115/230V) is fused by either:
• a 1.6 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 230 VAC
• a 3.2 Ampere / 250V fuse for auxiliary output voltage 115 VAC
F4: 16 Ampere fuse for the input voltage for the switching power supply generating the DC-Supply
voltage for the Secondary power supply inside GEZ-Module
Figure 5-38 Fuses of CPN
5-11-1-5 Fuses inside CPN

F1 on CCF board: fuses the surge current limiter circuit.
NOTE: If this fuse is blown, the NTC (limiting the surge current will remain hot during system operation
and if the system is switched off/on within a few seconds the surge current could be to high.
Because of this reason Fuse F1 on CPN Rear Panel or the Hospital circuit fuse could be blown.
5-11-2 Disk Drive Module (GEM)

The check points for the drives voltages can be found at the AUX Supply connector (= GEM Power
connector) on Backpanel of GEZ-Box; see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4.
• MO drive is supplied by +5V only
• DVD/CD drive is supplied by both +5V and +12 V
• Fan on the GEM module needs only 12 V power.
5-11-2-1 Fuses on CPE-Board for Disk Drive Module (GEM)

Description of fuses: 5A / 250V / slow-blow fuse / 5 x 20 mm
F1 F2
+12V +5V
Figure 5-39 fuses for disk drives

GEM
USB
(Drives DVD/ MOD)
PC
IDE Harddisk
If the system starts to load the Kretz US-Application
it checks if the CKV Board (PLX) is present.
PCI-Bus
In case that the PLX is not present or can not be

detected from Windows there appears a Message
Box (Message can’t detect PCI 9054).
CKV If the PLX is present the application can start

loading of the FGPA on the CKV board.
Next step is loading of the CRS FPGA.

Kretz-Bus
At last the controller for Motor Control (on CRS) is

loaded.
Kretz-Bus CWD
Kretz-Bus Beamformer
CRS
Kretz-Bus Front End
Bios Check
Power ON Starting of Windows 2000 Load of Kretz US-Application
(Harddisk, Extern Drives)
Figure 5-40 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Power On/Boot Up
5-58 Section 5-11 - Power Distribution

5-11-4 Power Off / Shutdown Procedure
System Standby switch

(at Standby Æ High)
Primary Power Supplay

(CPY, Standby_Red) If Standby switch is pressed (deactivated), the signal will be
transferred to CPY board (located in the primary Power Supply).
From there via Flat cable (inside the KVN-Cable) to the CPE
board (Rear panel at GEZ=main electronic box).
CPE CPE is plugged into motherboard which connects to CRS board,

(into GEF) the Signal will be written into FPGA (Field Programmable Gate
Array) on the CRS Board.
From CRS board it is connected to the CKV board, where the PC

(SBC) can read the signal status.
CRS
into FPGA If program (Kretz-shutdown) recognizes the signal (in CKV) it
(Field Programmable Gate activates the PC to close all applications and shut down.
Array)
After this it transmits a signal to the CKV to switch Power off.
If the PC is not responding (hang-up etc.) the power supply (CPY

board) runs in an automatic timer mode, which will shut power off
CKV
in any case after (approx.) 3 minutes.
(over CKV to PC)
Figure 5-41 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Power Off/Shutdown
CRS Signal Processing Board

GEZ-box
Standby FPGA
Standby S2(6) _Req
Shutdown Control SBC- PC Board
„Kretz shutdown“
Program starts to
S2(2) PS-ON close Win 2000
PLX
CPN S3(1) S3(2)
WIN 2000 shut down
was successful
power CKV Video
supply Management Board
Standby Switch
(Frontpanel)
Figure 5-42 Block diagram - Power Off/Shutdown

Section 5-12
Mechanical Descriptions
5-12-1 Physical Dimensions
1415
1041,1
851,8
668 337,5
607,5 399,5
456
516
560,5
678,29
Figure 5-43 Physical Dimensions
5-60 Section 5-12 - Mechanical Descriptions

5-12-2 Monitor
• Tilt: 11° forwards and backwards
• Swivel: +/-90° rotation.
5-12-3 Top Console Positioning
Figure 5-44 Top Console Positioning
5-12-4 Rotation of the Control Console
Locking Lever
the control console
Figure 5-45 Locking lever under Control Console
• Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 30° of horizontal adjustment to the right.

5-12-5 Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor
Figure 5-46 Assembly Drawing GW & GEU & Monitor
5-62 Section 5-12 - Mechanical Descriptions

Section 5-13
Air Flow Control
5-13-1 Air Flow Distribution
The fans at the right side of the Main Board Chassis draw air into the scanner, through the filter grid,
and pushes it through the card rack.
Air holes in the left and right side of the rack allow the air to move down through the card rack.
Air exits the scanner through holes the Main Air Outlet at the left side panel.
5-13-1-1 Air Flow Distribution Overview
Main Air Main Air

Outlet Inlet (Filter grid)
CPN Air Outlet
Figure 5-47 Console Views
Main Air Outlet
Fan
CPP
an
PC F
Fan 2
F an 1
Main Air Inlet
Fan 1: for CPP and CRS

Fan 2: for CRW and CPR
Figure 5-48 Air Flow Control

Section 5-14
Service Platform
5-14-1 Introduction
The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making
GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever.
The Service Platform contains:
• a set of web based modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing
a PC backend; see: Section 5-15 "Service Home Page" on page 5-66.
• specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, troubleshooting, update, etc. for Voluson
systems; see: Section 5-16 "Service Page" on page 5-70.
5-14-2 Access / Security

The Service Platform has different access and security user levels.
Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE: A Service Dongle is necessary for use by GE Service when performing proprietary level diagnostics.
OnLine Center access to the scanner requires the password and they must have ‘Disruptive’
permission and customer input to run diagnostics.
The password changes at specific intervals. Access with the password is tied to the service key.
5-14-3 Service Login

Figure 5-49 Extended Access (for GE field engineers only)
As soon as you have entered the password, the “GEMS Service Home Page” is displayed.
3.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard simultaneously to switch between “GEMS Service Home
Page - Netscape” and “Kretz UISApp” ( = Ultrasound Application).
Kretz GEMS
Ultrasound Application Service Home Page
Figure 5-50 press ALT + TAB to switch between Service Home Page and Ultrasound Application
5-64 Section 5-14 - Service Platform

5-14-4 iLinq Interactive Platform

Many of the services of the Service Platform come from its integration with iLinq.
If an iLinq checkout was performed on the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV, the ILINQ selection item is
available in the menu area (on the left side of the screen) of the “Utilities” menu.
By selecting this item, the Netscape® browser starts the “iLinq Home Page”.
Figure 5-51 iLinq Home Page

Section 5-15
Service Home Page
5-15-1 Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
NOTICE Extended Access (for GE field engineers only) see:

Ex
Section 5-14-3 "Service Login" on page 5-64.
When the Global Service User Interface (GSUI) is started, the Service Home Page appears.
It contains the software revision along with the hardware inventory and the results of the latest System
Health Information.
Figure 5-52 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Home
The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows to select from following tools:
• Diagnostics on page 5-67

• Utilities on page 5-68
5-66 Section 5-15 - Service Home Page

5-15-2 Diagnostics
Detailed information about “Common Diagnostics” is found in Chapter 7;
Section 7-6 "Common Diagnostics" on page 7-13.
Figure 5-53 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Diagnostics
5-15-2-1 Diagnostics Execution

Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level
diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require
disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
5-15-2-2 Diagnostic Reports

Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for
future viewing of the diagnostic logs.
5-15-2-3 Proactive Diagnostics

A system of self-monitoring is largely supported with the integration of iLinq. The scheduler, executive,
user interfaces, and some of the proactive diagnostic functions are provided by iLinq.
Other tasks should be provided by the product team.

5-15-3 Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools.
Detailed informations about “Virtual Console Observation” and “Disruptive Mode” is found in Chapter 7;
Section 7-5 "Virtual Console Observation" on page 7-10.
Figure 5-54 GEMS Service Home Page - Utilities
5-68 Section 5-15 - Service Home Page

5-15-4 Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates

The Service Platform provides for remote software downloads. Any file transferred to the scanner will
be in the form of an installation package. The actual content of the installation package is dependent on
each product. The Service Platform downloads the software module into an appropriate directory and
executes the product-specific installer executive.
Software installation is simple and automated, where applicable.
Supports software upload via remote transmission
Supports software upload via Service Platform

Supports partial upgrades
Supports de-installs of the latest partial upgrade
Supports remote activation/installation of software options

Options can be activated permanently
Options can be activated for a timed period
5-15-4-1 Remote System Shutdown and Restart

The Service Platform provides the ability to restart the system as per standard shutdown/startup
procedures. Remote shutdown will only be provided if a software-controlled shutdown exists on the
scanner. Scanner system restart is always accessible from the OLC.
5-15-4-2 File and/or Image Transfer

The Service Platform supports file transfers and archived image transfers to the OnLine Center.
The Service Platform provides interfaces of the displayed images for transfer to the OLC.

Section 5-16
Service Page
5-16-1 Introduction
The Service Page contains specific software/hardware test modules, system setup, troubleshooting,
update, etc. for Voluson systems only.
5-16-2 Access / Security

The service page has different access and security user levels.
Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
5-16-3 Service Login
NOTICE Extended Access (for GE field engineers only) see:

Ex
Section 5-14-3 "Service Login" on page 5-64.
Debug
Keyboard Layout
Service Tools
Generate NLS Keys
Save Settings &

Exit without Saving Exit
5-16-3-1 Debug
• Mode State Display - Feature is not designed for external use.
• Image Boundary - Bounds the ultrasound sector.
• 4D Shift Control - For adjusting the probe in 4D applications.
If the 4D image is wobbling too much, the adjustment can be performed with this function.
Operation see: Section 6-7 "4D Shift Control" on page 6-9.
5-16-3-2 Keyboard Layout

To change the keyboard layout to different languages.
Operation see: Section 6-6 "Modification of Keyboard Layout" on page 6-7.
5-70 Section 5-16 - Service Page

NOTE: Reconfigure the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also.
see: Section 8-55 "Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-146
5-16-3-3 Service Tools

see: Section 5-16-4 "Service Tools" on page 5-72
5-16-3-4 Generate NLS Keys

This function is not ready for use in the field.

5-16-4 Service Tools

In the Service Tools page many functions for troubleshooting will be present.
Click the SERVICE TOOLS button on the Service window (see: Figure 5-55 on page 5-70) to get access
to the “Service Tools” page.
Update
Auto Tester
Monitor Test
Service Viewer
Video Norm Printer
Export Maintenance
System Data Report
Video out VHS2
Service Actions
Console Test
Connected probes Delete all patients Hardware Test
Figure 5-56 Service Tools page
After selecting the corresponding button, following Data’s can be requested by the Service Engineers:
5-16-4-1 Auto Tester File

Autotest is a log function of customer activities. It records all user actions (scanning, entries, performing
Calculations, review of Patient Reports, etc.…). It is possible to safe (record) as file on HDD.
But also export to DVD/CD or MOD can be done to allow replay of the records on other units.
NOTICE For intermittent problems this file can be requested from the Service Engineer or customer.
It is possible to burn this file on DVD/CD+(R)W or to store it on MO-disk.
Operation see: Section 7-7 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-20.

5-16-4-2 Service Viewer

Provides common information about System Temperature, Probes, Working hours of system
components and probes, etc.
1.) Select the SERVICE VIEWER button to get access to the E-Service page.
Figure 5-57 Kretztechnik E-Service
5-16-4-3 Connected probes

Supplies information about: type and serial number of connected probe and which position is used for it.
There is no edit function included.
1.) Click the CONNECTED PROBES button on the “Service Tools” page.
Figure 5-58 Probe Status
5-16-4-4 Service Actions

The history of “Service Actions” like maintenance, repair, upgrade will be displayed.

1.) Click the SERVICE ACTIONS button on the “Service Tools” page.
Figure 5-59 Service action
5-16-4-5 Console test

Select the CONSOLE TEST button on the “Service Tools” page to perform the Control Console test.
Operation see: Section 7-12-1 "Control Console Test" on page 7-36.
5-16-4-6 Delete all Patients

1.) Click the DELETE ALL PATIENTS... button. Following WARNING message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-60 Warning message
WARNING If you select the YES button, all patients data, studies, images and measure report data
will be deleted permanently from the hard disk and cannot be recovered!
5-16-4-7 Export System Data

Select the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button on the “Service Tools” page to export dump-files and text
files, the full Service Database informations about probes, boards, Software, Options, Service Actions
and the Event Log File to the DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO Drive).
Operation see: Section 7-4-2 "Export Log’s and System Data" on page 7-5.
5-16-4-8 Maintenance Report

Any modification upgrade and maintenance action should be entered in this report to get a history of all
service actions.

1.) Click the MAINTENANCE REPORT button. The following message box will be displayed.
Figure 5-61 Maintenance Report
2.) Fill in the requested information and click OK.

3.) Click the EXIT button on the Service Tools window and the EXIT button on the System Setup
Service page.
NOTE: After Hardware or Software modifications normally the “Maintenance Report” message box
(see: Figure 5-61) appears automatically on the screen.

5-16-4-9 Hardware Test

Beamformer (BF) -, Front-End-, BM-, CRS-, PW Doppler-, and BF-SelfDiagnostic tests for diagnostic
and troubleshooting procedures are included.
1.) Click the HARDWARE TEST button. The “Hardware Test Dialog” appears on the screen.
Beamformer Test
Front-End Test current
BM Test system device
Temperature
CRS Test
PW-Doppler Test
BF-SelfDiagnostic
Figure 5-62 Hardware Test Dialog
WARNING It doesn’t matter if there is an error message after a test application – these are special
test conditions – Restart the system.
5-16-4-10 Beamformer Test

Test of the whole Beamformer board inclusive sub boards can be performed.
Operation see: Section 7-10 "Beamformer Test" on page 7-26.
5-16-4-11 Front-End Test

Not ready for use in the field.
Figure 5-63 Front-End Test (CPU-Test)

5-16-4-12 BMTest
This page contains:
• Pattern Generator part; see: Section 5-16-4-12-1 on page 5-77

• Transmitter Power test; see: Section 5-16-4-12-2 on page 5-78
- TX Discharge; see: step A.)
- TX Power voltage Measurement; see: step B.)
NOTE: APERTURE MIN Test should be used in the Beamformer test menu.
see: Section 7-10 "Beamformer Test" on page 7-26.
5-16-4-12-1 Pattern Generator

Can help to find out where image problems are caused from. (FrontEnd or BackEnd processing)
1.) Run a probe.

2.) Select the PATTERN GEN button (Pattern Generator) in the BM Test Dialog window.
The pattern data’s are fed in the CRS board. If pattern is shown correctly, this means that the whole
BackEnd digital scan converter part from CRS to CKV is ok.
Figure 5-64 Pattern Generator and TX-Discharge values

5-16-4-12-2 Transmitter Power Test

CPP board generates TX Supply voltages, separately for B-Mode (TXPow1 10....90V dependent
on Acoustic power setting) and Doppler Modes like PW, CFM, PD (TXPow2).
If supply power for TX pulse generator is down because of defect, there is no high voltage output
transmission on CPR beamformer (or if too low the ultrasound penetration depth is reduced
because of reduced TX Output Amplitude).
These 2 DC power sources are measured on CRS board by means of 2 separate A/D converters
(1x B-Mode, 1x Doppler Mode).
CPP Power CRS Signal Processing Board

Secondary Board
Tx_POW_1 A
10-90V D
59V from CPN Primary
Power supply
Tx_POW_2
A
10-90V
(only BT03) D
FPGA
CPR Beamformer
Board
Transmitter part TX
Figure 5-65 TX Powertest - Blockdiagram
There are two methods to check TX Power Supplies:

A.) TX Discharge
TX Discharging is necessary for fast switching between B-Modes and Doppler.
When activating the one TX mode (e.g., for B-Mode) the previous TX voltage (e.g., Doppler) should
be switched off to avoid artefacts.
Result of this test: check if the TX voltage is available on CPP and if the discharge circuit on CPP
is effective, means the switch down time is fast enough.
1.) Click on the TX-DISCHARGE button in the BM Test Dialog window.

The TXPow1 and 2 are set to 80V, then discharging-slope steepness is measured.
The values of the TX1 and TX2 should be > 0.45 Volt/milliSec (see: Figure 5-64 on page 5-77).
If this test fails: replace CPP board (damaged discharge circuit),

if still fails (in rare cases) replace CRS board (damaged control unit)
NOTE: If the Switching time between B-Mode and Doppler-Modes is very slow, this could be an indication
for bad discharging circuit on CPP as the Mode change is only possible if the deactivated TX supply
voltage reaches value below 5V.

B.) TX Power voltage Measurement

Result of this test: value of DC supply voltage TXPow 1 (active and used in B-Modes) and TXPow2
(only active in CFM, PW or PD Doppler Modes) produced on CPP board.
These voltages could theoretically be set between 0 and 90V, dependent on used probe, system
settings and selected Power, controlled by CRS board.
Test procedure:
1.) Run an AB2-7 probe.
NOTE: If no AB2-7 Probe is available, it is possible to simulate a probe.

Enable “Extended Access” (see: Section 5-14-3 on page 5-64) and then press CTRL + P
repeatedly until AB2-7 probe is visible in the “Probe/Program Selection” menu on the Touch Panel.
2.) Select Application [Abdomen], Settings [Default].
CAUTION The resulting voltages are dependent on program settings and give different result if you
choose a different application or program setting.
3.) Make sure that probe is really in “Run” mode (otherwise test result is 0).
Screen is updated...at least you can see noise which is moving when TGC and Gain is set to
maximum, and PWR display for B-Mode is at 100%.
4.) Select the TX_PWR_VOLTAGE button in the BM Test Dialog window.
5.) Compare reading of TX_PWR (see: Figure 5-66) with Table 5-8 values for B (2D) Mode.
6.) Activate the CFM Mode by pressing on the C knob on the control panel.
7.) Select the TX_PWR_VOLTAGE button again.
8.) Compare reading of TX_PWR (see: Figure 5-66) with Table 5-8 values for CFM (C) Mode.
typical reading at
B (2D) Mode
typical reading at
CFM (C) Mode
Figure 5-66 Typical reading of TX_PWR using AB2-7 probe
Table 5-8 Typical TX-PWR values of AB2-7 probe
Probe Application Settings Mode TX_Pwr 1 (at 100% PWR) TX_Pwr2 (at 100% PWR)
AB2-7 Abdomen Default B (2D) Mode 57.5V 0V
AB2-7 Abdomen Default CFM (C) Mode 57.5V 27V
NOTE: The resulting measurements should show values as specified in Table 5-8 (Tolerance +/- 5V).

If this test fails: replace CPP board in case that one single TX Supply is out of tolerance or down,
if still fails (in rare cases) replace CRS board (damaged control unit)
NOTICE If TX Power readout is 0 for both TX_PWR1 and TX_PWR2:

Make sure that the TX Power off was not forced by defective beamformer board CPR.
see: Section 7-13-3-1 "How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply" on page 7-42.
Table 5-9 Fuses on CPP-Board
Fuse Description of Fuse
F3 +TX_PWR 2 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F4 -TX_PWR 2 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F12 +TX_PWR 1 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
F13 -TX_PWR 1 (slow-blow fuse T3.0A) can not be exchanged in the field; replace CPP-Board
Figure 5-67 Fuses on CPP-Board

5-16-4-13 CRS Test
5-16-4-13-1 RAM Test

1.) Click on the CRS TEST button.
2.) Select the RAM TEST button to test all RAM‘s which are located on the CRS board.
Result of all tests should be “no errors detected” or “Passed” ; see: Figure 5-68.
If this test fails: replace CRS board (damaged RAM‘s)
5-16-4-13-2 Analog Test

There are several DACs to generate the control signals for all motors driven volume probes which
are tested with this function. The “Motor sin-cos-generator part test” is used in case of problems
with driving the motors of volume probes (e.g., during volume acquisition, volume sweep,
positioning of arrays within volume probe, etc.).
1.) Click on the CRS TEST button.

2.) Select the ANALOG TEST button.
Result of all tests should be “O.K.” ; see: Figure 5-68.
Test concept:
- DSP loads the DA converters with test signal
- then the output of these DACS (for Reference voltage DAC, Sin2, COS2 and Sin3) is
measured by means of sensing resistors and ADC.
- finally digital input is compared with output results
Actually only the following values can be measured in all cases and give correct results:
DAC REF1, SIN2, COS2 and SIN3
If this test fails: replace CRS board
NOTE: Replace the CRS only, if one of the above mentioned Motorcontrol outputs are listed to be not ok.
Figure 5-68 CRS Test Dialog
5-16-4-14 PW Doppler Test
NOTE: These tests are no more functional on (BT´05) systems, since hardware parts were transferred
and handled via SBC (PC) software.

5-16-4-15 “Geräte” Temperature

Shows temperature of the CPP-board.
To display the current system device temperature, select the UPDATE button.
5-16-4-16 Beamformer - SelfDiagnostic

This test is out of date, and no longer useful on Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) systems.

5-16-4-17 Monitor Test

1.) To perform the Monitor test, select the MONITOR TEST button.
The following message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-69 Monitor Test - Instructions
2.) Read the displayed instructions. Afterwards confirm with YES.

The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
EXIT
Figure 5-70 Monitor Test - Main menu
3.) Open the desired test page: select the respective icon and press the RIGHT/LEFT TRACKBALL key.
4.) To return to the Main menu, press the UPPER TRACKBALL key.
5.) To exit the Monitor Test program, click the “Exit” icon.

5-16-4-18 Printer
Installation of the Line Printer is possible without entering the Windows Desktop.
Operation see: 3-7-4 "Printer Installation manually" on page 3-38.
WARNING Only accessories explicitly recognized and released by the system manufacturer GE
Medical Systems - Kretztechnik may be used in connection with the system.
5-16-4-19 Update
5-16-4-19-1 NLS
Not for use in the field!
5-16-4-19-2 EUM
is for updating the Electronic User Manual
Operation see: Section 8-6 "Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-17.
5-16-4-19-3 UIS
is for updating the Ultrasound Application Software
Operation see: Section 8-2-5 "Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)" on page 8-8.
5-16-4-19-4 SSW
5-16-4-20 is for updating the Service Software

Operation see: Section 8-5 "Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure" on page 8-
15.Console
This function is not ready for use.

Section 5-17
Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY)
5-17-1 Introduction
GE Field Engineers can find commonly used tools within a well organized subfolder of the Windows
Start menu.
5-17-2 (Extended) Access to Windows Start Menu

1.) Turn power on (let system start up completely).
As soon as the dongle is detected, the login window pops up.
Figure 5-71 Extended Access (for GE field engineers only)
4.) Press CTRL and ESC keys simultaneously and open the Windows Start Menu.
CAUTION
Factory use ONLY!
Figure 5-72 Windows Start Menu
5.) Using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard, select Programs - GE Field Engineer.

5-17-3 Description of Sub folder “GE Field Engineer”

Table 5-10 Sub folder “GE Field Engineer”
Windows Tool Description
Network and Dial-up Displays network and dial-up connections on the computer and helps to create new ones.
Connections Connects to other computers, networks and the Internet.
Printers Adds, removes and configures local and network printers
Command Prompt Performs text-based (command-line) functions.
Computer Management Manages disks and provides access to other tools to manage local and remote computers.
Event Viewer Displays monitoring and troubleshooting messages from Windows and other programs.
iLinq Shell DOS- and GSP - shell, convenient for iLinq.
The Distinct Network Monitor captures network traffic and translates the protocol negotiation
Network Monitor
of that traffic into simple English.
Notepad Creates and edits text files using basic text formatting.
PC Doctor A comprehensive hardware diagnostic and system information tool.
Service Browser Access to the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
CD Wizard Access to the built-in CD writing program.
Provides information about programs and processes running on the computer.

Taskmanager
It also displays the most commonly used performance measures for processes.
Windows Explorer Displays the files and folders on the computer.
Service Manual Displays service manual of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) system
Compact and Repair This tool opens and compacts all relevant databases on D:\ [User].
Database Operation see: Section 7-8 "How to repair Databases (*.mdb)" on page 7-23
5-17-3-1 Further functions in the Start Menu
Table 5-11 further functions
Activare UISAPP Used after initializing with Linux.
Kretz V730 Shortcut to start the Ultrasound Application.

If activated when application is already running,it kills this application.
5-17-3-2 FACTORY ONLY functions in the Start Menu
Table 5-12 Factory ONLY functions
Prepare Master Script used to prepare master image for SystemDVD. Disconnects all network drives, empties Startup.
Harddisk DOS-box appears at next reboot. Application will not start until the DOS-box procedure is complete.
Reboot_Make Password protected script that reboots into Linux and dumps an image of the C: drive onto R:.
Image Very dangerous if used, since the original factory images will be overwritten by the state.
Remedy: SystemDVD, Initialize.
5-86 Section 5-17 - Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY)
Section 5-18
LINUX - Service Function Page
5-18-1 Overview
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV systems contain updated Linux “Maintenance system” with improved
functionality (e.g., restore software/recover partitions, hard disk (HDD) copy function); see: Section 5-
18-4 on page 5-91 and possibility to perform extended PC memtest; see: Section 5-18-8 on page 5-100.
NOTICE In any event, it is highly recommended to use the appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-12),
which contains:
• updated Linux rescue partition
• System”C:” image (Windows 2000 with latest patches)
• Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application Settings [Backup], Electronic User Manual [EUM]
• Utility for repairing databases on “D:” (see also: Section 7-8 on page 7-23)
5-18-2 Access/Security
Functions are secured by service password (class C).
1.) Turn system OFF and then back ON.

2.) After “boot” message appears on screen, press SHIFT + L and then ENTER on the keyboard.
3.) Enter the password Rudi (case sensitive). The system will boot with LINUX.
NOTICE After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows.
If you missed step 2, retry again with CTRL + ALT + DEL.
5-18-2-1 General Operation and Selection in LINUX (and BIOS) menu
General operation and selection is done with:

• the alphanumeric keyboard
• the “Arrow” keys (right, left, up, down) and
• the “Enter” key on the keyboard

5-18-3 Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk
CAUTION If the system is still responsive (system starts up without problems and the application software
is running as usual, try to print out or write down System Setup and Measure Setup settings;
because they could be lost. Even if most of these settings can be restored after the installation,
it is strongly recommend to record them before starting the procedure.
Disconnecting all external USB devices (e.g., USB printer) is necessary.
Re-adjusting those settings and re-installation of any previously attached printer has to be done
after the recovery procedure.
CAUTION If the system is suspected to be infected with a virus, it is highly recommended to disconnect
the network cable before starting the system.
1.) Verify that the GEM - Disk Drive Module is properly connected
(otherwise automatically drive letter allocation could fail).
Figure 5-73 Connection of the Disk Drive Module (GEM)
2.) Boot up the system, connect a probe and start any user program.
3.) Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu.
4.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to invoke the “System Setup” desktop.
5.) Select SYSTEM INFO page and check the Software Version and the date of the “Factory Settings”
(see: Figure 7-1: System Setup - System Info page (e.g. V730 Pro) on page 7-2).
6.) Select the NETWORK page:
- Click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and print out the “DICOM
Configuration” dialog page or write down the DICOM parameters (AE Title, Station Name,
Retry Count and Retry Interval).
- Click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and print out the “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page or write down the IP settings.
5-88 Section 5-18 - LINUX - Service Function Page

5-18-3 Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk (cont’d)

5-18-3 Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk (cont’d)
7.) Select the BACKUP page and click on the SAVE button of the “Full Backup” group.
Select destination, enter the description and then click on NEXT.
For more details about “Full Backup” see:Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
choose destination
enter description
click Next
Figure 5-74 Full Backup Save
Confirm the following messages with YES and OK.

After copying the data the system reboots and the application starts again.
8.) Print out the GENERAL page (Clinic Name, Screen saver, etc.) or write down the settings of this
dialog page.
9.) Print out the USER SETTINGS page (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.) or write down the settings
of this dialog page.
10.)Print out the PERIPHERALS page (to adjust the assignment of the Remote PRINT keys, etc.) or write
down the settings of this dialog page.
11.)Open the OPTION page to see which options are currently installed in the system.
Print out this page or write down the codes in the “Key” fields.
If this was not possible, contact to OLC will be necessary.
12.)Invoke the “Measure Setup” desktop:

13.)Press the UTILITIES key on the control panel once to display the Utilities menu.
14.)Select the MEASURE item from the menu area to invoke the “Measure Setup” desktop.
15.)Print out the MEASURE & CALC page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
Ask the customer if he is using special programmed tables or equations.
16.)Print out the APPLICATION PARAMETERS page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
17.)Print out the GLOBAL PARAMETERS page or write down the settings of this dialog page.
18.) Disconnect all external USB devices (e.g., USB printer).
NOTE: Do NOT disconnect the Disk Drive Module (GEM); see: Figure 5-73.

5-18-4 Linux “Maintenance System”

1.) Enter Linux as described in Section 5-18-2 "Access/Security" on page 5-87.
The Linux “Maintenance system” main menu with following functions appear:
CD-ROM Menu
SaveSettings
Advanced Functions Menu
Exit/Reboot
Figure 5-75 Linux - Main menu
5-18-4-1 CD-ROM
This item switches to the CD-ROM Functions Menu (see: Section 5-18-7 on page 5-99).
It is required that the correct System DVD is in the drive.
5-18-4-2 SaveSett
NOTE: Using this function is NOT recommended; since the “Full Backup” function covers most of the
system settings. (Contents are described on page 4-35.)
5-18-4-3 Format M/O

After confirming a warning dialog, formatting of a MO-Disk is started.
5-18-4-4 Advanced
This item switches to the Advanced Functions Menu (see: Section 5-18-5 on page 5-92).
5-18-4-5 About
This item displays various version strings from the Linux system.
5-18-4-6 Exit/Reboot
This item exits the maintenance system and reboots the system.
5-18-4-7 Halt
This item exits the maintenance system. Afterwards the power may safely be turned off.

5-18-5 Advanced Functions Menu

1.) If system functionality allows it, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3
"Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk" on page 5-88.
3.) In the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu (Figure 5-75) select [Advanced].
The “Advanced Functions Menu” with following functions appear:
Restore
Clone
Initialize
Figure 5-76 Advanced Functions Menu
5-18-5-1 Exit
Return to the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu.
5-18-5-2 Network
This item provides an easy interface for network setup.
The [Network] function is not for use in the field.
5-18-5-3 SSHD
By selecting this item, a SSH-daemon is started on the system.
The [SSHD] function is reserved for extended troubleshooting. Not for use in the field.
5-18-5-4 Shell
By selecting this item, a Bash-shell is opened. Enter “exit” to return to the main menu.
The [Shell] function is not for use in the field.

5-18-5-5 Restore C: from recovery partition (R:)

This function takes the image stored on the Rescue (R:) partition to replace the existing image of the
“C” partition.
The System “C:” image contains:

• Windows 2000 with patches
NOTE: Data on the D: [User] partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data
and Reports) will NOT be modified!
NOTICE The [Restore] function should only be performed if NO System DVD (see: Table 9-12) is available!
Th
If you have an appropriate System DVD, please select the [Restore] function that is available in the
CD-ROM Functions Menu; see: Section 5-18-7-2 on page 5-99.
1.) If not already done, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3 on page 5-88.
NOTE: Please make sure that you have saved a “Full Backup”.

4.) In the “Advanced Functions Menu” (Figure 5-76) select [Restore].
5.) Only if you are sure to have saved the settings (via “Full Backup” or the [SaveSett] item),
select YES in the “Do you really want to ....” dialog box and confirm with ENTER.
6.) In the displayed menus select [Exit] –> [Exit/Reboot].
Figure 5-77 Advanced Functions Menu
The system boots with windows and check disk will be performed automatically.
NOTICE An automated process was developed to choose the right GEU user interface console, assigning an
unique computer name (Hardware ID) and matching the drive letters.
7.) Wait until “check disk” is finished and the “DOS” box (Figure 5-78) and the “System Settings
Change” message box (Figure 5-80) appear.
NOTE: Detection of new devices may take some time (up to 5 minutes).
Please wait until the message box “System Settings Change” (see: Figure 5-80) is displayed.
If the “System Settings Change” message box obstructs the view to the “DOS” box, move it away.

5-18-5-5 Restore C: from recovery partition (R:) (cont’d)

8.) Click onto the “DOS” box. The “DOS” window becomes active
click onto the

“DOS” window
Figure 5-78 Press “S” to set the name of the computer
9.) Press the S key on the keyboard to set the name of the computer. The “DOS” box proceeds:
Figure 5-79 Press the “C” key to continue the setup
10.)Press the C key on the keyboard to continue without activating the UIS.
11.)Confirm the “System Settings Change” message with YES.
Figure 5-80 confirm “System Settings Change” message

12.)After restart, press the CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
13.)Open Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys, select “My Computer” and check the drive letters.
Figure 5-81 Check the drive letters
The drive letters SHOULD be:

C: System , D: User , E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional MOD-drive is installed),
F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive) , R: Rescue
NOTE: If they are not assigned this way, reboot the system.
14.)Close the Windows Explorer.

15.)If the “DOS” box is not still open, press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to open the Windows
Start menu and then select “Activate UISApp”.
16.)When the “DOS” box is open, press the A key to activate the Ultrasound Application Software [UIS].
Figure 5-82 When the “DOS” box is active, press the “A” key to start UlSApp

17.)Skip the “BT warning” with CONTINUE.
Figure 5-83 Skip the BT warning with CONTINUE
NOTE: Options will be recovered at a later step with “Full Backup” process.
18.)Set the Video Norm to PAL(50Hz) to NTSC(60Hz) and confirm with OK.
Figure 5-84 Set Video Norm PAL or NTSC
19.)Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box:
• choose “Repair”
• enter “Name of Technician” (your name) and
• enter “Description”: Linux Repair and HDD Recovery
Figure 5-85 System Status Messenger
20.)Confirm with OK.

21.)Customize the system as described in Section 5-18-6 on page 5-98.

5-18-5-6 Clone Hard Disk

The [Clone] item has no function.
5-18-5-7 Initialize Hard disk (C: and D:)

This function performs operations which result in complete data loss of all files on C:\ and D:\
partition. The image on the on the Rescue (R:) partition of the hard disk is used for restoring C:\.
NOTE: All data on D:\ (User) partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data
and Reports) will be deleted and re-initialized.
The resulting “initialized” hard disk contains factory default partition images (Linux, C:, D: and R:);
independent of previous hard disk contents:
• C:\ [System]: Windows 2000 with latest patches, Ultrasound Application Software [UIS], Application
Settings [Backup] and Electronic User Manual [EUM]
• D:\ [User]: Initialized Databases for Sonoview Images, Measurements, Patient Data and Reports
• R:\ [Rescue]: Rescue image of C:
NOTICE The [Initialize] function should only be performed if NO System DVD (see: Table 9-12) is available!
If you have an appropriate System DVD, please select the [New Disk] function, which is only available
when booting from DVD. Operation see: Installation Manual KTI105994.
1.) If not already done, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3 on page 5-88.
3.) If it was not possible to save a “Full Backup”, save options and settings via [SaveSett] as described
in Section 5-18-4-2 "SaveSett" on page 5-91.
5.) In the “Advanced Functions Menu” (Figure 5-76) select [Initialize].
NOTE: The following operation steps are the same as for Restoring C:.
6.) Perform step 5.) to step 21.) of the Section 5-18-5-5 "Restore C: from recovery partition (R:)" on
page 5-93.
5-18-5-8 Clear
This function fills the file C:\pagefile.sys (Windows swap file) with 0, thus reducing the space needed for
the C: image.
This function is not intended for use in the field.

5-18-6 After Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk

NOTICE In case that “Full Backup” is NOT available, contact to OLC will be necessary to get option CODE’s.
Before calling OLC, please prepare the following data:
• SNO of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
• Needed option
1.) If not currently done, restart the system and boot up completely.
3.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (changes every six month) and click ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT and F4 key simultaneously to close the “GEMS Service Home Page”.
5.) Connect a probe and start any user program.
6.) Press UTILITIES and then select the SYSTEM item to invoke the System Setup desktop.
7.) Select the BACKUP page to load the appropriate User Settings.
NOTE: Reloading the User Settings only (Application Settings) from “D:\User Settings\FactoryDefault”
should ONLY be performed, if :
• no “Full Backup” available (for the same system)
see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)"
NOTE: Reloading a “Full Backup” into the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system is ONLY possible, if:
• “Full Backup” was saved (on the same system) before recovering the hard disk
see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)"
NOTE: If you have reloaded the “Full Backup”, step 8.) to step 11.) as well as step 15.) to step 17.)
in this section can be omitted.
8.) Select the OPTION page and enter the codes for the options as described in Section 8-8
"Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-21.
9.) Select the GENERAL page and check and match the settings (e.g. Clinic Name) according to printout.
10.)Select the USER SETTINGS page and check and match the settings (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh,
etc.) according to printout.
11.)Select the SERVICE page and match the Video Norm Standard (PAL/NTSC) and Video out (VHS2).
12.)Select the NETWORK page.
a.) click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and check and match the DICOM
parameters according to the printout.
b.) click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and adjust the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties according to the printout.
13.)Click the SAVE&EXIT button to store settings and exit the System Setup desktop screen.
14.) Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described
in Section 3-7 "Printer Installation" on page 3-24. Afterwards check and match system settings in
the PERIPHERALS page (assignment of Remote PRINT keys, etc.).
15.)Press UTILITIES and then select the MEASURE item to invoke the Measure Setup desktop.
16.)Check and match settings of the MEASURE & CALC, the APPLICATION PARAMETERS and the
GLOBAL PARAMETERS page.
17.)Click the CLOSE button to store settings and exit the Measure Setup desktop screen.
NOTICE Save any presets, configurations and application settings via the “Full Backup” function to HDD and/or
DVD or MO disk, to have it available for next time.
Operation see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" .

5-18-7 CD-ROM Functions Menu

NOTICE The “CD-ROM Functions-Menu” is only accessible if an appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-12) is
inserted into the system´s DVD drive.
1.) If system functionality allows it, collect vital system information as described in Section 5-18-3
"Before Recovering or Initializing the Hard disk" on page 5-88.
2.) Insert the appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-12) into the drive.
3.) In the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu (Figure 5-75) select [CD-ROM].
The “CD-ROM Functions Menu” with following functions appear:
Figure 5-86 CD-ROM Functions Menu
5-18-7-1 Exit
Return to the Linux “Maintenance system” main menu.
5-18-7-2 Restore C: from CD-ROM (and update R: if present)

This function takes the image stored on the “System DVD” to replace the existing image of the “C”
partition. Additionally the (R:) Rescue image of (C:) is replaced by the “DVD image”.
The System “C:” image contains:

• Windows 2000 with patches
NOTE: Data on the D: (User) partition (e.g., Sonoview images, Measurement results, Patient Data
and Reports) will NOT be modified!
NOTICE Operation see: Installation Manual KTI105994.

Th
5-18-7-3 Advanced
This item switches to the “Advanced (CD-ROM) Functions Menu”.
This menu does not provide any useful functions when booting from HDD. However, it is not disabled.
NOTICE DO NOT use this menu when booting from HDD.

Th
For description of menu structure and appropriate functions, see: Installation Manual KTI105994.
5-18-7-4 About
This item displays various version strings from the Linux system and the software on the System DVD.

5-18-7-4 About (cont’d)
shows the currently installed

SBC-board version
Following SBC-board versions are

supported by this System DVD:
• Tyan ATX SBC-board
• Kontron ATX SBC-board
• IBASE SBC-board (BT´04 hardware)
• Kontron SBC-board (BT´04 hardware)
Figure 5-87 About - System DVD Version Information
5-18-8 Memory Check in LINUX

1.) After “boot” message appears on screen, press SHIFT + M1 and then ENTER on the keyboard.
NOTICE After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows.
If you missed step 1, retry again with CTRL + ALT + DEL.
Memory Test will start automatically and will take about 2 hours.
If there are errors they will be listed.
elapsed test time
list of errors
Figure 5-88 Memory check in LINUX
NOTICE After one cycle (about 2 hours) the memory check starts again. To interrupt the test, press the ESC key.
If you don’t interrupt the memory test by pressing the ESC key, it will perform never ending cycles of
memory checks.

Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out
of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified
personnel.
Table 6-1 Chapter 6 Contents

6-1 Overview 6-1
6-2 Regulatory 6-1
6-3 Monitor Adjustment 6-2
6-4 Control Console, Transport Lock 6-5
6-5 Trackball Adjustment 6-6
6-6 Modification of Keyboard Layout 6-7
6-7 4D Shift Control 6-9
Section 6-2
Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present
and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

Section 6-3
Monitor Adjustment
The Monitor can be tilted or rotated.
• Tilt angle: up/down 11°

• Rotation angle: right/left 90°
The digital control panel is located at the front of the color monitor. If you are not satisfied with the factory
settings, use these controls to program those you prefer in each resolution. Then, these adjusted
settings are kept in memory even if you change the resolution or turn off the monitor.
Decrease Increase
(Left) Menu (Right)
Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment buttons
• Menu key:
This button will enable the On Screen Display (OSD-instructions). This button is also used to select
the function in the Main Menu or to save the settings in the Sub Menu. (Push for 3 sec.)
• Decrease (Left):
in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to decrease the level of
contrast of the display screen.
• Increase (Right):
in OSD menu. Pressing this button out of the OSD menu allows you to increase the level of contrast
of the display screen.
6-3-1 Monitor Calibration

NOTE: Please warm up the monitor for 5-10 minutes before starting calibration.
This procedure consists of 7 parts:
1.) Degauss
2.) Color Temp - Calibration
3.) Contrast and Brightness
4.) Geometry
5.) Convergence
6.) Color temperature
7.) B-Mode Quality
6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment

6-3-1-1 Degauss
Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the
monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct the
problem.
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
seconds before you turn power back ON.
1.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls for approximately
4 seconds till the OSD menu appears on the screen.
2.) Press the RIGHT button 2 times to the DEGAUSS and then press the MENU key again to select it.
3.) Wait till DEGAUSS is completed.
6-3-1-2 Color Temp - Calibration

1.) On the Touch Panel, touch UTILITIES and then SYSTEM SETUP.
2.) Select the SERVICE page, enter the password SHE and click the ACCEPT button.
3.) Select the MONITOR TEST button in the “Service Tools” menu.
4.) Confirm the “Monitor Test” message with YES.
The Monitor Test main menu appears on the screen.
raster lines
color bars
color bars
gray scale
Color calibration icon
EXIT
Figure 6-2 Monitor Test - Main menu
5.) Select the “Color calibration” icon and press the right/left trackball key once (monitor is white).
6.) Press and hold the MENU (middle) key on the monitor controls for approximately 4 seconds till the
OSD menu appears on the screen.
7.) Press the RIGHT button 3 times to the COLOR TEMP and then press the MENU key to select it.
8.) Press the RIGHT button until CALIBRATION is highlighted and then press the MENU key again.
NOTE: The calibration cycle will immediately start for Red, Green and Blue. Wait till it´s completion
message “It has completed...” appears. During the Calibration process do not touch any key.
9.) To return to the Main menu, press the upper trackball key 2 times.
NOTE: Contrast and Brightness (see: 6-3-1-3) has to be adjusted after color calibration.

6-3-1-3 Contrast and Brightness

Adjusting the monitor´s contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image
quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Acoustic Output
may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate.
The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into
the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated.
NOTE: Brightness and Contrast should be adjusted at examination room light conditions.
Typically values for Contrast and Brightness are 70 to 75, depending on the operator!
1.) Press the MENU (middle) key (see: Figure 6-1) on the monitor controls
(= toggle button for contrast and brightness).
2.) Adjust the CONTRAST by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value.
3.) Press the MENU key again to toggle to brightness.
4.) Adjust the BRIGHTNESS by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT button to decrease/increase the value.
6-3-1-4 Geometry
Check the raster lines of the test pattern by referring to Figure 6-2.
Expected results:
1.) Squares are not distorted.

2.) Raster lines are straight.
3.) No keystone and pincushion distortion.
4.) Horizontal and vertical width is correct.
6-3-1-5 Convergence
Check the color of the raster lines (see: Figure 6-2).
Expected result:
Raster lines have only one color.
6-3-1-6 Color temperature

Check the grey scale and the color bars of the test pattern (see: Figure 6-2).
Expected results:
1.) “White“ is displayed without a tint (discolor).
2.) Colors are displayed correctly.
3.) To exit the Monitor Test program, touch EXIT.
6-3-1-7 B-Mode Quality

Connect an abdominal probe (AB or RAB), press the PROBE key, select the “Abdomen“ application
and start the “Default“ program. Record a B-Image of the liver.
If there is no abdominal probe, record a B-Image of the Thyroid by using a small parts probe
(SP6-12 or SP4-10) and the corresponding program.
Expected result:
Regular and homogenous B-Image without tint.
6-4 Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustment

Section 6-4
Control Console, Transport Lock
6-4-1 Control Console
The control console can be rotated 30° to the right.
When rotating the control console grasp it only the front grip.
locking lever
the control console
Figure 6-3 Locking Lever under Control Console
1.) Push the lever under the control console forward.

2.) Rotate the console to wanted position.
6-4-2 Transport Lock

There is a locking lever for locking and unlocking the control console, mounted at the front below the
control console. When preparing the system for transport, the lock has to be engaged in order to secure
the console against uncontrolled rotation. The lock catches in when the console is rotated to its center
0° position.
WARNING Do not put your hand between the control console and the Main unit when moving the
Do no
console to the 0 position: Danger of injuries!

Section 6-5
Trackball Adjustment
Adjustment of the mechanical movement may be necessary to ensure smooth running of the trackball.
1.) Remove the outer fixing ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to rotate counterclockwise

mount the fixing ring to remove the fixing ring
Figure 6-4 Trackball with fixing ring
2.) Adjust the trackball for smooth running by rotating the black securing ring.
• CCW: smooth run
• CW: tighten run
tighten run smooth run
Securing ring
Figure 6-5 Trackball - Securing Ring
NOTICE Avoid tightening of thread caused by improper mounting of securing ring!
3.) Mount the outer fixing ring by turning it clockwise. see Figure 6-4.
6-6 Section 6-5 - Trackball Adjustment

Section 6-6
Modification of Keyboard Layout
6-6-1 Setup the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Keyboard Language Layout
4D Shift Control
Keyboard Layout
Save&Exit
Figure 6-6 Service Page
7.) Click the KEYBOARD LAYOUT button on the service window.

Section 6-6 Modification of Keyboard Layout (cont’d)

8.) Select “Input Locales” on screen.
9.) To select the language click the PROPERTIES button.
Default Keyboard Settings
Figure 6-7 Default Keyboard Settings and Input Locale Properties
10.)Choose the Keyboard Layout language among Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Dutch,
Polish, Spanish, German, Italian, French, Portuguese or English (United States) US.
11.)Confirm with OK and click the SET AS DEFAULT button.
12.)Close the Service page with the SAVE&EXIT button.
13.)Restart the System.
14.)Test the Keyboard function after Restart:
- Press the ABC key on the control panel.
- Press some keys on the keyboard and verify the entered text.
6-8 Section 6-6 - Modification of Keyboard Layout

Section 6-7
4D Shift Control
This tool is used to adjust the Real Time 4D image to avoid “jumping” volume information caused by
mech. tolerances.
1.) Select the “4D Shift Control” field on the service window, and “hook” it; see Figure 6-5 on page 6-6.
2.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button.
3.) Start a Real Time 4D probe and press the 4D key on the control panel.
4.) Select the 4D RENDERING item from the menu area on the left side of the screen.
5.) To start the 4D acquisition, press the FREEZE key on the control panel.
6.) During Real Time 4D select the SUB MENU item from the menu area.
7.) SHIFT appears in the right lower corner.
SHIFT
Figure 6-8 3D/4D Sub Menu
8.) Contact the 4D-probe to a phantom and observe the center of the volume.
9.) Change SHIFT with the corresponding flip switch (during wobbling 4D Image).
Try to get stable volume.
10.)Press the FREEZE key.
11.)After this procedure press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item and enter the SERVICE page
again.
12.)Deselect the “4D Shift Control” check mark.
13.)Exit with SAVE&EXIT.

6-10 Section 6-7 - 4D Shift Control

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
7-1-2 Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs)
for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis.
There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.

7-1 Overview 7-1
7-2 Collect Vital System Information 7-2
7-3 Check Points Voltages 7-4
7-4 Screen Captures and Logs 7-5
7-5 Virtual Console Observation 7-10
7-6 Common Diagnostics 7-13
7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program 7-20
7-8 How to repair Databases (*.mdb) 7-23
7-9 How to delete the Service Database 7-25
7-10 Beamformer Test 7-26
7-11 Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan 7-33
7-12 User Interface Troubleshooting 7-36
7-13 Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions 7-38
7-14 Error Messages 7-63
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

Section 7-2
Collect Vital System Information
The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
Press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item and then enter the SERVICE INFO page.
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on the back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup Version (File Name)
• additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, SLOT_CPU version, etc.)
System Type
Serial number
Application Software
Hardware ID
Backup File Name
Date of Factory Settings
EUM Version
Serviceplatform
information
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System Information

(e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU
(e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 7-1 System Setup - System Info page (e.g. V730 Pro)
7-2 Section 7-2 - Collect Vital System Information

7-2-1 Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors

NOTICE In case of a system crash, or errors that are probably software bugs, provide as much detail information
as possible before contacting the OLC (On-Line Center).
1.) Contact person (+ telephone number and/or e-mail address)

2.) Vital system data (see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2)
- System Type
- System Serial number (also visible on label on the back of the system)
- Application Software version
- Backup Version (File Name)
- additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, SLOT_CPU version, etc.)
3.) Exact description of fault or error message (dump-file, see: Figure 7-6 on page 7-9)
- Address
- Module + (Address)
- Application Software version
- Memory Dump number (complete #)
4.) Press the ALT + D key on the alphanumeric keyboard to save/export
- a screenshot of the point in time when ALT + D was pressed,
- the current System state (as “Full Backup”) on demand, and
- logs and dump-files already stored on the D:\export folder
on the D:\export folder or on DVD/CD. (Operation see: Section 7-4-2-1 on page 7-6)
5.) If the bug or error is difficult to reproduce, record an Auto Tester file (ending at fault occurrence).
(Operation see: Section 7-7 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-20)

Section 7-3
Check Points Voltages
7-3-1 How to check power
Open the locking on the back of theVoluson®

730Pro / 730ProV and remove the service lid.
Check the status of the Diagnostic LED´s.
(+15V) LED 1 LED 6 (+3.3V)

(-15V) LED 2 LED 5 (+5V)
(Fan) LED 3 LED 4 (+12V)
In case of problems, check the above voltages

with a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) to Ground.
LED 1, 2 and 5 LED 4

ECG connector AUX Supply (= GEM Power connector) Additionally check 59V/DC
on Backpanel of GEZ-Box on Backpanel of GEZ-Box (Power connection-cable
from CPN to GEZ)
Pin 4
1 8 (+5V)
15 9
Pin 1
(+12V)
Location of fuses on CPE;
see: Section 5-11-2-1 on page 5-57
Pin 15 Pin 13 Pin 11 DVM
(+5V) (+15V) (-15V)
LED 6
Footswitch connector on Power Supply Module (CPN)
(Pin 2 and 3 = +3.3V ; Pin 1 = GND)
LED orange
visual check for 59V: orange LED
1 (at CPN power supply) is lightening
1
3 2 3
3 2
Figure 7-2 Diagnostic LED´s and corresponding voltage check points
7-4 Section 7-3 - Check Points Voltages

Section 7-4
Screen Captures and Logs
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the
screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center.
This is accomplished by saving the image(s):

A.) to SonoView and export them (as jpg, bmp or tiff ) to DVD/CD+(R)W or MO-disk
B.) as jpg and bmp to D:\export by pressing the ALT + P key on the alphanumeric keyboard
C.) creates one snapshot (Alt-D.bmp) + “Full Backup” of the System state (fullbackup -> fb1) saved on
D:\export by pressing the ALT + D key on the alpha-numeric keyboard.
Figure 7-3 D:\export
NOTE: (For further details about ALT + D , see: Section 7-4-2 "Export Log’s and System Data" on page 7-5.)
7-4-1 Capturing a screen

The following is the generic process to capture any screen from the scanner.
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.
2.) Press the SAVE 2D key on the control panel and save the image to Sonoview.
3.) Select the stored image(s) in Sonoview (Exam List) and EXPORT the image(s) to DVD/CD+(R)W
or MO-Disk (jpg, bmp or tiff).
7-4-2 Export Log’s and System Data

There are two possibilities to export system data (and log´s):
1.) by pressing the ALT + D key to save a snapshot and “Full Backup” of the System state;
2.) via the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA button in the System Setup SERVICE page;

7-4-2-1 Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key)
ALT + D uses “Full Backup” to gather data from the system. In addition it creates one screenshot
(Alt-D.bmp) of the point in time when ALT + D was pressed.
The main use is when R&D or OLC need detailed information about the system (e.g., when
experiencing strange behaviour or when the problem should be investigated by R&D).
It is not intended to replace or enhance the existing Full Backup functionality.
Data can be stored on the hard disk (D:\export\fullbackup\fb1), or you can export them to DVD/CD
(including the D:\export folder, which contains logs and dump-files; for details see: Section 7-4-2-2-1).
NOTE: Successive ALT + D keystrokes overwrite existing snapshots at destination HDD.
1.) Press the ALT + TAB key on the keyboard. simultaneously.
Figure 7-4 select destination for “System state” backup
2.) Select the destination of the “System state” backup among HDD or DVD/CD.
3.) Select the NEXT button to start the backup process.
After saving the data, the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV reboots and the application starts again.
Table 7-2 List of Data covered by “Full Backup” (fb1) via ALT + D
Name and Contents Location
Patient, study, measure (for report), image archive D:\images\dataManagerData\tables\V730.mdb
Images itself D:\images\Sonoview\Y2xx\Dxx\Exn\Ixxx
User settings D:\UserSettings\...
Programs Programs.mdb
UserProbe3D_4D UserProg3D_4D.mdb
System settings SystemSettings.mdb
Application settings ApplicationSettings.mdb
DICOM settings D:\images\Sonoview\DICOM\Device.mdb
7-6 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs

Table 7-2 List of Data covered by “Full Backup” (fb1) via ALT + D
Name and Contents Location
Measure Setup settings D:\measure\*.*
Windows settings Registry and Netsh
IP
DNS
Gateway
Netmask
Computer Name
Service Information D:\Service\v730_srv.mdb
User gray curve D:\UserSettings\UserGrayPoints.txt
Options SYSTEM\Kretz\PermanentKey / SYSTEM\Kretz\DemoKey
V730 settings Registry
1 SYSTEM\Kretz\BackupFilename
2 SYSTEM\Kretz\Language
3 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\*
4 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\AETitle
5 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\RetryInterval
6 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\RetryCount
7 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\DICOM\StationName
8 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\SonoView\Email
9 SOFTWARE\Kretz\C550\OCP\OCPServer\1.0\baud
12 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\DateFormat
13 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\PidDicomOptions
14 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\TimeFormat
15 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapPassword
16 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapReconnect
17 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapRemoteName
18 SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\URANUS\System\Settings\NetMapUserName
10 SYSTEM\Kretz\OCPTouchPanel\Scheme\*
11 SYSTEM\Kretz\OCPTouchPanel\Scheme\Scheme
Serviceplatform uses iipadmin backup

7-4-2-2 Export Log´s and System Data (via Service Page)

1.) Press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item from the menu area.
5.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen.
6.) Click the SERVICE TOOLS button on the Service window to get access to the “Service Tools” page.
Export System Data
7.) Click on the EXPORT SYSTEM DATA... button, to export dump-files (see: Section 7-4-2-2-1), text
files, the Event Log File, the full Service Database and information about probes, boards, software,
options and service actions to DVD/CD Drive (or the optional MO drive).
7-8 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures and Logs

7-4-2-2-1 Dump-file
Every time an error message like Figure 7-6 is produced, a dump-file and a text file containing the
error dump and the error message are created in D:\export. Up to 20 dump files are stored there.
important
dump-file
informations
Figure 7-6 system has encountered a problem
NOTE: To deposit this screen as an image file on D:\export, press ALT + P.

For more details see: Section 7-4 "Screen Captures and Logs" on page 7-5.
After clicking on OK the system reboots automatically.

Section 7-5
Virtual Console Observation
7-5-1 General
This tool offers the possibility to view the entire customer´s desktop and operation system.
Using the tool a remote service technician or the OnLine Center can access and modify all PC settings
and programs on the customer´s PC.
The customer has to enable this “Disruptive Mode” feature by confirming YES, before a GE Service FE
can access the customer´s PC remotely.
Figure 7-7 Disruptive Mode Notification
NOTE: Only GE Service personal has access to this feature. A password is required.
All actions and changes should be documented.
Figure 7-8 Disruptive Mode Utility - Disabled
7-10 Section 7-5 - Virtual Console Observation

Section 7-5 Virtual Console Observation (cont’d)

1.) The customer has to enable this “Disruptive Mode” feature by confirming YES.
NOTE: If the customer has not enabled “Disruptive Mode”, a warning message is displayed.
Figure 7-9 Virtual Console Observation “ Warning”
2.) After “Disruptive Mode” is enabled by the customer, “Virtual Console Observation” can be activated
by selecting the VCO Tool under the Scanner Utilities folder and then click on the START button.
Figure 7-10 Virtual Console Observation “Activation”
3.) If “Virtual Console Observation” has been activated successfully, the following display is shown to
the customer and the operator:
Figure 7-11 Virtual Console Observation “Stop”
4.) To terminate “Virtual Console Observation” click on the STOP button.

7-5-2 Use of “Virtual Console Observation”

After “Virtual Console Observation” is established (see prior section), the PC which should be observed,
can be accessed through any browser, i.e. “Netscape Navigator” or “MS Internet Explorer”.
You have to use an open connection or to connect to the customer´s PC by entering his TCP/IP address
followed by the port number 5800.
For Example:
If the customer has the IP address 1.2.3.4 enter the following string:
http://1.2.3.4:5800/
If the location has been found in the net, the following dialog appears:
Enter the password: IlinQ01 (Capitol "I" [eye] lowercase "l" [ell] i - n - Q - 0 - 1)
Figure 7-12 VNC Authentication
Within the browser the Service technician can operate on the customer´s PC using the mouse and the
keyboard.
NOTE: To reduce the transmission time the colors are reduced.
Figure 7-13 Virtual Console Observation is running
7-12 Section 7-5 - Virtual Console Observation

Section 7-6
Common Diagnostics
As described in Chapter 5: Section 5-15 "Service Home Page" on page 5-66, the service platform uses
a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
A service dongle (part number 066E0703) is required to access areas proprietary to GE.
“Common Diagnostics” is the main category under the “GEMS Service Home Page” heading of
Diagnostics.
Figure 7-14 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their
respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.
Figure 7-14 GEMS Ultrasound Service Home Page - Common Diagnostics
7-6-1 Utilities
Provides two selections:
7-6-1-1 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting. If you are accessing through InSite,
this can only be enabled with the customer/operator confirmation.
7-6-1-2 System Shutdown

Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System.
Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.
After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel
the request.

7-6-2 PC Diagnostics (Non-Interactive Tests)
7-6-2-1 CPU Tests

• CPU Test (All) - This diagnostic performs a battery of tests on your CPU to ensure it is working
properly. The following tests are a complete list of the tests performed on the PC's CPU.
• CPU: Registers - The CPU registers are tested using the default test patterns defined above. On
32 bit CPUs, the extended registers are also checked. If errors are detected, the failed registers are
listed.
• CPU: Arithimetics - Tests the proper function of arithmetic commands ADC, ADD, DEC, DIV, IDIV,
IMUL, INC, MUL, SBB and SUB with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed
commands and operands are listed.
• CPU: String Operations - Tests the proper operation of string commands LODS, MOVS, SCAS
and STOS with 8, 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and
operands are listed.
• CPU: Logical Operations - Tests the proper operation of logical operations AND, NOT, OR and
XOR with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed operands are listed.
• CPU: Math Registers - Tests coprocessor register stack, pointers and commands FLDLZ, FLDPI,
FLDLN2, FLDLG2, FLDL2T, FLDL2E and FLD1. If errors are detected, the failed steps and
commands are listed.
• CPU: Math Commands - Tests coprocessor commands FBLD/FBSTP, FLD/FST, FXCH, FCOM,
FICOM, FTST, FXAM and FUCOM. If errors are detected, the failed instructions are listed.
• CPU: Math Arithimetics -
• CPU: Transcendental - Tests coprocessor transcendental commands F2XM1, FPATAN, FPTAN,
FYL2X, FYL2XP1, FCOS, FSIN and FSINCOS. If errors are detected, the failed commands are
listed.
• CPU: MMX Arithmetic - Tests MMX commands PADD, PSUB, PMUL and PMADD. If errors are
detected, the failed commands are listed.
• CPU: MMX Logical - Tests MMX commands PAND, PANDN, POR and PXOR. If errors are
detected, the failed commands are listed.
• CPU: MMX Shift - Tests MMX commands PSLL and PSRL. If errors are detected, the failed
commands are listed.
• CPU: MMX Data Transfer - Tests MMX commands MOVD and MOVQ. If errors are detected, the
failed commands are listed.
• CPU: MMX Misc. - Tests MMX commands PCMPEQ, PCMPGT, PACKSS, PACKUS, PUNPCK
and PUNPCK. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed.
7-14 Section 7-6 - Common Diagnostics

7-6-2-2 Hard Drive Tests

• Hard Drive Test (All) - The Hard Drive test examines your hard disk drive using a series of tests
to ensure that your drive can perform its functions.
The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive
mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked.
NOTE: The hard drive test can take over ten minutes.
• Hard Drive: Linear Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one
track at a time.
• Hard Drive: Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times.
• Hard Drive: Funnel Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved in a funnel fashion, i.e., from the first
track on the drive to the last, then to the second track, then to the second to last track, then to the
third track, and so on.
• Hard Drive: Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive.
7-6-2-2-1 S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status - Reporting tool

S.M.A.R.T. (Self Monitoring And Reporting Tech) is a piece of software, which is present on most
modern hard disks that continuously gathers data about the hard disk´s performance and
operations, such as hour meter, temperature, read/write failures, etc.
The manufacturer of the harddisk limits these measurements to certain thresholds. When these
thresholds are met (e.g., due to old age or excessively high temperatures), the S.M.A.R.T. software
concludes that the harddisk is very likely to fail within the next 24 hours. On Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV, we retrieve S.M.A.R.T. data and present a warning if failure is indicated.
• Status: - Retreives S.M.A.R.T. data from the hard disk.

The top of the page shows the most important things, the rest is for reference / R&D.
Figure 7-15 S.M.A.R.T. - HDD Status
• Start Long Selftest: - wait 2 minutes for test to complete

Result and status can be checked by selecting Status.
• Start Short Selftest: - wait 37 minutes for test to complete
Result and status can be checked by selecting Status.
• Stop Selftest: - aborts any running self test

7-6-2-3 Memory Tests

• Memory Test (All) - Eighteen test patterns are used to test memory locations. If errors are
detected, the address of the block the error was detected in is shown. During testing, these
diagnostics will also look out for parity errors and other exceptions. These will be added to the Test
Log as errors if encountered.
• Memory: Pattern Test - PC-Doctor uses several test patterns to test as much memory as possible.
• Memory: Parity Test - This test checks for parity errors on the memory bus during intensive string
transfer operations. If an error is detected, the address of the failed block is displayed.
7-6-2-4 CD/DVD Drive Test

• DVD/CD-ROM Test (All) - The CD-ROM/DVD test examines the CD-ROM/DVD drive to make sure
it is working properly. You may use either a data CD-ROM disk or a DVD disk for these tests.
You cannot use an audio CD, such as a regular commercial music CD, with this test.
NOTE: The PC is sometimes slow in recognizing a newly inserted CD-ROM/DVD disk.

It is best to wait a few seconds after inserting a disk into the drive before you run any tests.
There are two types of CD-ROM/DVD tests:

1.) Seek Tests: Ensures the drive can access all locations on a disk, and
2.) Read Tests: Ensures the drive can read all the data.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk
in a linear fashion, starting from the first to the last.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Random Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD
disk randomly.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Funnel Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM or DVD disk
in a funnel fashion, starting from the first then moving to the last, then, at the next pass starting from
the second location then moving to the next to the last, and so on
• DVD/CD-ROM: Linear Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD in a linear fashion, starting
from the start to the end.
• DVD/CD-ROM: Random Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM or DVD randomly.
7-6-2-5 Video Test

• Video Test (All) - This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the
video memory with 18 patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see
these tests being performed on your monitor.
You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key.
The following tests are performed on your monitor:
• Video: Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one
pattern at a time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color.
• Video: Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These
tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various
sizes and colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed.
• Video: Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video
device driver and video controller.

7-6-2-6 USB Test

• USB Test (All)
• USB Configuration Test
• USB Devices Test
7-6-2-7 PCI Board Configuration Test

A bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors which connect the various components of your system.
A PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium
systems. Various tests are run on the PCI bus in order to ensure it is working up to speed.
The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can
communicate with the board.
7-6-2-8 SCSI Device Test

no SCSI Hardware used on Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
7-6-2-9 AGP Video Card Test
7-6-2-10 Network Test

7-6-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)
7-6-3-1 Keyboard Test

1.) Double-click Keyboard Test from the PC Diagnostics interactive tests menu.
2.) Click the EXECUTE button.
A keyboard layout is displayed on which you can see the keys of your keyboard.
Figure 7-16 PCDR - Keyboard Test
3.) Press each key on your keyboard once and make sure that the corresponding keys on-screen are
removed from view. If a key on-screen is not removed, that key may be damaged and you may have
to have your keyboard repaired or replaced.
4.) To reset the keyboard, click the RESET KEYS button; to exit the test, click CLOSE.
7-6-3-2 Audio Test

1.) Double-click Audio Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-17 PCDR - Audio Test
2.) To test the WAV sound reproduction click LEFT CHANNEL, RIGHT CHANNEL, or BOTH
CHANNELS to test your external speakers. You should hear a guitar chord.
3.) To test MIDI sound reproduction click the BOTH CHANNELS button under MIDI.
You should hear a few seconds of recorded music (external speakers only).
4.) Click on the BEEP button. You should hear a low "beep" from your PC.
If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the MORE INFO button in the Audio Test dialog box for
information about possible causes and solutions.

7-6-3-3 Monitor Test

Double-click Monitor Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-18 PCDR - Monitor Test
The monitor test dialog box presents you with three options:
• Combination Test - Checks the monitor for alignment, color depth, and monitor resolution.
It will put four cross-hairs in each corner, RGB (Red Green Blue) spectrum arrays and horizontal
and vertical alignment bars on the screen.
NOTE: In most cases, you will choose the Combination Test.
• Solid Color Test - The solid color test is for laptops and LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel display.
This test displays solid color screens to allow you to make sure all color pixels are operating
correctly.
• VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) Test Patterns - The VESA test patterns
checks luminance, geometry, and focus.
The VESA tests are designed for professional measurement use.

Section 7-7
How to use the Auto Tester program
1.) Press the UTILITIES key and select the SYSTEM from the menu area on the left side of the screen.
5.) Select the SERVICE page on the screen.
Start Auto Tester
7.) Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking the START button.
7-20 Section 7-7 - How to use the Auto Tester program

Section 7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program (cont’d)

The following message box apppears.
Pause
key on the
right upper corner
of the keyboard
Figure 7-20 Message Box
8.) Click OK.

9.) Press the PAUSE key on the keyboard.
10.)Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking the “Record” icon on the displayed screen.
“Record”
icon
Figure 7-21 Start Auto Tester
11.)Start scanning.
You can scan normally and everything will be recorded to the program (up to several hours.)
NOTE: It is important that you are recording the processes where the errors normally occur.
12.)Stop the program by pressing the PAUSE key on the right upper corner of the keyboard.

Section 7-7 How to use the Auto Tester program (cont’d)

The following screen will appear.
“DVD/CD Burn”
icon
Figure 7-22 Auto Tester Finished
13.)Insert an empty DVD/CD+(R)W in the Drive and select the “DVD/CD Burn” icon.
14.)Enter a Filename.
Figure 7-23 Enter a Filename
15.)After clicking OK, the following message boxes will appear.
Figure 7-24 CD Burn Process
16.)After the DVD/CD write is finished click the OK button and close the “Auto Tester” program.
7-22 Section 7-7 - How to use the Auto Tester program

Section 7-8
How to repair Databases (*.mdb)
A small database repair tool can be found on the internal Hard disk and on the System DVD (see:
Table 9-12 on page 9-16).
NOTICE The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV;
see: Figure 3-6 on page 3-7.
This \dbutil\CheckDB.exe tool opens and compacts all relevant databases on D:\ [User].
This is a last remedial action (when experiencing database problems), before overwriting the database
with empty files.
CAUTION Before starting this tool, all programs that access the databases MUST be closed!
As soon as the dongle is detected, the login window pops up. Remove the dongle.
3.) Press CTRL + SHIFT + ESC simultaneously to open the Windows Task Manager.
4.) Switch to the PROCESSES tab.
Processes tab
sort by name
select process
(e.g., UISApp.exe)
End Process button
Figure 7-25 Windows Task Manager - Processes tab
5.) Click on the “Image Name” column to sort the “Processes” by name.
6.) Select “UISApp.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
7.) Select “SonoView.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
8.) Select “Transfer.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
9.) Select “DataManager.exe” and if present, kill it with the END PROCESS button.
NOTE: Confirm warning messages with YES.

Section 7-8 How to repair Databases (*.mdb) (cont’d)

10.)After terminating all processes mentioned above, press CTRL + ESC to open windows start menu.
11.)Using the [Arrow] keys on the keyboard, select “Programms” -> “GE FIELD ENGINEER” and then
double-click the “Compact and Repair Database” application.
Figure 7-26 double-click “CheckDB.exe”
It reports on the actions it performs. This can be valuable information for the technicians.
Check that all databases (.mdb) are repaired (see:Figure 7-27).
Figure 7-27 Report repairing Databases
12.)In case of any failures, please make a screenshot (press ALT + PRTSC, open program “Paint” and
save it to D:\export), print out or write down the error message and then close the program by
pressing ENTER.
13.)Close all open windows (e.g., Windows Explorer).
14.)Restart the system (turn on and off the system).
7-24 Section 7-8 - How to repair Databases (*.mdb)

Section 7-9
How to delete the Service Database
2.) Enter the “Standard GE Revolving” password (password changes every six month) and click
ENABLE.
4.) Press the ALT and F4 key again to close the ultrasound application.
The “blue” system background appears on the screen.
5.) Press CTRL and ESC keys simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
6.) Open the Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard.
Figure 7-28 Windows Explorer
7.) Change to drive D:\Service and delete all files and the “arc” folder.
8.) Close the Windows Explorer and restart the system.

Section 7-10
Beamformer Test
7-10-1 Summation Bus Test
Discovery of short-circuits and open lines at the “Summationbus” of the 32 BF-Sub boards (CPD, CPR).
The test result is a good/bad distinction.
NOTICE This test is working with linear probes like SP6-12, RSP5 -12,...only.
Before starting the test a linear probe must be selected!
If no Linear Probe is available, it is possible to simulate a probe.
Enable “Extended Access” (see: Section 5-14-3 on page 5-64) and then press the CTRL + P keys
simultaneously until a linear probe (e.g., SP6-12) is visible in the “Probe/Program Selection” menu on
the screen.
Now the probe and the summary test can be started.
After performing the Summation Bus Test with a fictive probe, please restart the system.
At test mode an offset will be fed in to the „Summation-bus“ of the beamformer, which makes it possible
to test the function of the data lines from the first CPD Sub-board to the end of the „Summenbus“ on the
CRS-board.
7-10-1-1 Preparations for Summation Bus Test

4.) Start a linear probe, press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item and then the SERVICE page.
5.) In the displayed window, select the SERVICE TOOLS button.
The “Service Tools” window appears on the screen; see: Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 Service Tools
6.) To start the Beamformer-Test click the HARDWARE TEST... button in the “Service Tools” window.
7-26 Section 7-10 - Beamformer Test

7-10-1-1 Preparations for Summation Bus Test (cont’d)

The “Hardware Test Dialog” appears on the screen; see: Figure 7-30.
BF Test
Figure 7-30 Hardware Test Dialog
Select the BF TEST button. The “Beamformer Test” Dialog appears.
Summenbus Test field

Arrow buttons
Test Start
Figure 7-31 Beamformer Test
In the "Summenbus Test" field 5 different tests can be selected using the two ARROW buttons( < , > ).
The offset is produced on the CRS board, fed in via pins B10, B11, B12, B13 at the plug A from the
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array).
• Testbit: 0 - no offset on the "Summationbus"

• Testbit: 1 - offset on B 13 plug A


After selecting the desired testbit press the button TEST START.
The test signal is running now over the whole "Summation-bus" to the CRS and is there evaluated.
In case of error, the pins, which are creating the problem, are shown in the Status result field.
At Test 0 there is no offset used on the "Summation-bus" (test of short-circuits).
Summation
Bus Test
Figure 7-32 Testbit 0
After completion use the right ARROW button to select Testbit 1 and start the test again.
The line on Pin B13 plug A at the CRS plate becomes high now (3.3V).


Now repeat this test with Testbit 2.
The line on Pin B12 plug A at the CRS plate becomes high (3.3V).
Repeat the test with Testbit 3.



Perform the last test with Testbit 4.
If the tests 0 to 4 are OK, it is clear that whole "Summation bus" works correct.
NOTE: If there are some failures the beamformer CPR-Board has to be changed.
Signal
CPR Summation Bus
16
CRS
Beamformer
CRS
Testbit 0-4
Figure 7-37 Block diagram Beamformer

7-10-2 Asic Select / Apertur Min
7-10-2-1 Purpose of the test

1.) Detecting of missing Elements on probe:
2.) Localizing of defective CPD Sub Boards, which are typically shown as dark Ultrasound Lines
Defective CPD's are found by means of deactivation sending and receiving element on CPD's (the
whole TX/RX sub board is switched off).
Asic Select
field
Asic Load
button
Not for use

in the field buttons for faster
selection
Apertur Min B-Mode and C-Mode sliders to

button increase Ultrasound image information
especially for Apertur Min
Figure 7-38 Beamformer Test
7-10-2-2 Check probes for missing elements

1.) Select the probe which should be tested and apply to phantom or body.
2.) Activate the APERTUR MIN button.
The System uses just 1 Tx and 1 Rx Channels per Ultrasound Line and the missing elements can easily
be detected as dark shadows (shots with very low intensity).
NOTICE Apertur Min Ultrasound images have less image information.

Ultrasound image information can be increased with the B-Mode or C-Mode sliders.

7-10-2-3 Check Transmitter/Receiver Sub boards (CPD)

1.) Use any probe and start 2D-Mode.
2.) Activate the APERTUR MIN button.
The System uses just 1 Tx and 1 Rx Channels per Ultrasound Line.
The numbers indicated in the “Asic Select” field correspond to the position numbers of the CPD's printed
on the CPR.
By means of remove/set the marks in the “Asic Select” field the 32 CPD's can be deactivated/activated.
3.) Click the ASIC LOAD button.
The CPD's will be switched off/on according to the numbers selected before.
Now you will see the deactivated Channels, as black Ultrasound Shots.
This makes possible to find out which CPD is defective.

In case there was a bad area (darker…shortcut, or brighter…open line) you can see which of the
deactivated areas =deactivated CPD's correspond to the bad area.
NOTE: The buttons SELECT ALL and DESELECT ALL can be used for faster selection.
NOTE: Use buttons BWD (backward) and FWD (forward) to select and load CPD´s one by one.
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPD
CPR
CRS
H-Data Bus
Figure 7-39 Block diagram CPD test

Section 7-11
Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan
7-11-1 Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware
If the low-level ultrasound hardware is failing, the application can not be initialized correctly.
Consequently, proper boot-up of the system is prevented.
By steadily pressing the H key on the alphanumeric keyboard during startup, the application can be
started, even if the ultrasound-hardware is broken.
The hardware is not initialized; the application simply does not get ultrasound data into process.
However, one can use SonoView to save images and to gather system information by saving a “Full
Backup”. The remote service capabilities are also present.
1.) Power On / Boot Up the system as described in Section 3-6-1 on page 3-21.
2.) As soon as the “boot” message appears on the screen (before the “Starting Windows” bar starts
running), press the H key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Keep the H key pressed during complete startup (~ 2 minutes). Following message appears:
Figure 7-40 H Key pressed during startup
3.) Click on CONTINUE. The “Probe Selection” menu appears on the monitor.
4.) Press the FREEZE key. The application starts, but does not show any Ultrasound information.
5.) Backup all images via SonoView, see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40.
6.) Save a “Full Backup” as described in Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35, or press the ALT + D key to
gather detailed information and data from the system, see: Section 7-4-2-1 on page 7-6.
7.) Press UTILITIES , choose SYSTEM, select the SYSTEM INFO page and click REBOOT MACHINE.
Figure 7-41 Reboot Machine

7-11-1 Booting without using the Utrasound Hardware (cont’d)
8.) As soon as the “boot” message appears on the screen (before the “Starting Windows” bar starts
running), press SHIFT + M1 and then ENTER on the keyboard.
The Memory Test in LINUX starts automatically. (For more details see: Section 5-18-8 on page 5-100.)
If after one cycle (about 2.5 hours), no error messages are listed, it can be assumed that the SBC
(PC-board) including power supply is working properly.
7-11-2 Minimum boards and connections necessary to boot up to certain levels
NOTICE Location of some connectors depend on the currently installed SBC-board version (Tyan or Kontron).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d) (e) (f)
CKV
CPE
“Tyan” “Kontron”
SBC-board SBC-board h
installed installed g
(i)
Figure 7-42 minimum connections to boot up to certain levels
7-34 Section 7-11 - Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan

7-11-3 Minimum Configuration to Scan

Following cables must be connected to scan; see: Figure 7-43
a.) PS2 (connector for Mouse/Keyboard)
b.) UI Disp. (connector for User Interface Display) - NOT used at Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
c.) DVI (Digital Video Cable from ADD-On DVI Output to CKV-board)
d.) VGA (Monitor)
e.) Console
f.) CPN (Primary Power Supply)
g.) Standby switch
h.) Monitor (Power Supply)
*** RS-232 Serial Interface for Console (GEU)
a
“Tyan” a
b SBC-board “Kontron”
installed SBC-board
b installed
f
c f
c
d e d e
h ***
g This connection is only necessary, if “Kontron”
SBC-board version is installed.
Other versions have internal connector cable,
directly connected from CPE flat cable
connector to SBC COM1 connector.
Figure 7-43 cable- minimum configuration
Connect mains power cable to the system and to an appropriate mains power outlet.
Connect a probe, boot up the system and start an User program.

Section 7-12
User Interface Troubleshooting
7-12-1 Control Console Test
ENABLE.
4.) Start a probe.
5.) Press the UTILITIES key, select the SYSTEM item and then choose the SERVICE page.
6.) In the displayed window, select the SERVICE TOOLS button.
The “Service Tools” window appears on the screen; see: Figure 7-44.
Console Test
Figure 7-44 Service Tools
7-36 Section 7-12 - User Interface Troubleshooting

7-12-1 Control Console Test (cont’d)
7.) Click the CONSOLE TEST button to display the “Console Test” window.
Figure 7-45 Console Test
Task Actions and expected Results
Click the LED TEST button on the screen.

LED Test Each LED will be switched on, first to 50% and then to 100%.
The CLEAR LED´S button on the screen sets all LED´s off.
Beeper Test Select the BEEPER TEST button on the screen. The User Interface (UIF) has to beep.
Turn all TGC-sliders on the control panel from left to right.

Slider Test
Slider position on the screen should change correctly.
Encoder Test Swivel the encoders (digipots) left and right and check the screen display of the encoders.
Switch the flip switch controls on the control panel up and down and check the screen
Flippers Test
display of the flippers.
Trackball Test Check the movement of the mouse cursor.
8.) Exit the Testprogramm with CLOSE and afterward select EXIT.

Section 7-13
Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions
7-13-1 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up
System doesn´t boot
YES
Is the scanner
pluged in?
Make sure the

Scanner isn´t plugged
into emergency power + These three conditions should be the first
(red outlet) YES items checked if the scanner diesn´t boot up.
+ If all three conditions are present, the scanner

Is there AC at the should be in standby mode with the ON/OFF
wall outlet? switch illuminated with amber color.
+ Follow the flow chart to determine the reason

YES the scanner doesn´t boot up.
Is the circuit
breaker on?
+ Check if the power switch above the mains plug

YES
of the Primary Power Supply isn´t switched off.
Do the fan´s NO + Check the connections to and from the Power

start run? Supply.
+ Check the power of the cable which connects

YES
the Power Supply with the GEF module.
Is the boot NO perform "No Boot Procedure

procedure visible on visible" - Troubleshooting
main monitor? see: Section 7-13-2
YES
+ check BIOS settings

Is the HDD NO + check cable connections to HDD
recognized from
+ check the noise of HDD (typical or no)
PC?
+ replace HDD
Go on to the next page
Figure 7-46 System does not boot up
7-38 Section 7-13 - Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions

7-13-1 System Does Not Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)
System doesn´t boot
Any error message YES verify the message with

at the end of the
the "Error Message Table"
boot procedure?
NO
"Connect Console"
message appears NO
(+ wait - after 5 attempts Boot up complete
"OCP Connection failed"
message appears)
YES
check cable
connections to UIF
replace UIF
(User Interface)
System is on and ready

for use
Figure 7-47 System does not boot up (cont´d)

7-13-2 No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor
Cable connections to NO
Fix the cables
monitor o.k.?
YES
VHS Output o.k.? NO Replace

(Printer) CKV-Board
YES
NO
Monitor o.k.? Replace Monitor
YES
LED´s
Voltages o.k. NO Replace
(+5V,+15V,-15V, +12V, +3,3V)
CPP-Board
see: Section 7-3
YES
Remove CKV-board
Connect Monitor YES Replace
to SBC Disp. CKV-Board
Bootprocedure
visible ?
NO
Replace
PC-board
Figure 7-48 No Boot procedure - Troubleshooting

7-13-3 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field
No Echo visible in Ultrasound field

(only noise), or Remark: “Pumping echo” effect is
strong reduction of US-penetration sometimes very difficult to recognize,
sometimes often just a very short flash
every 10-20 sec, which can be made
better visible in cine mode or M-Mode.
Please refer also to detailed instruction
“pumping echo”
(echo go on and off all “Pumping echo” effect
see: Section 7-13-3-1
10-20 sec ) or constant
loss of echo?
Replace defective CPR BF-board
Constant (one of the 32 CPD subprints activates
echo loss overcurrent protection TX power on
CPP switches off for some seconds)
Check other probes YES

ok?
NO Replace defective Probe
Probe runs normal on YES

other inputs?
Connect probe on all plug positions.

NO If problem is only on one socket
replace CPU (Probe input board)
Check Gain and TGC

NO
knobs, if respond normal
(or run console test)
ok?
Replace defective Hardkeyboard on

YES GEU user interface
Peform
HWTest- BM test
NO
a)TX discharge>0.45V/ms
b)TX Power 1(B-Mode)
ok?
If still not OK replace
Replace CPP CPR BF-board
YES
(Power Secondary Board) (TX Power shut down
circuit defective)
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
YES Replace CRS board
Replace CPR beamformer board
Figure 7-49 No Echo visible - Troubleshooting

7-13-3 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field (cont’d)
7-13-3-1 How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply
Symptom: No Ultrasound image (just noise and nearly no ultrasound information), or just "pumping echoes"
(echo only short time visible).
Figure 7-50 image is just dark - no ultrasound information
Reason: The CPP TX Power will be switched off if the CPR beamformer summation bus current exceeds a
specific value. The TX power is switched off for approx.10-20 seconds. After that time, power is
activated again. If problem still persists it will switch off again. The time between switch offs depends
on current (higher current = faster switch off). Maybe no ultrasound visible on screen, and after 10-20
seconds a short flash (maybe just some shots) is visible. This effect is difficult to see.
(see: Figure 7-51, which appears approx. all 15 seconds, the other time it is just dark like Figure 7-50)
Figure 7-51 short flash which appears approx. all 15 seconds

7-13-3-1 How to test if CPR forces the CPP board to Power off TX supply (cont’d)
If the forced US-power off problem persists can be diagnosed as follows:

1.) Start any probe and then activate the M Mode by pressing the M MODE digipot on the control panel.
2.) Activate M Mode by pressing the right or left trackball key.
3.) Rotate M MODE digipot (“Gain” -> maximum) and move all TGC slide potentiometers to the right.
4.) Switch sweep SPEED to slow (6.5 seconds shown on screen).
5.) Select minimum M Mode DEPTH.
If CPR forces a TX Power shutdown on CPP, it looks like dark M Mode information with just noise.
After approx. 10-20 seconds (after about 2-3 scrolled screens of M Mode) you should see some shots
with echoes (for a short time); see: Figure 7-52.
Figure 7-52 shots with echoes in M Mode image
This symptom is typically related to the CPR beamformer only.
Corrective Replace the CPR board.

Action:

7-13-4 Bad B-Image Quality
Bad IQ (B-Image Quality)

Noisy image, focus bad, dark
shadows along US- lines, reduced
IQ performance
Monitor adjustment ok? NO

Attention: Monitor needs
time to heat up!
Set
Monitor Brightness and contrast,
YES
eventually switch off/on to start
degaussing.

ok?
Replace defective Probe, be careful ,

NO maybe it is a bad system setting only
related to specific probe types!

other inputs?

NO If problem is only on one socket
replace CPV (Probe input board)
Check Gain and TGC NO

knobs, if respond normal
(or run console test)
ok?
Replace defective Hardkey board on

YES GEU user interface
Save customer
Backup of Application YES
settings, then load factory backup
from D:\UserSettings\
FactoryDefault\
IQ ok? It was just a “bad” user program
setting. Inform customer about and
NO
ensure acceptance of changed image
quality
Go on to the next page
Figure 7-53 Bad B-Image Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-4 Bad B-Image Quality (cont’d)
Bad IQ (B-Image Quality)

Noisy image, focus bad, dark
shadows along US- lines, reduced
IQ performance
Peform
HWTest- BM test
a)TX discharge>0.45V/ms NO
b)TX Power 1(B-Mode)
ok?

Replace CPP
YES CRS board
(Power Secondary Board)
(wrong TX ctrl of CPP)
Perform HW test - NO
BF test - Summation bus
test +Aperture min test
ok?
YES Replace CPR beamformer board
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
System is on and ready for use
Figure 7-54 Bad B-Image Quality - Troubleshooting (cont’d)
NOTICE Rating of Image Quality (IQ) problems is always difficult. Therefore it is recommended to use phantoms
which give comparable results (see also:Section 10-6 "Using a Phantom" on page 10-13).
FE´s should “know their body” if used for judgment!

7-13-5 Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-patterns
Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-

patterns, no us- echo visible, or just us-
echo in background mixed with patterns.
see: Figure 7-56
Perform HW test -
NO
test
ok?
Replace defective CPR BF-board

YES
(Summation bus problem)
Perform HW test -
NO
CRS Test - RAM Test
ok?
Replace CKV Videomanager board

YES
Figure 7-55 Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-pattern - Troubleshooting
Figure 7-56 gray-pattern in Ultrasound field

7-13-6 Noise disturbs the Image
Noise is shown in Image.
Is there any electrical YES

devices that affect the
Scanner?
NO Keep the Scanner away from those

electrical devices.
use another wallsocket
Check probes.
Figure 7-57 Noise disturbs the Image - Troubleshooting

7-13-7 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality
CFM and/or PW-Doppler

Quality bad
(Sensitivity bad, noisy CFM or
PW-Doppler, artefacts…)
NO
B-Mode ok?
Refer to B-Mode Troubleshooting tree

YES see: Section 7-13-4 and/or
Section 7-13-5

ok?

Save customer
Backup of Application
YES
settings, then load factory backup
from D:\UserSettings\
FactoryDefault\
IQ ok? It was just a “bad” user program
setting. Inform customer about and
NO ensure acceptance of changed image
quality
Peform
HWTest- BM test
NO
TX discharge>0.45V/ms
TX Pwr2 (CFM-Mode)
ok?
Replace CPP
CRS board
YES (Power Secondary Board)
(wrong TX ctrl of CPP)
Perform HW test -
NO
ok?
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-58 Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-8 Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality
Continuous Wave (CW) -

Doppler Quality bad
(Sensitivity bad, noisy,
artefacts…)
YES
Check other CW probes YES

ok?

Check Voltages NO
+ - 15V, +5V
ok?
Replace CPP
YES (Power Secondary Board)
Perform HW test -
NO
ok?
Replace CRW board (CW-Doppler)
IF STILL NOT OK
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-59 Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality - Troubleshooting

7-13-9 Unable to record Volumes (no Volume sweep)
Remark: For checks use always only

Unable to record Volumes at 3D/4D
one single Probe connected to avoid
(No Volume sweep)
interactions between probes!
Check probe contacts YES

plug in again.
Probe now ok?
Problem was just contact problem,

NO System is ready for use

other inputs?

If problem is only on one socket
NO replace CPV (Probe input board)
Try another Volume YES

probe, ok?
Replace defective Probe

NO
Peform CRS Analogtest. YES

see: Section 5-16-4-13
Error visible?
NO Replace CRS (Motor control board)
Replace CPP board

(Motor power board)
Figure 7-60 Volume drive - Troubleshooting

7-13-10 Trackball
The trackball is low sensitive!
Does the trackball move at YES

all?
NO Remove the ball from the Trackball unit,

and clean it.
Replace the trackball unit.
Figure 7-61 Trackball - Troubleshooting

7-13-11 System Does Not Power Off / Shutdown
System has been switched off
system switched off

System starts with the Primary Power (CPY
No automatically in approx. Yes
shut down procedure inside) Supply is defekt
3min.
Yes No
Check the Standby-switch and the cable.

System is down
If ok, Primary Power Supply is defekt.
Figure 7-62 Power Off / Shutdown - Troubleshooting

7-13-12 No Audio Output on Loudspeakers
No Audio Output on
Loudspeakers at
Doppler Mode
VTR OUT at
CPE-Rear panel has signal:
(Use Line OUT cable, NO
connect it from VTR OUT to any Replace CRS-board.
Notebook Line IN .)
Notebook can record
signal?
YES
Measure
Speakers resistance.
Use Multimeter to check the
YES
CPE - GEU (User Interface) 25 pin
Console cable -> should be ~ 8 Ohm YES
Replace CPE-board.
Speaker left: pin 12 to pin 13
(or pin 22 to pin 23)
Speaker right: pin 10 to pin 11
(or pin 24 to pin 25)
Impedance ok?
NO
Replace Speaker.
Check cables.
Figure 7-63 No Audio Output - Troubleshooting

7-13-13 No ECG line or ECG signal
NO ECG line possible

or
no ECG line signal
ECG hard key

responds and can be NO
activated?
(key lights up if
pressed)
Run Service page-Service tools-
console test to double check the key
YES function. If it is sure that key is
defective, replace the GEU
Hardkeyboard
Check contacts of
Patient cable on ECG Module box, NO
and ECG cable connected to GEF
box-ECG input
ok?
YES Reconnect cables (just contact

problem), or replace defective cable.
Disconnect the ECG plug NO

on rearpanel of GEF box, measure
on ECG plug +5V, +- 15V
Voltage ok?
If still problem with
Replace CPP voltages
YES (Power Secondary Board) Replace CPE Rearpanel
(solder tracks def?)
Replace ECG module located in GEM

drive box
IF STILL NOT OK
Replace CRS board
Figure 7-64 No ECG line or ECG signal - Troubleshooting

7-13-14 Monitor Troubleshooting
Fault symptom Check these items
Check the power cord is properly connected.
CPN: Check the AC output voltage fused by F3 on back of system.
No image Check the video cable is properly connected.
Check no pins of the video cable are bent.
Check if video is present on backplane.
Color is not uniform Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function.
Check for presence of magnetic sources near the monitor.

Colored streaks appear in image
Eliminate the sources and then degauss the monitor.
Adjust the picture location, picture size, picture rotation or pincushion distortion.
Screen image is not centered or sized
Some video modes do not fill the screen to the edge of the monitor.
properly
There is no single answer to solve the problem.
This phenomenon may occur on higher refresh rates (vertical frequency).
Adjust the picture contrast and picture brightness.

Some SVGA cards having an excessive video output level will cause a fuzzy picture
Picture is fuzzy at the maximum contrast level.
Turn ON the power to activate the Auto-Degauss function.
Video test patterns are not clear,

Replace the monitor as described in Section 8-14 on page 8-47.
bright, parallel or square
NOTICE The monitor should automatically degauss itself each time power is applied if you wait at least 10
seconds before you turn power back ON.
For further details refer to Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.

7-13-15 Unable to Record to VCR
Unable to record to VCR!
Is the VCR properly NO

connected?
YES Check that all signal, and power

supply cable connections to the VCR
unit are OK.
Is the VCR tape put into NO

the device?
YES Put the tape into the device and

rewind it.
Is recording unable even NO

by manual operation?
YES - Check the signal cable connections

between VCR and Internal I/O.
Video Output of System NO

o.k. ?
YES
Replace CKV
Replace VCR
Figure 7-65 VCR - Troubleshooting

7-13-16 Printer Troubleshooting
Unable to use Printer(s)!
Is the printer(s) properly NO

connected?
YES Check that all signal, and power

supply cable connections between
Printer and Scanner are OK.
Are there print papers left? NO
YES Insert the printer papers.
Is proper configuration for NO

the Print key(s) set?
Configure the Print key(s).
See next page.
Figure 7-66 Printer - Troubleshooting

7-13-16 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d)
Still unable to use the Printer(s)!
Is printing unavailable NO
even by manual
operation?
YES Check the signal cables between

GEZ and Backpanel.
Still no image on the print YES

out
NO
Printer o.k.
Replace the Printer YES

Video Output of System o.k.?
NO
Replace CKV
Figure 7-67 Printer Troubleshooting (cont’d)

7-13-17 DVD/CD-(R)W Troubleshooting (DVD/CD Drive)

1.) Insert an empty DVD/CD-(R)W into the Drive.
2.) Enter “Sonoview” by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-68.
3.) Click the “Open” icon to display the list of exams.
4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to DVD/CD-(R)W.
5.) Choose “DVD/CD” Drive.
6.) The images, which you have choosen during backup should be visible.
3. After Backup,
choose DVD/CD
1. Press Sonoview key 2. Click “Open” icon (resp. MO)
and backup exams
Figure 7-68 To backup exams to DVD/CD+(R)W resp. MO-Disk
NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LED´s and voltages of the AUX Supply
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEZ-Box;
see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4
7-13-18 MOD Troubleshooting

1.) Insert an empty MO into the Drive.
2.) Enter “Sonoview” by pressing the SONOVIEW key on the control panel; see Figure 7-68.
3.) Click the “Open” icon to display the list of exams.
4.) Select exam(s) and backup them to MO.
5.) Choose “MO” Drive.
6.) The images, which you have chosen during backup should be visible.
NOTICE In case of any problems, check status of the Diagnostic LED´s and voltages of the AUX Supply
connector (= Disk Drive Module power connector) on the backpanel of the GEZ-Box;
see: Section 7-3 "Check Points Voltages" on page 7-4
7.)
7-13-19 Network Troubleshooting
7-13-19-1 No Connection to the Network at All

1.) Check that the network cable between the scanner and the wall network is connected and well
seated in both ends. (Use a network cable that is known to be OK.)
2.) Check the cable between the network-connector on the Back Panel to the LAN-connector
on the GEZ.
3.) Connect a network cable between your Scanner and your PC. Try to ping from the Scanner to the
IP address on the PC. If OK, the hardware connection inside the Scanner is OK.
7-13-19-2 Enhanced Version

4.) Open “Network and Dial-up Connections” using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard and check if
status of the “Local Area Connection” is Enabled. (see: Figure 7-69)
NOTE: Network cable connection necessary!
Figure 7-69 Network and Dial-up Connections - Enabled
5.) Open “Command Prompt (DOS window).
Figure 7-70 Command Prompt

7-13-19-2 Enhanced Version (cont’d)

6.) Enter ipconfig to see IP Address and Subnet Mask of the system.
7.) Check if address is ok.
8.) If address is correct, make a ping to the own IP Address (e.g., ping 3.249.6.103).
enter ipconfig
check IP Address
make ping to own

IP Address
Figure 7-71 IP Address of the System
9.) If no reply, update the network driver:

a.) Select Start menu “Settings” –> “Network and Dial-up Connections”. (see Figure 7-69)
b.) Select the “Local Area Connection” and press the upper trackball key to call up ‘Properties’.
c.) Click the CONFIGURE button, select the DRIVER page and click the UPDATE DRIVER button.
Driver page
Configure
button
Update Driver
button
Figure 7-72 Local Area Connection Properties - Update Driver

7-13-19-2 Enhanced Version (cont’d)

10.)If still no reply, delete Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and install again.
CAUTION Before uninstalling, print out or write down all the informations shown in the “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page.
A.) Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click the PROPERTIES button.
B.) If “Use the following IP address” is selected, print out or write down all the informations shown in
the displayed dialog page.
print dialog page

or write down
all informations
Properties
button
Install
button Uninstall
button
Figure 7-73 call up TCP/IP Internet Protocol Properties
C.) Click the UNINSTALL button, read the displayed message box and afterwards confirm with OK.
NOTE: Restart the system, otherwise Installation of the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is impossible.
D.) Select Start menu “Settings” –> “Network and Dial-up Connections” again. (see Figure 7-69)
E.) Select the “Local Area Connection” and press the upper trackball key to call up ‘Properties’.
F.) Click the INSTALL button. In the displayed dialog box select “Protocol” and click the ADD button.
G.) Choose “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and confirm with OK.
H.) After successfully installation (will take about 30 seconds), select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and
click the PROPERTIES button.
I.) Enter all the information which you have wrote down or printed. Otherwise select “Obtain an IP
address automatically”.
J.) Confirm with OK and close all windows.

Section 7-14
Error Messages
7-14-1 To debug Error messages
Following solutions to debug error messages are listed in Table 7-4.
Table 7-3 Solutions to debug error messages

• restart the system Press the Standby switch left below the Control Panel once.
Wait at least 10 seconds, then press the Standby switch again to restart the system
• delete database open the Windows explorer, change to drive D:\ and delete the mentioned files
• remove backup Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
(delete all files in folder
d:\UserSettings) and
load it (complete)
• load backup (complete) Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
• reinstall UISAPP Section 8-2 "Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure" on page 8-4
• check secondary voltage Section 7-3-1 "How to check power" on page 7-4
• replace Hard disk (HDD) Section 8-50-5 "Hard disk - Replacement Procedure" on page 8-130
• replace CW-board Section 8-47-6 "Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board" on page 8-104
• replace CPV-board Section 8-47-9 "Replacement of CPV - Probe Connector Board" on page 8-108
• replace CPP-board Section 8-47-7 "Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board" on page 8-105
• replace CRS-board Section 8-47-3 "Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board" on page 8-101
• perform linux- Section 5-18-8 "Memory Check in LINUX" on page 5-100
memorycheck
• replace SBC (PC board) Section 8-48-3 "Replacement of the PC-Board (Single Board Computer)" on page 8-118
• contact online center Section 7-2-1 "Needed Data - in case of System crash or Errors" on page 7-3
OLC should contact R&D
Table 7-4 Error Messages
Error Messages Reason 1st Action level 2nd Action level 3rd Action level
" place for DatabaseName " is missing. NLS-database was not Reinstall the latest software
By default english is loaded. found version
1.) remove backup

3D B_RxLines exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
2.) reinstall UISAPP
1.) remove backup

3D B-O_Frames exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

3D C_RxLines exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

3D C-O_Frames exceeded! Too many RxLines restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\UserProg3D
3D ProbeApplData field count mismatch _4D.mdb
in database table
2.) load backup (complete)
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\UserProg3D
3D UserPrograms field count mismatch _4D.mdb
in database table
The probe connected is 1.) restart the system

Disconnect and reconnect 1.) check secondary voltage
a V530-probe and is not 2.) try another probe
530-Probe connected on……….. the probe. If error remains
supported by the If it works, then replace 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
don't use such a probe.
system. the probe
AcousticUnitType not supported by Acoustic Unit Type not

restart the system reinstall UISAPP
BF_Interface: found
One of the Measure-

Any One of the Interface in reinstall the latest software
DLLs is corrupt or not
MeasureInterface.DLL fails version
the correct version.
1.) delete database

invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\Application
Application setting field count mismatch Settings.mdb
in database table
1.) delete database

Application setting Version field count invalid number of tables d:\UserSettings\Application
mismatch in database Settings.mdb
1.) remove backup

Array bounds exceeded Array bounds exceeded restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
The software tries to Try another probe.

Attempt to read Probe-ID from an invalid read from an invalid 1.) check secondary voltage
restart system If it works, then replace
probe connector. (non existent) probe 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
connector the probe.
(Save 3DCine 1.) check the connection and

Sequence to DVD/CD) power cable
AVI Save function fails
DVD/CD-Writer don't 2.) restart the system and try
react,…. again
1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user- d:\UserSettings) and load
B_Enhance Out Of Range
of limit setting once again it (complete)
1.) remove backup

B_Gain Out Of Range
7-64 Section 7-14 - Error Messages

1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user-
B_Reject Out Of Range d:\UserSettings) and load
B_TxFocus - not calculated and focus data error=>

B_SHOT_PART_ON focusdata not calculated
Backup error while verifying. Checksum mismatch repeat backup
check storage destination for

Full Backup(e.g., DVD/CD
Error during writing of not empty, insufficient rights
Backup error while writing.
backup data on target Network drive, write
protection on MO or USB-
drive)
1.) remove backup

Data of user settings out press ok and save this user- d:\UserSettings) and load
BC Ensemble Out Of Range
of limit setting once again
it (complete)
remove backup (delete all

files in folder
BC lines_per_sequenz < 1 data error with CFM restart the system
d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

BC_Dynamic Out Of Range
2.)reinstall UISAPP
1.) remove backup

BC_Gain Out Of Range

files in folder
BC_Lines: BC_LineDensity out of limit data error restart the system
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

BCMC_Balance Out Of Range
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ConvertParameters failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ProcessIQEnsemblePacket failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
1.) perform linux-

bCP_ProcessIQMModePacket failed see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
1.) restart the system,

Data of user settings out press ok and save this user- 2.) remove backup
B-DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)


data error on init BM files in folder
BF: can't set BM RxApod restart the system
RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error on init CFM files in folder
BF: can't set C RxApod restart the system
RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error on init pw- files in folder
BF: can't set D RxApod restart the system
doppler RxApodisation d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
binary file not found Binary file not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
Binary path not set binary path isn't correct restart the system reinstall UISAPP

BM_Resample: overrun files in folder
data error restart the system
SampleLengthOnLineMem d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) check secondary voltage

Cannot create instance restart the system reinstall UISAPP
Disconnect and reconnect

the probe. If error remain
Not a V730Pro, Try another probe.
Cannot read a valid Probe-ID (xxx) check if programmed Probe- 1.) check secondary voltage
V730Expert or V530 If it works, then replace
from…………. ID of the probe is correct and 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
probe. the probe.
fits to the probe. Could be
hardware malfunction.
Try another probe.

Cannot write Probe-ID into EEPROM on 1.) check secondary voltage
EEprom error for service only If it works, then replace
left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write RotatingAngleCorr into 1.) check secondary voltage
EEPROM on left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write RotatingShiftCorr into 1.) check secondary voltage
EEPROM on left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

EEPROM on left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.

Try another probe.

Cannot write SNO into EEPROM on left 1.) check secondary voltage
probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

Cannot write Start Date into EEPROM on 1.) check secondary voltage
left probe connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

left probe connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Medium (Hard disk,

DVD/CD-ROM or MO- Load volume files from other
Cannot import volume data to 3D_DLL
Disk) with stored volume storage medium.
files is corrupt.
Can't create hardware configuration index

Can't create file restart the system reinstall UISAPP
file in D:\\SERVICE
check if connection of 1.) check secondary voltage

Can't detect PCI 9054 hardware error on CKV restart the system
CKV correct. 2.) replace CKV board
use a new DVD/CD+R to

Can't import session maybe the disk is closed
write data to DVD/CD
Binary file (*.hd1) not

Can't open file: …… restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found
can't open MotCtrl RS232 Serial No connection to Motor- 1.) check secondary voltage
connection Control 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
write debug data to file press button save before

Can't open: \\P a t h \CPPSettings.txt for service only
isn't possible Load.

Can't open: \\P a t h \einzels.bin for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initcpf1.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initcpf2.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \initmid.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \intenmea.tst for service only

Can't open: \\P a t h \trans2.bin for service only
Can't open:
"resampcoef.bin" or
Can't open: ……. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"resampcoef3d.bin" or
"resampcoef4d.bin"

Can't open: "trans1.bin"

or "trans2.bin" or
Can't open: ……. "trans5.bin" or restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"trans3.bin" or
"trans4.bin" or "lfifo.bin"
Can't open: "einzels.bin"

Can't open: ……. or "deintStd.bin" or restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"deintApMin%02d.bin"
replace HDD
read debug data to file 1.) restart the system Section 8-50 "Replacement
Can't open: c:\mid\trans2.bin for service only
isn't possible 2.) reinstall UISAPP of the Hard disk (HDD)" on
page 8-129
Can't open:
Can't open:
C:\V730\Distribution\Hardware\patterndat. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
"patterndat.bin"
bin
File Delete file

"c:\v730\Distribution\Ha uninstall and reinstall "c:\v730\Distribution\Hardw
can't write XilinxFiles.ini restart the system
rdware\XilinxFiles.ini" is UISAPP are\XilinxFiles.ini" and
corrupt restart the system
write progress fails or

CD write error use a new DVD/CD-R
can't start
1.) perform linux-

Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of memorycheck
see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP
m_GIP_eCineType undefined!!
1.) perform linux-

Cine2D_CtrlBlock::vSetState: value of memorycheck
m_pGIP_eR_W_Mode undefined!!
restart the system

Windows2000 system
Check connection from V730
Communication thread is dead! has some resource check VCR check secondary voltage
problems to VCR, VCR has power and
is on.
ConManager - RC_ConstructGOPs:
not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP replace SBC (PC-board)
Memory allocation failed

CPF Hardware not found CPF hardware not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
2.) replace board CRS
1.) remove backup and

CPS_InterfaceToHW::vSet_VOL_MODE -- load it (complete)
see error message restart the system
incorrect value for ColorDMA_Active

incorrect value for EndOfFrameInt

incorrect value for LongLineMemFIFO

incorrect value for LongLineMemFIFO

incorrect value for Mode_4D
1.) perform linux-

CtrlMvGrpRepresentations::isInWriteMode memorycheck
not supported for mode nr xx

CW Doppler data error

CW quant TxFreq out of range => tx frequency out of restart the system reinstall UISAPP
range

Data of user settings out Press ok and save this user- 2.) remove backup
CW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

CW_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
pencil probe + CW-Hardware

CW-hardware doesn't support hardware problem not available, restart the check secondary voltage replace CW board
system

data error "CW-prf is files in folder
CW-HW-PRF == 0 restart the system
zero" d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

data error "CW-Tx files in folder
CW-TxFrequency == 0 restart the system
frequency is zero" d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) search file

File "ConfIndexFile" is "D:\Service\Load_HW.log"
D:\\SERVICE\\ConfIndexFile is corrupt restart the system reinstall UISAPP and delete it
corrupt
2.) restart the system

2.) remove backup
Datatype misalignment Datatype misalignment restart the system (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
check storage destination for

Full Backup(e.g., DVD/CD
Backup data could not not empty, insufficient rights
Delete error
be deleted on target Network drive, write
protection on MO or USB-
drive)

Density Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DFE::Block with openInput data error restart the system d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete)
connect the service dongle,

Backup data was made enter the GE revolving
on another system with password and try again.
Different software error
different software (see: 8-9-3-7 "Restoring
version. various “Full Backup” data"
on page 8-33)
use a new DVD/CD+R for

Disc full! disk is full
writing data to DVD/CD

1.) remove backup

CreateRectRgnIndirect
Display:Rect Region fails restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
function failed it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Division by zero Division by zero restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

done is low! FPGA not loaded restart the system reinstall UISAPP
2.) replace board CRS
Backup data was made

with a software version load appropriate backup for
Downgrade error
higher than the installed installed version
version
Driver parameters are NOT set for a non-production driver

production use, ask ki\n(pci9054.sys) reinstall software. If problem
is installed on the OLC should contact R&D
persists contact online center
return value = xx system
Driver SG RAM CHECK \n(pci9054.sys) replace CPS board. If

Hardware problem or problem persists re-install
return value = xx incorrect version of OLC should contact R&D
wrong xilinx file software. If problem persists
fmv.bin or board CPS defective contact online center
Driver version mismatch (pci9054.sys)

current version= xx. wrong driver version has
reinstall software. If problem
xx needed version= xx. been installed or driver OLC should contact R&D
persists contact online center
xx copy ...distribution\\driver\\pci9054.sys update has failed.
to c:\\winnt\\system32\\drivers and restart
1.) remove backup

DSP - Gamma Corr - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - HilbertCoeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - Low Pass Coeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - SetFFT_Para - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP - SetWMF_Koeff - Load Data Timeout FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load replace CRS board
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

DSP/MSE:Hanning-Window Load Data d:\UserSettings) and load
FFT-DSP load timeout restart the system replace CRS board
Timeout it (complete)


DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
ECG_InterfaceToHW::vLookupForNewSa 1.) remove backup and

mples() allocating expanded buffer [xx] for see error message restart the system load it (complete)
TimeStamps failed!! 2.) reinstall UISAPP
Electronic user manual not installed. user Manual not Install User Manual, try it
Please install. installed again
1.) remove backup

End Bandwidth too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

End ET too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

End frequency too big Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

Enhance Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
Ensemble Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
register Data Manager by

calling
Error attaching Patient data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
Manager. Manager \datamanger\bin\datamanag
er.exe /REGSERVER and
restart the system

calling
Error attaching SonoImage data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
restart the system

calling
Error attaching Study data to Data unregistered Data C:\v730\distribution\mainsys
restart the system
1.) delete user defined tables

in the “Measure Setup” (see:
user defined tables are Chapter 18 of the Basic User
Error Getting Item Manual for Voluson® 730Pro
not compatible
/ 730ProV

can not create image try to store again, restart the

Error in CreateCineImage
cine system
Binary file (Fir_Coef.*)

Error in File: …. restart the system reinstall UISAPP
not found
TxChannel for B not

Error in Select Tx-channel for B-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for C not

Error in Select Tx-channel for C-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for CW not

Error in Select Tx-channel for CW-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
TxChannel for PW not

Error in Select Tx-channel for PW-mode restart the system reinstall UISAPP
correct
CPC hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... on CPC restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CRS board

Error no HW present ..... on CPF CPF hardware not found restart the system reinstall UISAPP
2.) replace CRS board
CPG hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... CPG restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CRS board
CPS hardware not 1.) check secondary voltage

Error no HW present ..... CPS restart the system reinstall UISAPP
found 2.) replace CKV board
1.) remove backup

Error not enough time for BC shot! data error with CFM restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
Mot-Control DSP error

Error on LoadBootMem Page: xx, Addr: xx restart the system reinstall UISAPP replace CRS board
on Load bootmemory
Check connection from US

VCR not properly
ERROR_MSG_INIT_FAILED machine to VCR, VCR has check VCR check secondary voltage
connected or turned off
power and is on.
VCR communication Check VCR cables and try

ERROR_MSG_NO_ACK check VCR check secondary voltage
error again
VCR: No cassette in Put cassette into drive of

ERROR_MSG_NO_CASSETTE check VCR check secondary voltage
drive! VCR
Check VCR cables,

ERROR_MSG_NO_RESPONSE VCR time-out error check VCR check secondary voltage
casette,... and try again
Remove cassette from VCR

VCR: Write protected
ERROR_MSG_WRITE_PROTECTED and put writable cassette into check VCR check secondary voltage
cassette!
drive of VCR.
1.) remove backup

Execute privileged d:\UserSettings) and load
Execute privileged instruction restart the system
instruction it (complete)

FallSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

Medium (Harddisk,
DVD/CD or MO-Disk) Load volume files from other
File Could not CRC Check
with stored volume files storage medium.
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File CRC Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File CRC Missing
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Data Missing
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Datalength Not Consistent
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Decompress Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Decompress method Unknown
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File End Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Execute Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Memory Missing
is corrupt.
check the registry entry

(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\
Path for Volume file in SOFTWARE\Ultrasound\So
the registry not found noView\3d\FileName).
File not Found
when you load a Volume
from Sonoview If the key doesn't exist create
the entry or reinstall the
software
restart the system, install

File not Found can't import Volume file
latest software version
Medium (Harddisk,
File Not Found
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Pos
is corrupt.

Medium (Harddisk,
File Read Error
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Type Unknown
is corrupt.
Medium (Harddisk,
File Volume size not consistent
is corrupt.
1.) remove backup

FLT: Denormal operand FLT: Denormal operand restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Divide by zero FLT: Divide by zero restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Invalid operation FLT: Invalid operation restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Stack overflow FLT: Stack overflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

FLT: Underflow FLT: Underflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

FrameUp - TempBuffer: Memory allocation memorycheck
not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP
failed
GeoDescription3D_TissueCF::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

handed over argument is not of same type, see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
dynamic cast failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

GeoDescriptionMotion Constructor: memorycheck
unknown mode Parameter handed over
GeoDescriptionMotion::operator=: handed 1.) perform linux-

over argument is not of same type, dynamic see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
cast failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
GeoDescriptionPWMode::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

1.) perform linux-

GeoDescriptionTissueCF Constructor: memorycheck
unknown mode Parameter handed over

GeoDescriptionTissueCF::operator=: 1.) perform linux-

Check the Directory -> if the

The file Worklist.dll is file is available restart the
corrupt or is not
GetProcAddress fails in WorkList.DLL machine and try again.
available in
\\v730\Distribution\Bin\ Otherwise reinstall the
software.
pencil probe + CW-Hardware

Hardware doesn't support CW-mode hardware problem not available, restart the check secondary voltage replace CW board
system
hardware error on 1.) reinstall UISAPP

[LMV/FMV] = CKV,
hardware error on....... restart the system check secondary voltage 2.) replace board
[CRW] = CRW,
other = CRS (see reason)
disconnect all connected

HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in probes and connect they
data error reinstall UISAPP
write have different ProbeAcousticUnitIDs anew, if not ok restart the
system
disconnect all connected

HardwareRelatedSoftware_Windows in probes and connect they
data error reinstall UISAPP
write have different ProbeScanFuncIDs anew, if not ok restart the
system
1.) remove backup

IBegrenzer.cpp Bshots TxMultiFocus Error in probe data => d:\UserSettings) and load
restart the system
problem Focusdata it (complete)
1.) remove backup

IBegrenzer.cpp Mshots TxMultiFocus Error in probe data => d:\UserSettings) and load
restart the system
problem Focusdata it (complete)
In 3D Full Screen
Change to another format
In the 3D Image Measure is not allowed Measurements are not
than 3D Full screen mode
allowed
This functionality is only

enabled in Debug-
incorrect VersionByte, xx of xx cycles OK versions and only used contact online center OLC should contact R&D
for testing ECG-
peripherals
One of the Measure-

Initialize function fails in Reinstall the latest software
DLLs is corrupt or not
MeasureInterface.DLL version
Try another probe.

Invalid Start Date left probe connector (A). data error for service only If it works, then replace
2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function video source can't be 1.) check secondary voltage

reboot the system reinstall UISAPP
fails changed 2.) replace CRS board
iSetVideoSource(eVideoIntern) function Restore back from the system will restart itself 1.) check secondary voltage
reinstall UISAPP
fails external video is failing by pressing OK 2.) replace CRS board

LineFilt Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

CW Doppler data error
LP_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
=> prf out of range it (complete)

M_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
of limit setting once again.
it (complete)

M_Reject Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC Ensemble Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_Balance Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_Dynamic Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_FallSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

MC_Gain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

2.) remove backup
MC_RiseSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

M-DynContrast Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
One of the Measure-

Reinstall the latest software
MeasureInterface.DLL not loaded DLLs is corrupt or not
version.

1.) perform linux-

Memory access memorycheck contact online center
Memory access violation restart the system
violation (OLC should contact R&D)
1.) perform linux-

memory allocation error not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

files in folder
missing BCMCPW_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

files in folder
missing BM_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

files in folder
missing CW_TxFocusData Probe data error restart the system
it (complete)

missing ProbeAcousticUnit - files in folder
Probe data error restart the system
wrong ProbeAcousticUnitID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

Missing ProbeAcousticUnit, files in folder
wrong ProbeAcousticUnitID. d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

missing ProbeGeneral data - files in folder
wrong ProbeID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

missing ProbeScanFunc - files in folder
wrong ProbeScanFuncID d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
remove backup (delete all 1.) check secondary voltage

No replay from Motor- files in folder
MotCtrl RS232 communication timeout restart the system 2.)replace CRS board
Control d:\Usersettings) and load
it (complete) 3.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Confirm the message by

From the volume probe pressing the OK button.
comes a reference Disconnect and reconnect 1.) check probe
position signal, this is the active probe and use it 2.) perform CRS-test replace CPP board
MotCtrl: No Referenzposition signal! missing. It could be that again. If again the message (see: Section 5-16-4-13-2 (see:
the scanhead is not in appears usually, the probe "Analog Test" on page 5-
the usual symmetrical itself has an defect, so you 81)
position should contact technical
support
1.) perform linux-

MotionColor-DSC 1st:Memory allocation memorycheck
failed
1.) perform linux-

MotionColor-DSC 2nd:Memory allocation memorycheck
failed
1.) perform linux-

Motion-DSC:Memory allocation failed not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

The MotCtrl software

will not be installed via look into the System Setup to
the V730 setup process see the current MotCtrl
MoveVolumeAxis only supported by Real
(as there are proms on version and contact service
Time-probes!
the board itself) new to get needed proms and
V730 Releases may instructions
require a newer version
The MotCtrl software

will not be installed via look into the System Setup to
the V730 setup process see the current MotCtrl
MoveVolumeAxis only supported by
(as there are proms on version and contact service
RealTime-probes (RRE) !
the board itself) new to get needed proms and
V730 Releases may instructions
require a newer version
check the connection and the

DVD/CD-Writer does Power cable - plug the cable
No CD Writer found
not react. off and on and try again.
(restart the system)
insert disk, if fails again

CDR found no disk in
No disc in drive reboot and try again (with
drive
another disk)
Try another probe.

No Probe connected on left probe 1.) check secondary voltage
data error for service only If it works, then replace
connector (A). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

connector (B). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Try another probe.

connector (C). 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
1.) remove backup

Not enough memory for d:\Usersettings) and load
data error for service only
Display_kAkustFensterTemp it (complete)
Not enough space on

select another destination to
Not enough space destination to hold the
save the Full Backup
backup data
Check the cables from the

console and restart (system
Console is not must be switched off).
OCP connection failed. replace User Interface GEU
connected or defective, Check the registry settings check secondary voltage
Press OK and please switch POWER OFF (see: Section 8-22 on page
or the registry settings for the OCPServer (HKEY_ (12V on GEZ´s rear side)
and ON again... 8-60)
are wrong. LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTE
M\Kretz\ConsoleType = AID,
RAFIcolor, or RAFI630)
The
OpenProcessToken 1.) restart the system
function can not open
OpenProcessToken failed 2.) reinstall the latest
the access token
associated with a software version
process.
1.) remove backup

Overflow Overflow restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)


Persistence Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

files in folder
Persistence coeff page index too big Data out of limit restart the system
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

pGetActualUnitBuffer failed,
see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
RepresentationManager is not initialized
To set the Volume Axis

Biopsy Position fails. plug off and on the probe and Try another probe.
Please plug off and on probe and try again (Scanner is to strong try again, plug on a different If it works, then replace
coupled, bad probe probe connector. 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
connection,..)
register ActiveXControls->
start
Please register the C550_NLS.dll unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
component. Control \OCXUnReg.bat, then start
c:\V730\Distribution\RegFile
s\OCXReg.bat and restart
start
Please re-register the user interface control unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
file. Control \OCXUnReg.bat, then start
1.) run
"c:\v730\distribution\bin\
maxmem1.exe /uninstall"
and reboot the system
boot.ini or entries in 1.) perform linux-
2.) run
PlxMemCheck ERROR registry for pci9054 restart the system memorycheck
"c:\v730\distribution\bin\
incorrect 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
maxmem1.exe /install"
and reboot the system, if
this doesn’t help :
1.) perform linux-

pNextUnitCompleted failed, memorycheck
RepresentationManager is not initialized
1.) remove backup

PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBC Ensemble d:\UserSettings) and load
Limitation out of limit it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PRF_GeneratorBoundary: BBCPW d:\UserSettings) and load
Ensemble Limitation out of limit it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Probe Scan Function Not Supplied Probe data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) Disconnect and

reconnect the probe.
The probe connected If error remain check if Try another probe.
Probe with Probe-ID xxx not 1.) check secondary voltage
isn't supported by the programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
supported……………….. 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
system. probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (A) Try another probe.

written, but this Probe-ID is not supported Probe data error for service only If it works, then replace
by the system. 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
the probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (B) Try another probe.

the probe.
Probe-ID xxx on left probe connector (C) Try another probe.

the probe.
1.) Disconnect and

The software reads reconnect the probe.
probe data from probe Try another probe.
Probe-ID valid, but Flexible-EEPROM- If error remain check if 1.) check secondary voltage
EEPROM which
Datamodel not implemented yet. programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
indicate a datamodel 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
On……….. probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
which may be used in
probe.
the future

2.) remove backup
PW_BaseLinePos Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW_BurstCalcBlock: UserProgApplication data error Application d:\UserSettings) and load
restart the system
out of range index out of range it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW_CW_FFT_FactBlock: (delete all files in folder
DSC_ScrollX_Zoom darf nicht kleiner als PW doppler data error restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
eins sein! it (complete)

2.) remove backup
Data of user settings out press ok and save this user-
PW_Dynamic Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)

PW_Reject Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) perform linux-

PWCW-DSC:Memory allocation failed not enough memory restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck

PWGain Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
Registry entry is not found for NLs NLS-database was not reinstall the latest software
databases.By default english is loaded. found version

1.) perform linux-

ReplayCtrlInterface::vReconnect failed, memorycheck
selected movie group unknown
1.) perform linux-

ReplayCtrlInterface::vRunAcquisition memorycheck
failed, selected movie group unknown
ReplayCtrlInterface::vSetForAllRepMngrs 1.) perform linux-

Params failed, selected movie group see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
unknown 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager returned NULL memorycheck
write position
RepresentationManager: 1.) perform linux-

NextChunkGenerated failed, number bytes see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
written!=UnitSize 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RepresentationManager::vCreate: 1.) perform linux-

Dimension unknown, arguments of see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
vSetReplayParams() incorrect!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager::vCreate: Nr. Dim memorycheck
0 incorrect, see vSetReplayParams() call
1.) perform linux-

1.) perform linux-

RepresentationManager::vResizeBufferLe 1.) perform linux-

ngth caused exception, replay buffer is not see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
empty!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Error while reading the

backup data. Try again or load another
Restore error
Backup data are backup.
probably damaged.

RiseSmooth Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: Storage Error, 1.) perform linux-

no dynamic memory for filter operations see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
available!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RT_4DTissueFilterBlock:: storage needed 1.) perform linux-

for one filtered volume differs from see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
available Unitsize within replay buffer!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFilter call memorycheck
failed!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::bDllLineFrameFil memorycheck
ter call failed!!

1.) perform linux-

RT_4DTissueFilterBlock::DMA Block size memorycheck
and calculated frame size differs!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock Constructor: memorycheck
Memory allocation failed
RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataS 1.) perform linux-

izeAndUpdateTables: Memory allocation see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
failed 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_ColorFlowFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQ memorycheck
DataCurve: Memory allocation failed
RT_ConnectionMngr::vAssembleRTSet: 1.) perform linux-

no RT_TissueFilterBlock found for see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
TISSUE3D Blocks 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_ECG_Block::bStart ECGInterface memorycheck
failed!!
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::RT_MColorFilterBl memorycheck
ock: Memory allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::vCheckIQDataSize memorycheck
AndUpdateBuffer: Memory allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

RT_MColorFilterBlock::vDebugDrawIQDat memorycheck
aCurve: Memory allocation failed
RT_MotionMBlock::execute caused
1.) perform linux-
exception:: Addr from DMA= xx, memorycheck
ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size=
xx, blockLength= xx, value i= xx!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) perform linux-

RT_PWorCW_Block : replay buffer size memorycheck
smaller than expected
RT_PWorCW_Block::execute caused 1.) perform linux-

exception:: Addr from DMA= xx,
ReplayBuffAddr= xx, (Line+Header)Size=
xx, blockLength= xx, line index= xx!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
RT_PWorCW_Block::execute: Error, 1.) perform linux-

length of DMA block 2 [xx] is not alligned to see error message restart the system reinstall UISAPP memorycheck
linesize!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
1.) remove backup

Start Bandwidth too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

Start ET too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)

1.) remove backup

Start frequency too small Error in probe data restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
it (complete)
attempt to supply DMA contact online center and

channel 0 with illegal supply scenario how it
StartDMA_0 incorrect mode OLC should contact R&D
parameters (software happened (sequence of
programming error) actions)
STOP: c0000218 (Registry File Failure)

Restore HDD (C:\) ; see:
The registry cannot load the hive (file) or its
Section 5-18-5-5 "Restore C:
log or alternate. hive file corrupt
from recovery partition (R:)"
It is corrupt, absent, or not writable.
on page 5-93
Beginning dump of physical memory.
1.) perform linux-

StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage
for B & CF Mode available
1.) perform linux-

StoragePool: Not sufficient replay storage memorycheck
for ECG available
1.) perform linux-

for M Mode available
1.) perform linux-

for MC or PW Mode available
System detected severe error, please call can't load UCS Interface 1.) check secondary voltage
technical support. for V730Pro 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
System detected severe error.

Some components like Touch Panel can't create UIS 1.) check secondary voltage
server may not be registered. Please Interface for V730 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
register touch panel server and restart.
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Biopsy Table field count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
mismatch in database table Settings.mdb
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Bodymark Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
count mismatch in database table Settings.mdb
1.) delete database

SystemSettings General Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Misc Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Perineal Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Peripheral Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System

1.) delete database

SystemSettings Probe Data Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Raster Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings Rectal Biopsy Table field invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
1.) delete database

SystemSettings service Table Count invalid number of fields d:\UserSettings\System
delete database
SystemSettings Text Table Count invalid number of fields
d:\UserSettings\System
mismatch in database table
Settings.mdb

The Database Corrupted, System try to files in folder
broken database
repair. d:\UserSettings) and load it
(complete)
Version update for 1.) remove backup

UserProgramm (delete all files in folder
The Database UserPrograms Corrupted database fails. restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
(load new Backup, it (complete)
reinstall the software) 2.) reinstall UISAPP
close registry, restart the

The Date format not stored properly can't write registry value
system and try again

The Handle Unregistered can't write registry value

The Registry not closed can't close registry reinstall UISAPP
Invoke “GEMS Service

Home Page”
if possible,
(see: Section 5-14-3 on
• save “Full Backup”
page 5-64), select
(see: Section 4-5-3 on page
The System detected a problem with your Diagnostics - PC
4-35) to “DVD/CD”,
harddisk. Please do not reboot or shut Diagnostics - Non- If S.M.A.R.T. HDD Status
“Network”, or “Other drive”
down the machine! HDD is about to fail Interactive Tests - Hard test result failed, replace the
(including images)
Please contact your service department as Drive Tests - SMART - hard disk (HDD)
• if not currently done, save
soon as possilbe. Start Long Selftest (wait
all images via Sonoview
about 40 minutes for test
(see: Section 4-5-6 on page
to complete). Afterwards
4-40)
check result by selecting
SMART - Status
delete database
The SystemSettings Database is
d:\UserSettings\SystemSetti
corrupted. All the data will be lost, please broken database
ngs.mdb, please load it new
load it from Backup
from backup
restart the system and try

The time format not stored properly can't write registry value
again
The UserPrograms Database is corrupted. database will be deleted,

All the data will be lost, please load it from broken database please load it new from
Backup backup

1.) restart 3D (go to 2D)

Thickness mismatch xx - GIP xx 3D VCI
this functionality is only

enabled in Debug- contact online center
Timeout, xx of xx cycles OK versions and only used
(OLC should contact R&D)
for testing ECG-
peripherals
1.) remove backup

UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() has an wrong current image format is d:\UserSettings) and load
restart the system
ImageType wrong
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

change from B to BBC (delete all files in folder
UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from d:\UserSettings) and load
mode (wrong image restart the system
eB_Wnd to wrong ImageType it (complete)
format)
1.) remove backup

change from BBC to B (delete all files in folder
UI_BBC_Wnd::vSet() will change from d:\UserSettings) and load
mode (wrong image restart the system
eBBC_Wnd to wrong ImageType it (complete)
format)
1.) remove backup

UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast Can't create MMC d:\Usersettings) and load
restart the system
to UI_MMC_Wnd* failed Window it (complete)
1.) remove backup

UI_Manager::vDestroyWnd: dynamic cast Can't create PW d:\Usersettings) and load
restart the system
to UI_PW_Wnd* failed Window it (complete)
1.) remove backup

HRS_Execute doesn't d:\Usersettings) and load
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system
correct work it (complete)
1.) remove backup

HRS_Execute doesn't d:\UserSettings) and load
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system
correct work it (complete)
for any reason the same 1.) remove backup

or any other thread (delete all files in folder
enters the execution of
UI_Manager::vHRS_Execute multiple call restart the system d:\UserSettings) and load
the acquisition software it (complete)
before the current
execution has finished 2.) reinstall UISAPP
start
unregistered ActiveX c:\v730\Distribution\RegFiles
Unable to complete the initialization! Controls, can"t load \OCXUnReg.bat,
Hardware then start
can't load
reinstall the latest software
Unable to Load NLS data. c:\v730\Distribution\
version
OCX\C550_NLS.dll
Save to Sonoview does

Unable to save... restart the system
not work

Program for DICOM Make sure that Transfer.exe

Unable to send... Transfer (Transfer.exe) is running and is listed in the
is not running Autostart folder
1.) remove backup

CW Doppler data error d:\Usersettings) and load
undefined CW ADC_Clk-Teiler restart the system
=> ADC-clk out of range it (complete)
Disconnect and reconnect

the probe.
The software reads If error remain check if Try another probe.
Unhandled Probe-EEPROM data type 1.) check secondary voltage
invalid probe data from programmed Probe-ID of the If it works, then replace
on………. 2.) replace board CRS, CPV
probe EEPROM probe is correct and fits to the the probe.
probe. Could be hardware
malfunction.
Medium (Hard disk,

Unknown Error
is corrupt.
unknown Xilinx-Version FPGA Type is unknown restart the system reinstall UISAPP check secondary voltage
DVD/CD is corrupt or
unrecordable disc in drive try again with another disk
last session failed,…

files in folder
Unsupported color mode data error restart the system
it (complete)
1.) delete database

UserPrograms B_BC Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch BBC table mdb
1.) delete database

invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
UserPrograms B_Table Count mismatch mdb
B table
1.) delete database

UserPrograms CFM_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch CFM table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms CW_Table Count mismatch mdb
CW table
1.) delete database

UserPrograms General Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch General table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms M_Table Count mismatch mdb
M table
1.) delete database

UserPrograms MCFM_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch M table mdb

1.) delete database

UserPrograms Power_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch POWER table mdb
1.) delete database

UserPrograms PW_Table Count mismatch mdb
PW table
1.) delete database

UserPrograms Tissue_Table Count invalid count of fields in d:\UserSettings\Programs.
mismatch TISSUE table mdb
there is a type mismatch 1.) perform linux-

varSetScannerSpecificData() unknown memorycheck
in the interface between restart the system reinstall UISAPP
type!
PC and MotCtrl board 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
Error while checking

backup data. Try again or load another
Verify error
Backup data are backup.
probably damaged.
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleCF_DFE: 1.) perform linux-

attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or
ECG_Draw_2D-Block from ECGViewer
Objects failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleM_DFE: 1.) perform linux-

attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or memorycheck
ECG_Draw_2D-Block or ECG-CalcHR-
Block from ECGViewer Objects failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)
ViewerConMngr::vAssembleTissueDFE :
1.) perform linux-
attempt to get ECG_Consumer_2D- or memorycheck
ECG_Draw_2D-Block from ECGViewer
Objects failed!! 2.) replace SBC (PC-board)

Volume_dB Out Of Range (delete all files in folder
it (complete)
1.) remove backup

PW Doppler data error d:\Usersettings) and load
WMF_KoefBlock: SamplePRF too big restart the system
=> prf out of range it (complete)
Check the Directory -> if the 1.) remove backup

The file Worklist.dll is file is available restart the (delete all files in folder
corrupt or is not machine and try again. d:\Usersettings) and load
WorkList.DLL not loaded
available in it (complete)
\\v730\Distribution\Bin\ Otherwise reinstall the
software. 2.) reinstall UISAPP
1.) perform linux-

XTD - pucBackScaledBImage: Memory memorycheck
allocation failed
1.) perform linux-

XTD - pucDSCBImage: Memory allocation memorycheck
failed
1.) perform linux-

XTDTrackballCtrlState::No frame to memorycheck
trackball position found, internal failure!!


Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems.
NOTICE The Manpower, time and Tools indicated in the Sub-sections include all requirements from
Preparations to Installation Procedures.
NOTE: Use the ESD-kit during replacing Boards and Prom´s.
WARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD
precautions:
1.) Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection
point located on the rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector).
2.) Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
WARNING No covers or panels should be removed from the system (high-voltage risk).
Service and repairs must only be performed by authorized personal.
Attempting do-it-yourself repairs invalidate warranty and are an infringement to
regulations and are inadmissible acc. to IEC 60601-1.
The waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal
waste and must be collected separately.
Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company for information
concerning the decommission of your equipment.

8-1 Overview 8-1
8-2 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure 8-4
8-3 User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure 8-14
8-4 Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure 8-14
8-5 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure 8-15
8-6 Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure 8-17
8-7 Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade 8-20
8-8 Replacement or Activation of Options 8-21
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1


8-9 Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System 8-22
8-10 Replacement of Covers 8-39
8-11 Guide for Probe cables - Replacement Procedure 8-43
8-12 Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES) 8-44
8-13 Replacement of the Standby Switch 8-45
8-14 Replacement of the Monitor 8-47
8-15 Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) 8-49
8-16 Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing 8-51
8-17 Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly 8-53
8-18 Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp 8-54
8-19 Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate 8-55
8-20 Replacement of Wheels 8-56
8-21 Replacement of the Foot Rest 8-59
8-22 Replacement of User Interface (GEU) 8-60
8-23 Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU 8-63
8-24 Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU) 8-64
8-25 Replacement of the Front Handle 8-68
8-26 Replacement of the Trackball 8-69
8-27 Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring 8-70
8-28 Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls 8-70
8-29 Replacement of the Probe Holder 8-70
8-30 Replacement of the Wheel control 8-71
8-31 Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard 8-72
8-32 Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s) 8-73
8-33 Replacement of the Hardkeys 8-76
8-34 Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console 8-77
8-35 Replacement of the Top Housing of the User Interface (GEU) 8-78
8-36 Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM) 8-79
8-37 Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive 8-80
8-38 Replacement of the MO-Drive 8-83
8-39 Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board 8-85
8-40 Replacement of the Fan 8-86
8-41 Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN) 8-87
8-42 Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board 8-91
8-43 Replacement of the CCF - Power Primary Board 8-92
8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview


8-44 Replacement of the Mains Power Switch and Input Connector 8-93
8-45 Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN) 8-94
8-46 Removement of the GEZ-Box 8-95
8-47 Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards 8-99
8-48 Replacement of the BackEnd Boards 8-111
8-49 Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board 8-128
8-50 Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD) 8-129
8-51 Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan) 8-138
8-52 Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (single) 8-138
8-53 Hardware check 8-140
8-54 Reassembly the System 8-141
8-55 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) 8-146
8-54 Reassembly the System 8-141
8-57 Replacement of ECG Module (MAN6) 8-152
8-58 Replacement of the Global Modem 8-153
NOTICE Following tools are required to perform the replacement of all the renewal parts.
F
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2 slotted screwdriver or blade of a knife System DVD
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, blank CD-RW or DVD+(R)W

edge cutter (small)
stubby (length ~ 30mm) blank MO-Disk (optional)
Flat wrench 7, 8, 10, 13, 14 and 17 knife Service dongle
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 scissors Electric Safety Analyzer
Socket wrench 5.5 universal pliers and tweezers key removal tool
Torx screwdriver T25x100 ESD-kit

8-1-2 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEMS policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEMS employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
Section 8-2
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure
8-2-1 Introduction
NOTICE It is possible to update the Ultrasound Application Software via the UPDATE button in the System Setup
SERVICE page; see: Section 8-2-5 on page 8-8.
There are two possibilities to update the Ultrasound Application Software:

1.) via the UPDATE button in the System Setup SERVICE page; see: Section 8-2-5 on page 8-8
2.) via Windows Explorer; see: Section 8-2-6 on page 8-11
8-2-2 Manpower
One Person, 20 min.
8-2-3 Tools
Ultrasound Multipurpose Phantom (if available)
System DVD
NOTICE The System DVD can be found on the rear cover plate, inside the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV;
8-2-4 Preparations
Before performing the Software Update/Upgrade:
A.) make sure that all system functions are working correct; see: Table 8-2
B.) check the current Software Version and installed Options
8-4 Section 8-2 - Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure

Table 8-2 System Functional Checks
Mode Task Expected Results
Connect an abdominal probe (AB or RAB), press the PROBE key, select the
“Abdomen” -Application and start the “Default” -Program.
2D Mode regular and homogenous 2D
Record a 2D image of the Phantom or the Liver.
Quality image
If there is no abdominal probe, record a 2D image of the Phantom or the Thyroid
using a small parts probe (SP6-12 or SP4-10) and corresponding program.
no disturbances in the 2D image

Receiver Use the FREQUENCY control below the Touch Panel to switch the Receiver
during changing the Receiver
Frequency Frequency range (penet./norm/resol.).
Frequency
Start the “Abdomen” -Program, adjust the M Cursor (vessel or hole of the Phantom) the M Cursor agree with Vessel
M Mode and activate the M Mode. Touch the SPEED key to change the M Mode sweep or hole of the Phantom
speed. After FREEZE, move the TRACKBALL to recall the stored sequence. Cine loop is displayed
continuous Volume Acquisition

Volume Start the Volume acquisition using a Real Time 4D probe (RAB2-5, RAB4-8P or (without any “jumps”) and
Mode RIC5-9). smooth echo shape with clear
defined image edge
Triplex Start the “Abdomen” -Program and switch on the CFM- and the PW Mode. Adjust no disturbances in the 2D/Color
Mode the Doppler Cursor and press the right trackball key to activate the Triplex-Mode. and the Doppler image

8-2-4 Preparations (cont’d)

2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu - which is displayed on the left side of the screen.
3.) Select the SYSTEM INFO page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Software/Hardware
version is installed in the unit.
currently installed
Software version
Figure 8-1 Version check
4.) Select the OPTION page on the System Setup desktop screen to see which Options are installed.
D = Demo
(Option is activated for demo and expires
on the date shown in the “Valid” column)
I = Inactive
(Option is not activated)
P = Permanent
(Option is permanently activated [purchased])
Figure 8-2 Option page (e.g. V730 Pro)
NOTICE Please print out the OPTION page or write down all the option codes which are shown in the “Key” fields!


5.) Select the NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
a.) Click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
Figure 8-3 DICOM Configuration
NOTICE Please print out the “DICOM Configuration” dialog page or write down the DICOM designations
(AE Title, Station name, Retry Count, Retry Interval).
b.) Click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button in the NETWORK page.
NOTE:This example shows fictive numbers!
NOTICE Please print out the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog page or write down the IP settings.

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page)

1.) Insert the System DVD into the drive.
2.) Press the UTILITIES key and then select SYSTEM item from the Utilities menu.
Service Tools
button
UIS button

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (cont’d)

8.) Click on the UIS button for updating the Ultrasound Application Software.
9.) Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-7 Update UIS message
10.)A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
Figure 8-8 Install Shield Wizard - Extracting Files
11.)Click the NEXT button In the “Welcome to Kretz V730 Software Installation” window.
Figure 8-9 Welcome to ... Software Installation
The contents of the Software package are being extracted.

8-2-5 Software - Installation Procedure (via Service Page) (cont’d)

12.)Complete the Software installation with the FINISH key.
Figure 8-10 V730 Software Setup
The system restarts automatically.
13.)If desired, load the appropriate factory settings; see Section 8-3 on page 14
or the full backup; see: Section 8-4 on page 8-14.
14.)If necessary, update the Service Software (SSW) as described in Section 8-5 on page 8-15.
15.)Afterwards update the Electronic User Manual (EUM) as described in Section 8-6 on page 8-17.
16.)Perform Software and Functional checks as described in Section 8-7 on page 8-20.

8-2-6 Software - Installation Procedure (via Windows Explorer)

1.) Turn power on (let system start up completely).
4.) Remove the service dongle.
7.) Insert the System DVD into the drive.
9.) Open the Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys on the keyboard and select drive F:\.
Figure 8-11 double-click UISsetup.exe
10.)Browse for the System Software folder (inside the V730Expert folder) and double-click the
UISsetup.exe file.
A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.

8-2-6 Software - Installation Procedure (via Windows Explorer) (cont’d)

11.)Click the NEXT button In the “Welcome to Kretz V730 Software Installation” window.
Figure 8-13 Welcome to ... Software Installation
NOTE: If a “Missing Security patches” window appears, skip it with CONTINUE.
Figure 8-14 Missing Security patches
CAUTION If the “Missing Security patches” window (see: Figure 8-14) appears, it is highly recommended
to update the systems C: image using the appropriate System DVD (see: Table 9-12).
The installation of the missing patches will be done automatically during the “Restore C: from
DVD” procedure (Operation see: Installation Manual KTI105994).

8-2-6 Software - Installation Procedure (via Windows Explorer) (cont’d)

The contents of the Software package are being extracted.
12.)Follow the instructions of the “InstallShield Wizard” (confirm the messages with the NEXT key).
13.)Wait till the final setup dialog (see: Figure 8-15) appears:
Figure 8-15 V730 Software Setup
14.)Before pressing any button, press ALT and TAB simultaneously.

15.)Hold the ALT key down while pressing TAB a second time in order to move to the “Explorer” symbol
in the displayed window and then release the ALT key.
16.)Close the Windows Explorer.
17.) NOW complete the Software installation with the FINISH button. The system restarts.
NOTE: In any message boxes appear, confirm them with OK.
18.)If necessary, load the appropriate factory settings; see Section 8-3 on page 14.
19.)Afterwards update the Electronic User Manual (EUM) as described in Section 8-6 on page 8-17.
20.)Perform Software and Functional checks as described in Section 8-7 on page 8-20.

Section 8-3
User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure
8-3-1 Introduction
The User Settings contains:
• User Programs
• Auto Text
• 3D/4D Programs
8-3-2 Loading Procedure

see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)" on page 4-33
Section 8-4
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure
8-4-1 Introduction
The Full Backup contains following data:
• Patient demographic and exam data (database containing the patient data and measurements)
• SonoView image data (NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk, DVD/CD or MOD)
• User Settings (databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings.)
• Image transfer settings (DICOM settings e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Measure Setup Settings (user specific measure settings)
• V730 settings (general settings such as language, time/date format and the enabled options)
• Windows Network Settings (network settings including the computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the service platform)
• VP (additional system data)
8-4-2 Loading Procedure

see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-37
8-14 Section 8-3 - User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure
Section 8-5
Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure
8-5-1 Manpower
One Person, 10 min.
8-5-2 Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-5-3 Upgrade Procedure

1.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade CD into the drive.
SSW button
9.) Click on the SSW button for updating the Service Platform Software.

Section 8-5 Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

10.)Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button.
11.)Browse for the install.bat file and click OK.
Figure 8-17 Browse for Folder
12.)Confirm the following message with YES.
Figure 8-18 Update SSW message
13.)A new window pops up on the screen and the InstallShield starts extracting files.
14.) Press any key to continue to finish Service Platform installation procedure.
15.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT.
8-16 Section 8-5 - Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure

Section 8-6
Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure
8-6-1 Manpower
One Person, 15 min.
8-6-2 Tools
System DVD or Upgrade CD
8-6-3 Preparations
1.) Restart the system (turn off and on the system).
NOTICE The electronic user manual (EUM) must never be opened (by pressing the F1 key on the keyboard)
after last restart! Even if closed again before installing the new EUM.
2.) Insert the System DVD or Upgrade CD into the drive.

7.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
EUM button

8-6-4 EUM - Upgrade Procedure

1.) Click the EUM button. The “Update Software” dialog appears.
2.) Select the DVD/CD DRIVE button.
3.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Pro.exe file and click OK.
Figure 8-21 Browse for Folder
4.) Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update.
Figure 8-22 Update Package
The contents of this package are being extracted.
5.) Confirm the following warning message with OK to proceed the update.
Figure 8-23 confirm warning message
6.) Confirm the “Maintenance Complete” message: «InstallShield Wizard has finished performing
maintenance operations on V730 Pro User Manual» with the FINISH button.
8-18 Section 8-6 - Electronic User Manual (EUM) Upgrade Procedure

8-6-4 EUM - Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)

7.) Click the EUM button again to install the new EUM.
8.) Select the MO DRIVE or the DVD/CD DRIVE button, depending on the storage medium you use.
9.) Browse for the EUMSetup_en_V730Pro.exe file again and click OK.
10.)Confirm the following message with YES to proceed the update.
The contents of this package are being extracted.
11.)Follow the instructions of the “InstallShield Wizard” (confirm the messages with the NEXT key).
12.)After successfully installation of the Electronic User Manual, click FINISH to exit the wizard.
Figure 8-24 Complete Installation
13.)Close the SERVICE page with EXIT and close the “System Setup” with SAVE & EXIT.
14.)Restart the system (turn off and on the system).
15.)After rebooting the system, fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box
and click OK.
16.)Press the F1 key on the keyboard to invoke the electronic user manual.
17.)Press the EXIT key to exit the EUM.
NOTE: If desired, change the EUM Language as described in Section 3-8-3-3 on page 3-51.

Section 8-7
Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade
3.) Select SYSTEM INFO to see which Software/Hardware version is installed in the unit.
System Type
Serial number
Application Software
Hardware ID
Backup File Name
Date of Factory Settings
EUM Version
Serviceplatform
information
Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software/hardware.
Operating System Information

(e.g., Service Pack 4)
SLOT_CPU
(e.g., KONTRON)
Figure 8-25 System Setup - System Info page
4.) Verify the correct settings of the OPTION page; see: Figure 8-2 on page 8-6.
If necessary, customize the settings according to the printout.
5.) Check and (if necessary) match the NETWORK page settings according to the printout:
• “DICOM Configuration” dialog page; see: Figure 8-3 on page 8-7
• “Network Configuration” dialog page; see: Figure 8-4 on page 8-7
6.) Restart the system and perform basic functional checks to ensure system is functioning normally;
see: Table 8-2.
8-20 Section 8-7 - Software and Functional Checks after the Upgrade
Section 8-8
Replacement or Activation of Options
NOTICE Not all Options are available on the Voluson® 730Pro V (marked with * in this manual).
Following Options are available:

• Real Time 4D
• DICOM*
• VOCAL II*
• RT_4D_Biopsy*
• VCI* (Volume Contrast Imaging)
• SRI* (Speckle Reduction Imaging)
• STIC*
• Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging* (T.U.I.)
NOTE: Additional option fields are not yet implemented in the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
8-8-1 Operation for activating Options

2.) Select the SYSTEM item from the menu area to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
3.) Select the OPTION page where you can see which options are installed in the system.
Option page of Option page of

System type: System type:
Voluson 730Pro Voluson 730Pro V
Figure 8-26 Option page in the System Setup
• D = Demo (Option is activated for demo and expires on the date shown in the “Valid” column
• I = Inactive (Option is not activated)
• P = Permanent (Option is permanently activated [purchased] )
8-8-1-1 Operation for installing a “Demo Key” or a “Permanent Key”:

1.) Position the cursor inside the input field desired and press the right/left trackball key.
2.) If one exists, clear/edit the current key code.
3.) Enter the encrypted serial code with the keyboard and click on SUBMIT. (Code will be checked.)
4.) Click the SAVE&EXIT button.
NOTE: After activating a key code, restart (turn of and on) the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system.

Section 8-9
Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
8-9-1 Introduction
NOTICE It is possible to backup Sonoview Image data to a Mapped Network Drive (Z:\)
There are three possibilities to transfer the Patient Database and Images from System-to-System:
• using a cross-over network cable; see: Section 8-9-2 on page 8-22

• using “Full Backup” function of the System Setup BACKUP page; see: Section 8-9-3 on page 8-30
• via “Network” Drive in Sonoview; see: Section 8-9-4 on page 8-35
WARNING Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable.
For details, contact your local system administrator. If you backup Sonoview data to
this server, all the patients’ demographic data will be copied to this server!
8-9-2 Transfer of Patient Database and Images using cross-over network cable
8-9-2-1 Introduction
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system to
another system.
from ("old" System) -> to ("new" System)
Voluson® 730,
Voluson® 730 -> Voluson® 730Expert (BT´02, BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Pro (BT´02, BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´02, BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Expert (BT´02) ->
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´02, BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´02) ->
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´03, BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´04 or BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´04 or BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05)
Voluson® 730Expert (BT´05)

Voluson® 730Pro (BT´05)
8-9-2-2 Manpower
One Person, time depends on amount of stored images
8-22 Section 8-9 - Transfer of Patient Database and Images from System-to-System
8-9-2-3 Tools
• cross-over network cable (DO NOT use a hub)
• DVD/CD or MOD
8-9-2-4 Preparations
NOTICE If there were already some images stored on the “new” System, and it is desired to keep them, backup
the exams to DVD/CD or MOD using Sonoview (see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Restoring of backed-up exams (after complete transfer of databases from old to new system) gives the
opportunity to merge the old (transferred) image data on HDD with the new one on DVD/CD or MOD.
1.) Set up direct connection between both systems using a cross-over network cable.
NOTE: Do NOT use a hub.
2.) Start both systems.

3.) Enter Utilities menu, System Setup:
a.) Open the DICOM respectively NETWORK page on the System Setup desktop screen.
Click on the NETWORK CONFIG button and print out the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties" dialog page or write down the IP settings.
NOTE: The following example shows fictional numbers!
a)
write down IP settings
b)
Obtain an IP
address
automatically
b.) Only if you are sure to have noted the IP settings in the "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties"
dialog page, select "Obtain an IP address automatically" on both systems.
NOTE: You must reconfigure the TCP/IP Settings back to the originally recorded values from step a.)
after transferring the patient database and images.
4.) Close the Ultrasound Application (Ctrl + F8 and/or GE Dongle) by pressing ALT + F4.
5.) Press CTRL + ESC simultaneously and open the Windows Explorer.

8-9-2-5 Operation ("new" System)

1.) On the “new” system, select drive USER (D:) and delete the complete "Images" folder by pressing
SHIFT + DEL.
Figure 8-28 delete "Images" folder of “new” system
2.) "Confirm Folder Delete" message with YES.

3.) Using the upper trackball key, click on drive USER (D:), choose "Sharing", select "Share this folder",
Share name: D$, Comment (= empty), and then click on APPLY.
Figure 8-29 USER (D:) Properties
8-9-2-5 Operation ("new" System) (cont’d)
4.) Press the CTRL + ESC key on the “new” system simultaneously, select "Settings" –> "Control
Panel" and then double click "System".
Figure 8-30 check computer name of “new” system
5.) Invoke NETWORK IDENTIFICATION and check the "Full Computer Name" (see: Figure 8-30).
It must be the serial number as shown on the label on back of the system (e.g., A07009).
NOTE: If the Computer Name is not the same than the system´s serial number you have to change it;
see: Section 8-9-2-6 "Changing the Computer Name ("new" System)" on page 8-26.

8-9-2-6 Changing the Computer Name ("new" System)
NOTE: If the Computer name is identically with the system´s serial number, continue with
a.) Click on the PROPERTIES button.

b.) Enter the system serial number (see label on back of system) in the field Computer name.
Figure 8-31 enter System Serial number (e.g., A07009)
c.) Click the OK button.

d.) A message about non standard character will appear - confirm with YES.
e.) Close all windows.
f.) Confirm the following message box with YES to restart the system.
Figure 8-32 System Settings Change
8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System)

1.) On the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transferred, select:
"Tools" –> "Map Network Drive".
2.) In the field "Folder" enter the information of the system (= "new" system), that should receive data
and images.
Example: If the system serial number as well as computer name of the "new" system is A07009, please enter:
\\A07009\d$
enter information of "new" system
Figure 8-33 Map Network Drive on “old” system and enter information of "new" system
3.) Close the following window.
Figure 8-34 close window

8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System) (cont’d)
4.) Using the upper trackball key, click on the "Images" folder on drive USER:(D:) of the “old” system
and select Copy.
Figure 8-35 copy "Images" folder from USER (D:)
5.) Change to the mapped drive d$ on ’A07009’ (G:), press the upper trackball key and select Paste.
Figure 8-36 paste "Images" folder into drive G:
8-9-2-7 Operation ("old" System) (cont’d)
6.) After successfully copying all files, select "Tools" –> "Disconnect Network Drive".
Figure 8-37 Disconnect Network Drive
8-9-2-8 After the Transfer of the Database (from “old” to “new” system)
1.) On the “new” system, enter Utilities menu, System Setup.
- Open the DICOM respectively NETWORK page, click on the NETWORK CONFIG button,
select "Use the following IP address:" (see: Figure 8-27 on page 8-23) and enter the IP
settings according to the printout.
2.) If desired, restore the backed-up exams into the “new” system. This gives the opportunity to merge
the old (transferred) image data on HDD with the new one on CD/MOD.
CAUTION Patient data on different systems are only distinguished by the patient Identification (ID) field!
If the default auto-generated ID was not used, please make sure that the Identification (ID) is
unique on BOTH systems for the same patient, before you restore the backed-up exams!
CAUTION Old “Measure Setup” settings CANNOT be recovered!

However, measurement results are still visible.

8-9-3 Transfer of Patient Database and Images using “Full Backup” function
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system
(= “old” system) to another system (= “new” system) using the “Full Backup” function.
NOTICE Both systems MUST be capable of the “Full Backup” function.

This means that both systems have to be:
• a BT´04 or BT´05,
• a BT´03, with at least Software Version 3.1.x installed and/or
• a BT´02, with at least Software Version 2.2.x installed
NOTICE By means of the implementation of the “Full Backup” function, it is not only possible to restore Patient
Database and Sonoview Images.
Furthermore, most of the system presets and configurations can be loaded in the same manner
(see: Section 8-9-3-7 "Restoring various “Full Backup” data" on page 8-33).
Restoring “Full Backup” data to a different machine is restricted to field engineers.
CAUTION Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup
was created on is prohibited.
8-9-3-2 Manpower
8-9-3-3 Tools
• Service Dongle
• Mapped Network Drive Z:
(see: Section 3-12-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-61)
• Any other drive connected to the system (e.g., an external USB-hard disk)
NOTICE If there were already some images stored on the “new” System, and it is desired to keep them,
backup the exams to DVD/CD, MOD or mapped Network drive using Sonoview
(see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Restoring those exams (after complete transfer of databases from old to new system) gives the
opportunity to merge old (transferred) image data on HDD with new one on DVD/CD, MOD or Network.
8-9-3-5 Save “Full Backup” data (including all images) of the “old” system
1.) Save a “Full Backup” of the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transfered to:
a.) destination “Network Drive” (including all images) or
b.) destination “Other Drive” (including all images)
see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35
8-9-3-6 Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system
1.) Connect the USB “standard GE” service dongle, enter the “GE Revolving” password ENABLE.
3.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive data and images, press the UTILITIES button.
4.) In the Utilities menu, select SYSTEM SETUP to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
5.) Select the BACKUP page (see: Figure 4-22) and click the LOAD button of the “Full Backup” group.
choose destination
select backup
click Next
Figure 8-38 Full Backup Load
6.) Choose the Destination on which you have stored the “Full Backup” data of the “old” system
(e.g., Network Drive).
7.) Click on the backup to be restored (additional information is displayed in the table).
8.) Select the NEXT button. The following window will be displayed.
select data to
be restored
into
“new” system
Figure 8-39 Select Data to be restored into the “new” system
9.) Select “Patient demographic and exam data“ and “Sonoview image data” and then click on NEXT.

8-9-3-6 Load “Full Backup” data (including all images) into “new” system (cont’d)
10.)Confirm the message “Start Restore Backup now” with YES.

The following warning messages appear.
Figure 8-40 Warning messages
WARNING When clicking “YES”, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by
the data on the backup and can not be restored!
11.)If in doubt, verify that you have selected the correct “Full Backup” by clicking NO.
Otherwise confirm these warning messages with YES.
12.)Confirm the message “Restore successfully completed .....” with yes to reboot the system.
8-9-3-7 Restoring various “Full Backup” data
WARNING Always backup any data before an upgrade; see: Section 4-5-3 on page 4-35.
The “Full Backup” loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL the existing data on the
local hard drive of the system!
CAUTION There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data.
Following steps specify these restrictions:
1.) Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible.
Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was
created on is prohibited.
2.) Options can only be restored on the same Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system within the same
major software version.
3.) When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x), User Settings, Options and State of the Service Platform will not be
restored.
4.) The field engineer (service mode, activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore data to a
different machine, if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the
version in the backup.
5.) The field engineer (service mode, activated by service dongle) is allowed to restore all data;
in consideration of the rules mentioned in Table 8-3.
1.) Save a “Full Backup” of the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transfered to
as described in Section 8-9-3-5 on page 8-30.
2.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive “Full Backup” data,
perform step 1.) to step 8.) as described in Section 8-9-3-6 on page 8-31.
3.) Select data to be restored (in CONSIDERATION of Rules in Table 8-3) and then click on NEXT.
select data to
be restored
into the system
Figure 8-41 Select Data to be restored into the system
WARNING Rules and Instructions - mentioned in Table 8-3 - HAVE TO BE strictly observed!
DO NOT restore “Patient demographic and exam data (NO images!)” to a different
system. (ID´s could be mixed and images might be assigned to a not matching patient!)

8-9-3-7 Restoring various “Full Backup” data (cont’d)
Table 8-3 Full Backup Load - Rules that have to be followed

onto same onto different
Data to be restored Rules and Instruction which HAVE TO BE observed!
system system
Patient demographic yes NOT DO NOT restore these data to a different system.
and exam data recommended ID‘s could be mixed and images might be assigned to a not
(NO images!) except to a “new” matching patient.
(or follow-up) These data MUST ONLY be restored into an absolutely “virgin”
systems at same system. To ensure this, delete all patients as described in
customer/clinic Section 5-16-4-6 on page 5-74 before starting the “Full Backup
only Load” procedure!
Sonoview image data yes ONLY at same Before starting the “Full Backup Load” procedure, backup all
customer/clinic images on the target system via Sonoview
(see: Section 4-5-6 "Archiving Images" on page 4-40).
Patient Data and Sonoview images on the system will be
permanently replaced by the data on the backup and can not be
restored.
User settings yes yes User Programs and System Settings on the system will be
replaced by the data on the backup and can not be restored.
Even if accessible, these data MUST NOT be restored, when
loading a backup into a system with a software version that has
a higher major number (2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x)!
Image transfer yes only at same After loading procedure, check and match AE title and Station
settings (DICOM) customer/clinic Names in the “DICOM Configuration” window of the System
Setup NETWORK page.
Measure setup yes yes, but Even if accessible, these data MUST NOT be restored, when
settings NOT from BT´02 loading a backup from a BT´02 or BT´03 system (software
or BT´03 system version that has a major number 2.x.x or 3.x.x) into a BT´05
(2.x.x or 3.x.x) system (software version 5.x.x)!
V730 settings yes usually not Before starting the “Full Backup Load” procedure, print out the
System Setup OPTION page (Figure 8-26) of the target system.
(Option key codes will be deleted and have to be reentered after
loading procedure.)
Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
with a software version that has a higher major number
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
Windows Network yes NOT Network TCP/IP settings and Computer Name on the system will
settings recommended be replaced by data on the backup.
(These settings MUST be unique within same network.)
Serviceplatform yes never Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
VP yes not applicable Restoring is impossible, when loading a backup into a system
(2.x.x -> 3.x.x -> 4.x.x -> 5.x.x).
4.) Perform step 10.) to step 12.) as described in Section 8-9-3-6 on page 8-31.
8-9-4 Transfer of Patient Database and Images via Sonoview
This section describes how to transfer the complete patient database and images from one system
(= “old” system) to another system (= “new” system) via “Network” drive in Sonoview.
Thus in addition, the patient database and images can be shared between different systems within the
same network.
NOTICE Both systems MUST be capable to BACKUP the Sonoview exams to the mapped network drive (Z:\).
••
This means that both systems have to be:
• a BT´04 or a BT´05,
• a BT´03, with at least Software Version 3.1.x installed and/or
• a BT´02, with at least Software Version 2.2.x installed
8-9-4-2 Manpower
8-9-4-3 Tools
• Mapped Network Drive Z: (see: Section 3-12-1 "Map Network Drive" on page 3-61)
8-9-4-4 Backup all Exams of the “old” system

1.) On the system (= “old” system) from which the data should be transferred, press the SONOVIEW
key on the Control panel.
2.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and verify that “Drive HDD” is selected.
3.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list.
4.) To select all available exams, click on SELECT TO END and then on the BACKUP button.
Select
Sonoview Open to End
key button button
“Drive HDD”
all exams are selected
Backup Close
button button
Figure 8-42 Step 1.) to 5.)
5.) In the “Backup” window select the destination NET.

6.) After finishing the backup, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the backup, they will be absolutely deleted from the hard
disk of the ultrasound scanner Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV!

8-9-4-4 Backup all Exams of the “old” system (cont’d)

7.) Click on the close button and then select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen.
8.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button.
The first line in the dialog (see: Figure 8-43) displays the name (e.g., serial number A09008) of the
“Backup Folder” used for storing data on, and reading data from the network drive.
Name of the
Backup Folder on
Network Drive
Figure 8-43 Backup Folder on Network Drive
9.) Notice this name of the “old” system´s Backup Folder (e.g., A09008) and then click CANCEL.
8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system
1.) On the system (= "new" system), that should receive data and images, press the SONOVIEW key
on the Control panel.
2.) Select the SETTINGS icon on the left side of the screen.
3.) In the displayed window click on the CHANGE BACKUP FOLDER ON NETWORK DRIVE button.
Sonoview
key
Settings
icon
Change Backup Folder on Network Drive
4.) Choose folder of the “old” system (e.g., A09008) from the drop-down list and click on RENAME.
choose folder of Rename

“old” system button
e.g., A09008
Figure 8-45 Select folder of “old” system and rename it
8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system (cont’d)
NOTICE The folder which is selected to be renamed (e.g., A09008, that contains the backup data from a different
system - in this case the backup data of the “old” system), it is not copied, but simply renamed.
Thus, the same data can be shared between two systems by renaming the respective backup folders
to the serial number of the accessing system (in this case the “new” system).
5.) Close the “Settings” window with the OK button.

6.) Click on the OPEN icon on the upper left side of the screen and choose “Drive Network”.
7.) Using the TRACKBALL, and the right trackball key SET, select the first exam of the list.
8.) To select all available exams, click on the SELECT TO END button.
9.) Click on the BACKUP / RESTORE button.
Select
Open to End
button button
“Drive Network”
all exams are selected
Backup / Restore Close

button button
10.)In the “Backup / Restore” window click on the RESTORE button.
NOTICE If an exam is about to be restored that already exists on the hard disk of the “new” system, a dialog
shows the Patient Name and Patient ID and asks for the action to be taken.
Figure 8-47 Identical exam already exists

8-9-4-5 Restore all Exams (of the “old” system) to the “new” system (cont’d)
11.)Select the desired action:

The exam on the hard disk is replaced with the exam in the backup.
Yes
The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process.
Yes to all All identical exams are replaced without further notice.
The exam on the hard disk is not replaced by the exam in the backup.
No
The system will ask again if another identical exam is found during the restore process.
No to all No identical exams are replaced with the exams in the backup.
12.)After finishing the restore, select whether the selected exam(s) is to be deleted or not.
NOTICE If you select to delete the exams after finishing the restore, they will be absolutely deleted from the
network drive!
Section 8-10
Replacement of Covers
8-10-1 Rear Cover - Replacement Procedure
8-10-1-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-10-1-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 2
slotted screwdriver or blade of a knife
1.) Power Off/Shutdown the system; see: Section 3-6-2 on page 3-22.
8-10-1-4 Rear Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove both plastic caps, washers and screws on the back of the system.
2.) When the cover is loose on top, pull the rear cover out and move it upwards.
plastic caps; screws and washers
Figure 8-48 remove rear cover plate
3.) Turn the rear cover 30° and disconnect the GND ground-cable from the back of the rear cover.
GND ground cable
Figure 8-49 GND ground cable
4.) Remove the rear cover.
8-10-1-5 Rear Cover - Installation Procedure

1.) Plug in the earth cable on the rear cover.
2.) Put the rear cover on the two bolts of the trolley.
3.) Press on the rear cover on the trolley, fasten the 2 screws and cover them with the plastic caps.

8-10-2 Top Cover - Replacement Procedure
8-10-2-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour 30 min.
8-10-2-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2
Flat wrench 10
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 3
2.) Remove the monitor; see: Section 8-14-4 on page 8-47.
3.) Remove monitor mounting plate; see: Section 8-19-4 on page 8-55.
4.) Remove User Interface; see: Section 8-22-4 on page 8-60.
8-10-2-4 Top Cover of Trolley - Removal Procedure

1.) Under the top cover of trolley go in with the screwdriver 2 in one of the two gaps of the rear side and
raise the top cover that you can go with the fingers under the cover and raise it out of the clips.
Figure 8-50 remove Top Cover
8-10-2-5 Top Cover of Trolley - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the top cover from front side, push in the top cover into the trolley starting from front side to
the rear side.
2.) Install the user interface, the monitor mounting plate and the monitor;
as described in Section 8-22-5 on page 8-62.
8-40 Section 8-10 - Replacement of Covers

8-10-3 Side Panel Kit (Left and Right panel) - Replacement Procedure
8-10-3-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min. (20 min. / side panel)
8-10-3-2 Tools
Flat wrench 8 and 10
2.) Remove the rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1 on page 8-39.
8-10-3-4 Side Panel - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the ground cables (on both sides), open the cable clamps and then remomve them from
the frame; see: Figure below.
step 1.)
step 2.)
Figure 8-51 remove ground cable and rubber caps (e.g., left side panel)
2.) Remove the 8 rubber caps of the side panels (4 on each side); see: Figure above.

8-10-3-4 Side Panel - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Loose the 4 screws on the left side.

4.) Carefully lift the panel to open the cable clamps and to remove the cables.
step 3.)
loose 4 screws step 4.)
open cable clamps
and remove cables
Figure 8-52 loose 4 screws and open cable clamps (e.g., left side panel)
5.) Disconnect the Standby switch cables and then remove the left side panel.
disconnect standby switch
remove side panel

(e.g., left side panel)
Figure 8-53 disconnect standby switch and remove the left side panel
6.) Remove the Standby switch; see: Section 8-13-4 on page 8-45.
7.) Loose the 4 screws on the right side, carefully lift the panel, open the cable clamps and remove the
cables. Afterwards remove the side panel.
8-42 Section 8-10 - Replacement of Covers

8-10-3-5 Side Panel - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the Standy switch into the new left side panel.
2.) Place the side panel on the left side of the trolley, reconnect the standby switch cables and fasten
all cables with the cable clamps on the left side panel.
3.) Screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.
4.) Place the right side panel on the right side of the trolley and fasten all cables with the cable clamps
on the right side panel.
5.) Screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.
6.) Connect and screw on the ground cable.
7.) Mount the rear cover as described in Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-39.
Section 8-11
Guide for Probe cables - Replacement Procedure
8-11-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-11-2 Tools
8-11-3 Preparations
8-11-4 Guide for Probe cables - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the 4 rubber caps on the right side panel.
2.) Loose the 4 screws on the right side.
3.) Carefully lift the right panel to unscrew the 4 screws which fix the cable guide.
4 screws
Figure 8-54 remove guide for probe cables (4 screws on right side panel)
4.) Remove the cable guide.
8-11-5 Guide for Probe cables - Installation Procedure

1.) Fix the new cable guide with the 4 screws.
2.) Place the right side panel, screw on the 4 screws and then cover them with the 4 rubber caps.

Section 8-12
Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES)
8-12-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min.
8-12-2 Tools
8-12-3 Preparations
8-12-4 Connection Panel - Removal Procedure

1.) Open the cable clamps on both side panels and basket of the boards (GEZ).
2.) Unplug all cables of the connection panel from the GEZ.
3.) Loose the 4 screws and remove the connection panel (2 on each side of the GES).
Figure 8-55 loose 4 screws (2 on each side of GES)
8-12-5 Connection Panel - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new connection panel and fix it with the 4 screws.
2.) Connect all the cables.
3.) Fix all cables in the cable clamps.
4.) Mount the rear cover as described Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-39.
8-44 Section 8-12 - Replacement of the Connection Panel (GES)

Section 8-13
Replacement of the Standby Switch
8-13-1 Manpower
One person, 40 min.
8-13-2 Tools
8-13-3 Preparations
8-13-4 Standby Switch - Removal Procedure

1.) Open the cable clamps on the right side panel.
2.) Loose the switch cable on the power supply by hand.
Figure 8-56 disconnect the Standby switch cable
3.) Remove the switch with the screwdriver from the left side panel.
Figure 8-57 remove Standby switch
4.) Remove the switch and pull out the cable.

8-13-5 Standby Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Thread the cable through the hole in the side panel and connect it on the power supply.
2.) Fix the cables in the two cable clamps on the right side panel.
3.) Clip in the Standby switch.
4.) Mount the rear cover as described Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-39.
8-46 Section 8-13 - Replacement of the Standby Switch

Section 8-14
Replacement of the Monitor
8-14-1 Manpower
Two person, 20 min.
8-14-2 Tools
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 5 and 8
8-14-3 Preparations
8-14-4 Monitor - Removal Procedure

1.) Take off the monitor base cover; see: Figure 8-58.
2.) Disconnect the power cable and the signal cable.
monitor base cover

Figure 8-58 remove monitor base cover and disconnect cables
3.) Unscrew the stop screw and the 4 screws of the monitor base.
1 stop screw
Figure 8-59 unscrew the 5 screws that fix the monitor

8-14-4 Monitor - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Two persons are required to remove the monitor (incl. monitor base).
monitor +
monitor base
Figure 8-60 remove monitor + monitor base
5.) Pull off the monitor foot from the monitor pin.
6.) Carefully thread the cables through the monitor base.
pull off the monitor base
thread cables through the

hole of the monitor base
Figure 8-61 pull off monitor base
8-14-5 Monitor - Installation Procedure

1.) Thread the power cable and the signal cable through the hole of the monitor base.
2.) Mount the monitor base on the new monitor.
3.) Place the monitor (incl. monitor base) on the monitor plate.
4.) Screw on the monitor foot with the 4 screws and then fasten the stop screw.
5.) Plug in the power cable and the signal cable.
6.) Fix the monitor base cover.
7.) Perform Monitor adjustments as described in Section 6-3 "Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2.
8-48 Section 8-14 - Replacement of the Monitor

Section 8-15
Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
8-15-1 Manpower
One person, approximately 15 minutes/cover
8-15-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-15-3 Preparations
8-15-4 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Removal Procedure
• Right monitor cover; see: Section 8-15-4-1 on page 8-49
• Top monitor cover, see: Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-50
• Left monitor cover, see: Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-50
• Installation of Monitor housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover); see: Section 8-15-5 on page 8-50.
8-15-4-1 Right Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (a, b) from the right monitor cover.
2.) Use the stubby screwdriver to remove the screw (c) on the bottom.
3.) Remove the right monitor cover by pulling backwards.
b d
f c
a e
Figure 8-62 remove screws from the right monitor cover

8-15-4-2 Top Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the right monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-1 on page 8-49.
2.) Slide the top monitor cover to right side and remove it.
slide the top monitor cover

to right side and remove it
Figure 8-63 remove top monitor cover
8-15-4-3 Left Monitor Cover - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (d, e ; Figure 8-62) from the left monitor cover.
2.) Use the stubby screwdriver and unscrew the 2 screws, which fixes the cover of the task lamp.
Figure 8-64 remove cover of the task lamp
3.) Use the stubby screwdriver to remove the screw (f ; Figure 8-62) on the bottom.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover by pulling backwards.
8-15-5 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover) - Installation Procedure
1.) If necessary, mount the cover of the task lamp and fix the 2 screws (Figure 8-64).
2.) If necessary, mount the (new) left monitor cover and the fix the 3 screws (a, b, c ; Figure 8-62)
3.) If necessary, mount the (new) top monitor cover.
4.) If necessary, mount the (new) right monitor cover and fix the 3 screws (d, e, f ; Figure 8-62).
8-50 Section 8-15 - Replacement of the Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
Section 8-16
Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing
8-16-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-16-2 Tools
8-16-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the top monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-50.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-50.
8-16-4 Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 4 screws (2 on the left side and 2 on the right side of the monitor).
Figure 8-65 remove monitor front cover
2.) Pull the monitor cover to the front.

3.) Disconnect the cable from the monitor switch assembly.
disconnect cable
from monitor switch
assembly
Figure 8-66 disconnect cable from monitor switch assembly

8-16-4 Monitor Front Housing - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the monitor switch assembly.
Figure 8-67 remove monitor switch assembly
5.) If required, remove the cover of the task lamp (see: Figure 8-64 on page 8-50).
8-16-5 Monitor Front Housing - Installation Procedure

1.) If necessary, mount the cover of the task lamp and fix it with the 2 screws.
2.) Screw on the monitor switch assembly on the new front monitor cover.
3.) Reconnect the cable to the monitor switch assembly.
4.) Mount the front monitor cover.
5.) Fix the 4 screws (2 on each side of the monitor).
6.) Mount the monitor housing as described in Section 8-15-5 on page 8-50.
8-52 Section 8-16 - Replacement of the Monitor Front Housing

Section 8-17
Replacement of the Monitor Switch Assembly
8-17-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-17-2 Tools
8-17-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the top monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-2 on page 8-50.
4.) Remove the left monitor cover as described in Section 8-15-4-3 on page 8-50.
5.) Remove the front monitor cover as described in Section 8-16-4 on page 8-51.
8-17-4 Monitor Switch Assembly - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws (1 + 2) and remove the monitor switch assembly.
2
1
Figure 8-6 Monitor
Figure 8-68 remove monitor base cover and disconnect cables
8-17-5 Monitor Switch Assembly - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw on the new Monitor Switch Assembly, reconnect the cable and mount the complete monitor
housing as described in Section 8-16-5 on page 8-52.

Section 8-18
Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp
8-18-1 Manpower
One person, 15 min.
8-18-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1 and 2, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-18-3 Preparations
8-18-4 Task Lamp - Removal Procedure

1.) Use the stubby screwdriver and unscrew the 2 screws, which fixes the cover of the task lamp.
task lamp
Figure 8-69 remove cover of the task lamp
2.) Screw out the task lamp and remove it.
8-18-5 Task Lamp - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw in the new task lamp into the lamp socket.
2.) Mount the cover of the task lamp and fix it with the 2 screws.
8-54 Section 8-18 - Replacement of the Monitor Task Lamp

Section 8-19
Replacement of Monitor Mounting Plate
8-19-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-19-2 Tools
Hexagonal (Allen) wrench 3, 4, 5 and 8
8-19-3 Preparations
8-19-4 Monitor Mounting Plate - Removal Procedure

3.) Unscrew the screw of the monitor plate.
4.) Pull the cables through the hole of the monitor mounting plate, then remove the plate.
5.) On the bottom side loosen screw and washer to remove both earth cables.
Figure 8-70 remove monitor mounting plate
8-19-5 Monitor Plate - Installation Procedure

1.) Fasten both earth cables with washer and screw on the bottom side of the monitor mounting plate.
2.) Thread the monitor cables through the hole of the new monitor mounting plate.
3.) Put the monitor mounting plate in position of the flange and fasten the screw.
4.) Install the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-48.

Section 8-20
Replacement of Wheels
8-20-1 Rear Wheel - Replacement Procedure
8-20-1-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-20-1-2 Tools
Flat wrench 13
3.) If necessary, disconnect the Standby switch cable, see: Figure 8-56 on page 8-45.
4.) Remove the left/right side panel(s); see: Section 8-10-3-4 on page 8-41.
8-20-1-4 Rear wheel - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the nut of the screw from the wheel.
Figure 8-71 loose the nut
2.) Remove the wheel.
8-20-1-5 Rear wheel - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the wheel between the two steel panels and fix the wheel with screw and nut.
2.) Mount the side panel(s), screw on the screws and cover them with the rubber caps.
3.) Connect and screw on the ground cable.
4.) Mount the rear cover as described in Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-39.
8-56 Section 8-20 - Replacement of Wheels

8-20-2 Front Wheel - Replacement Procedure
8-20-2-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-20-2-2 Tools
Flat wrench 17
2.) Remove the foot rest; see: Section 8-21 on page 8-59.
8-20-2-4 Front wheel - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the lower cover (4 screws).
lower cover
Figure 8-72 remove lower cover

8-20-2-4 Front wheel - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
2.) Unscrew the nut and remove down the wheel through the hole.
Figure 8-73 front wheel removal
8-20-2-5 Front wheel - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the new wheel (from the bottom side) into the frame.
2.) Fix the wheel with the nut.
3.) Mount the lower cover and fasten it with the 4 screws.
4.) Install the foot rest as described in Section 8-21-5 on page 8-59.
8-58 Section 8-20 - Replacement of Wheels

Section 8-21
Replacement of the Foot Rest
8-21-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-21-2 Tools
8-21-3 Preparations
8-21-4 Foot rest- Removal Procedure

2.) Flap the foot rest upwards.
3.) Unscrew the 4 screws in the upper line.
4.) Remove the foot rest.
Figure 8-74 foot rest removal
8-21-5 Foot rest- Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new foot rest on the hinges.
2.) Screw on the 4 screws on the foot rest.

Section 8-22
Replacement of User Interface (GEU)
8-22-1 Manpower
8-22-2 Tools
8-22-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the monitor mounting plate; see: Section 8-19-4 on page 8-55.
8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure

1.) Unlock the transport locking lever of the control console.
locking lever
the control console
Figure 8-75 locking lever under Control Console
2.) Disconnect both earth cables which are screwed on the left and right side panel (one is connected
to GEU and the other one the monitor table).
Figure 8-76 earth cables
8-60 Section 8-22 - Replacement of User Interface (GEU)

8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the SUB-D plug from the KVR1 Y-cable and unplug the PS2 cable (keyboard, trackball)
on the rear side of the board basket (GEZ - PC-side) and pull them out through the column.
SUB-D cable
Figure 8-77 User Interface
4.) Remove the GEU inclusive the earth cable and pull it out through the column.
Figure 8-78 remove User Interface

8-22-4 User Interface - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

5.) Swap the bolt, metal plate and the earth cables to the new GEU.
bolt plastic sleeves
metal plate
earth cable
Figure 8-79 swap bolt, metal plate and earth cables
8-22-5 User Interface - Installation Procedure

1.) Lock the transport locking lever (see: Figure 8-75) of the control console.
2.) Push the new user interface on the system until the stopper at the column.
(If the UI doesn’t fit, swap the “old” plastic sleeves to the new GEU.)
3.) Thread the cables through the column and connect them.
4.) Mount the rear cover.
5.) Mount the monitor mounting plate as described in Section 8-19-5 on page 8-55.
6.) Fix the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-48.
8-62 Section 8-22 - Replacement of User Interface (GEU)

Section 8-23
Replacement of the Distance Rod on GEU
8-23-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-23-2 Tools
8-23-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the monitor mounting plate; see: Section 8-19-4 on page 8-55.
8-23-4 Distance Rod - Removal Procedure

1.) Using the flat wrench, turn the distance rod out of the GEU.
Figure 8-80 remove the distance rod on the GEU
8-23-5 Distance Rod - Installation Procedure

1.) Screw the new distance rod into the GEU.
2.) Mount the monitor mounting plate as described in Section 8-19-5 on page 8-55.
3.) Fix the monitor as described in Section 8-14-5 on page 8-48.

Section 8-24
Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
8-24-1 Manpower
One person, 4 hours
8-24-2 Tools
slotted screwdriver
Socket wrench 5.5

Flat wrench 7, 10 and 14
Torx screwdriver T25x100

Hammer and piece of wood
8-24-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the user interface; see: Section 8-22-4 on page 8-60.
8-24-4 Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing.
2.) Place the user interface backwards on a soft ground (e.g., soft foam plastic).
3.) Unscrew the 8 screws and then remove the bottom housing.
Figure 8-81 remove 8 screws on back of UI

8-64 Section 8-24 - Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
8-24-4 Bottom Housing - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Place the bottom housing backward on a soft ground. (The top housing put aside).
5.) Unscrew the 6 Torx screws (see: Figure 8-88 on page 8-68) and then remove the front handle.
6.) Unscrew the 13 screws and remove the EMC-shield.
globe joint and tension spring
EMC-shield
lock-mechanic
Figure 8-82 unscrew EMC-shield
7.) Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the retaining ring from the globe joint.
step 8.)
step 7.)
Figure 8-83 remove globe joint
8.) Remove the top globe joint from the bottom globe joint.


9.) Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the tension spring from the bolt.
Figure 8-84 remove tension spring from bolt
10.)Unscrew the 2 screws from the lock-mechanic and remove it from the bottom housing.
Figure 8-85 remove lock-mechanic
11.)Remove the bolt, bottom globe joint and tension spring from the locking lever and then remove the
locking lever from the bottom housing of the user interface.
globe joint
bolt
tension spring
Figure 8-86 remove parts and then remove locking lever
8-66 Section 8-24 - Replacement of the Bottom Housing of the User Interface (GEU)

12.)Remove the 2 plastic sleeves (with help of a piece of wood and hammer).
plastic sleeves
Figure 8-87 remove plastic sleeves
8-24-5 Bottom Housing - Installation Procedure

1.) Take the new GEU bottom housing and install the 2 plastic sleeves.
2.) Install the locking lever and then fix the bolt, the bottom globe joint and the tension spring on the
locking lever (see: Figure 8-86 on page 8-66).
3.) Mount the lock-mechanic and fix it with the 2 screws.
4.) Reattach the tension spring to the bolt.
5.) Fix the top globe joint together with the bottom globe joint on the locking lever and install the
retaining ring on the globe joint.
6.) Place the EMC-shield on the bottom housing of the GEU and fasten it with the 13 screws.
7.) Mount the upper housing on the bottom housing and fasten the 8 screws.
8.) Install the user interface, monitor plate and monitor as described in Section 8-22-5 on page 8-62.
9.) Mount the probe holder on the bottom housing.

Section 8-25
Replacement of the Front Handle
8-25-1 Manpower
One person, 2 hours 10 min.
8-25-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
Torx screwdriver T25x100
8-25-3 Preparations
6.) Remove the bottom housing; see: Section 8-29-2 on page 8-70.
8-25-4 Front Handle - Removal Procedure

1.) Place the bottom housing backward on a soft ground (e.g., soft foam plastic).
2.) Unscrew the 6 Torx screws.
3 screws
3 screws
Figure 8-88 remove the 6 screws
3.) Remove the handle.
8-25-5 Front Handle - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new handle on the bottom housing and screw on the 6 screws.
2.) Mount the upper housing on the bottom housing and fasten the eight screws.
8-68 Section 8-25 - Replacement of the Front Handle

Section 8-26
Replacement of the Trackball
8-26-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours
8-26-2 Tools
8-26-3 Preparations
8-26-4 Trackball - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the 2 cables and loose the 2 screw-nuts.
disconnect the cables and

loosen the screw-nuts
(indicated with white arrows)
Figure 8-89 disconnect cables and loose nuts
2.) Remove the trackball kit.
8-26-5 Trackball Kit - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new trackball kit, screw on the 2 screw-nuts and connect the 2 cables.

Section 8-27
Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring
8-27-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-27-2 Trackball top fixation ring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the fixation ring by turning it counterclockwise.
rotate clockwise to rotate counterclockwise

mount the fixing ring to remove the fixing ring
Figure 8-90 Trackball with top fixation ring
2.) Mount the fixation ring by turning it clockwise.
Section 8-28
Replacement of Digipots and TGC Slider controls
8-28-1 Manpower
One person, 5 min.
8-28-2 Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers
8-28-3 Cap and/or Spring - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC).
2.) Mount the cap (for Rotation digipots or for Slider-potentiometer TGC).
Section 8-29
Replacement of the Probe Holder
8-29-1 Manpower
One person, 1 min.
8-29-2 Probe Holder - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the probe holder from the bottom housing of the User Interface.
2.) Place the new probe holder on the bottom housing.
8-70 Section 8-27 - Replacement of the Trackball top fixation ring

Section 8-30
Replacement of the Wheel control
8-30-1 Manpower
8-30-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
8-30-3 Preparations
8-30-4 Wheel control - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 2 screws and disconnect the 3 cables.
disconnect the cables and

loosen the 2 screw
(indicated with white arrows)
Figure 8-91 remove wheel control
2.) Remove the Wheel control.
8-30-5 Wheel control - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new Wheel control, screw on the 2 screws and connect the 3 cables.

Section 8-31
Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard
8-31-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours.
8-31-2 Tools
8-31-3 Preparations
8-31-4 Keyboard - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the 3 cables and unscrew the 14 screws.
Figure 8-92 remove keyboard
8-31-5 Keyboard - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new keyboard, screw on the 14 screws and connect the 3 cables.
8-72 Section 8-31 - Replacement of the Alpha-numeric Keyboard

Section 8-32
Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s)
8-32-1 Manpower
8-32-2 Tools
Socket wrench 5.5
edge cutter (small)

8-32-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
8-32-4 Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the red and black loudspeaker cables.
2.) Unscrew the screw which fixes the loudspeaker cables.
3.) Disconnect all the other cables.
large board
(Part A)
small board (Part B)
Figure 8-93 disconnect all the cables

8-32-4 Hardkey Board(s) - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew the 32 screws (+ 1 screw that fixes also the ground cable) of the large board (Part A).
this screw
fixes also the
ground cable
Figure 8-94 unscrew 33 screws
5.) Remove the large board.
NOTICE Pay attention that the buttons below the boards (Part A and Part B) do not fall out of the support.
6.) Remove the Wheel control as described in Section 8-30-4 on page 8-71.
(Only if it is also necessary to replace the small board Part B.)
7.) Unscrew the 9 screws of the small board (Part B).
Figure 8-95 remove small board (Part B)
8.) Remove the small board.
8-74 Section 8-32 - Replacement of the Hardkey Board(s)

8-32-5 Hardkey Board(s) - Installation Procedure

1.) Separate the new board (into Part A and Part B) by means of an edge cutter.
2.) Place the small board (Part B) and fasten the 9 screws.
3.) Mount the Wheel control as described in Section 8-30-5 on page 8-71.
4.) Place the large board (Part A) and fasten the 32 screws (+ 1 screw that also fixes the ground cable).
5.) Connect all the cables.
6.) Connect the loudspeaker cables and fasten the screw to fix them.
8.) Mount the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.

Section 8-33
Replacement of the Hardkeys
8-33-1 Manpower
8-33-2 Tools
Socket wrench 5.5
edge cutter (small)

8-33-3 Preparations
5.) Remove the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
8.) Remove the hardkey boards (Part A + Part B) as described in Section 8-32-4 on page 8-73.
8-33-4 Hardkeys - Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the hardkeys (plastic buttons).
plastic buttons
Figure 8-96 remove hardkeys (plastic buttons)
8-33-5 Hardkeys - Installation Procedure

1.) Put the plastic buttons from the keytop kit in the correct position (see: Figure 5-29 on page 5-45).
2.) Place the small board (Part B) and fasten the 9 screws, mount the wheel control and then fasten
the large board (Part A) and fasten the 32 screws (+ 1 screw that also fixes the ground cable).
3.) Connect all the cables and the loudspeaker cables and fasten the screw to fix them.
5.) Mount the plastic parts of the encoders (digipot controls) and slider controls.
6.) Install the user interface, monitor mounting plate and the monitor; see: Section 8-22-5 on page 8-62.
8-76 Section 8-33 - Replacement of the Hardkeys

Section 8-34
Replacement of the Loudspeaker for Top Console
8-34-1 Manpower
One person, 3 hours
8-34-2 Tools
Flat wrench 10
8-34-3 Preparations
8-34-4 Loudspeaker - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the 3 screws and disconnect the black and red cable.
disconnect
the cables
loosen the
3 screws
Figure 8-97 loosen screws and disconnect cables
2.) Remove the Loudspeaker.
8-34-5 Loudspeaker - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new Loudspeaker, screw on the 3 screws and connect the 2 cables.

Section 8-35
Replacement of the Top Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
NOTICE At the time being, it is not possible to replace the Top Housing of the User Interface (GEU) in the field.
8-78 Section 8-35 - Replacement of the Top Housing of the User Interface (GEU)
Section 8-36
Replacement of Disk Drive Module (GEM)
8-36-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-36-2 Tools
Philips screwdriver 1, stubby (length ~30mm)
8-36-3 Preparations
8-36-4 Disk Drive Module - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 4 screws below the shelf.
2.) Pull the Disk Drive Module in front so that you can reach the cables on the rear
3.) Unscrew the 2 screws, remove the cable protection and then unplug the cables.
screws
step 1
step 3
Figure 8-98 disk drive module (GEM)
4.) Remove the disk drive module.
8-36-5 Disk Drive Module - Installation Procedure

1.) Move the module in the above shelf of the unit.
2.) Plug in the cables on the rear side of the disk drive module.
3.) Screw on the module with the 4 screws.

Section 8-37
Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive
8-37-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-37-2 Tools
8-37-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the disk drive module (GEM); see: Section 8-36-4 on page 8-79.
8-37-4 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side).
2.) Afterwards pull the cover of the disk drive module (GEM) forward to remove it.
screen
(or ECG-module)
Figure 8-99 unscrew screws and remove cover
NOTICE If the GEM contains the optional ECG-module (MAN6), you have to remove it before replacing
the DVD+(R)W-drive; see: Section 8-57 on page 8-152.
8-80 Section 8-37 - Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive

8-37-4 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Removal Procedure (cont’d)

3.) Disconnect the DVD+(R)W-drive cables.
disconnect
DVD+(R)W-drive
cables
Figure 8-100 disconnect DVD+(R)W cables
4.) Unscrew the 8 screws (4 on each side) and remove the DVD+(R)W-drive.
8 screws for ECG

(4 on each side)
8 screws for DVD+(R)W

(4 on each side)
4 screws for MO
(2 on each side)
Figure 8-101 If available, remove ECG prior to DVD+(R)W-drive

8-37-5 DVD+(R)W-Drive - Installation Procedure

1.) Check the Jumper settings.
DVD- Drive
Figure 8-102 DVD-Drive - Jumper setting
2.) Place the new DVD+(R)W-drive and fasten the screws.

3.) Connect the DVD+(R)W cables. (In case of ECG-module, install it.)
4.) Push back the cover of the GEM and screw on the 6 screws.
5.) Install the disk drive module (GEM) as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-79.
8-82 Section 8-37 - Replacement of the DVD+(R)W-Drive

Section 8-38
Replacement of the MO-Drive
8-38-1 Manpower
One person, 80 min.
8-38-2 Tools
8-38-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the Disk Drive Module (GEM); see: Section 8-36-4 on page 8-79.
3.) Remove the DVD+(R)W-drive; see: Section 8-37-4 on page 8-80.
8-38-4 MO-Drive - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect the MO-drive cables.
2.) Unscrew the 4 screws (2 on each side), see: Figure 8-101 on page 8-81 and remove the MO-drive.
disconnect
MO-drive cables
Figure 8-103 disconnect MO cables

8-38-5 MO-Drive - Installation Procedure

1.) Check Jumper settings.
MOD-Drive
Figure 8-104 Jumper settings on MO-drive
NOTE: If the optional MO-drive is installed subsequently, the jumper on the CRB-board has to be
removed; see: Section 8-39-5 "CRB - Jumper Setting" on page 8-85.
2.) Place the new MO-drive and fasten the screws.

3.) Connect the MO-drive cables.
4.) Install the DVD+(R)W drive as described in Section 8-37-5 on page 8-82.
5.) Install the Disk Drive Module (GEM) as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-79.
8-84 Section 8-38 - Replacement of the MO-Drive

Section 8-39Replacement of the CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board

8-39-1 Manpower
One person, 90 min.
8-39-2 Tools
8-39-3 Preparations
3.) Remove the DVD+(R)W drive; see: Section 8-37-4 on page 8-80.
4.) Remove the MO-Drive; see: Section 8-38-4 on page 8-83.
8-39-4 CRB - Replacement Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables.
2.) Unscrew the 6 screws (see: Figure 8-105) which fasten the CRB board and remove the defect
board.
jumper
(on Pos. U5)
3 screws
3 screws
Figure 8-105 CRB (USB to IDE) Converter Board
8-39-5 CRB - Jumper Setting

NOTICE GEM Box WITHOUT MO-Drive installed: The jumper on Position U5 (see: Figure 8-105) MUST be set.
GEM Box WITH MO-Drive installed: The jumper on Position U5 (see: Figure 8-105) should NOT be set.
8-39-6 CRB - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CRB-board, fasten the 6 screws and reconnect all the cables.
2.) Install the MO-drive as described in Section 8-38-5 on page 8-84.
3.) Install the DVD+(R)W drive as described in Section 8-37-5 on page 8-82.
4.) Install the Disk Drive Module (GEM) as described in Section 8-36-5 on page 8-79.

Section 8-40
Replacement of the Fan
8-40-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-40-2 Tools
8-40-3 Preparations
8-40-4 Fan - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side); see: Figure 8-99 on page 8-80.
3.) Loosen the 4 screws on the back of the GEM, remove the fan and disconnect the fan cable.
disconnect
the fan cable
Figure 8-106 loosen screws, remove fan and disconnect cable
8-40-5 Fan - Installation Procedure

1.) Place the new fan and screw on the 4 screws on back of GEM.
2.) Connect the fan cable.
3.) Cover the GEM as described in Section 8-37-5 on page 8-82.
8-86 Section 8-40 - Replacement of the Fan

Section 8-41
Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN)
8-41-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-41-2 Tools
8-41-3 Preparations
2.) Remove rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1-4 on page 8-39.
3.) Disconnect main power cable and earth cables.
earth cables
mains power cable
Figure 8-107 remove cables
4.) Disconnect the standby switch cable (see: Figure 8-56 on page 8-45).
5.) Loose the 2 screws and pull out the Power supply (CPN).
Figure 8-108 remove CPN


6.) Remove the cover of the new CPN by loosening the 3 screws on the top.
Figure 8-109 unscrew screws
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting of mains input voltage is for 230V.

Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with other voltage (110V,
130V,...
8-41-4 Voltage Modifications at CPN
8-41-4-1 Change mains input voltage

1.) Set wire bridge connections on CCF board as shown in information Table 8-4.
set wire bridge between

xxxV and SEL connector
(e.g., 230V)
SEL
110V 130V 230V 240V
Figure 8-110 CCF board connections
8-88 Section 8-41 - Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN)

8-41-4-1 Change mains input voltage (cont’d)
Table 8-4 CCF Board Information Table
CCF Connectors
Mains Voltage 110V 130V 230V 240V SEL

100V - 115V
130V
230V
240V
2.) Set “Mains-Voltage-Indicator” on the back of power supply (CPN) in accordance to input voltage
level (loosen the screw and rotate the indicator to show up the correct value).
indicator shows input

Allen screw voltage level (e.g., 230V)
Figure 8-111 Mains-Voltage-Indicator
8-41-4-2 Auxiliary voltage output for peripherals
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting for peripherals voltage output is for 230V.
Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with 115V.
1.) Choose auxiliary output for 230V (see left image), or for 115V (see right image)
Standard
230V 115V
Figure 8-112 CPY board - auxiliary output setting

8-41-4-3 Exchange Fuse (F3)
CAUTION Standard (factory) fuse protection is for 230V (= 1.6 Ampere).

If you use it with 115V (needs 3.2 Ampere), the Fuse (F3) MUST be exchanged!
1.) Using a slotted screwdriver unscrew the cover for fuse protection (F3) and exchange the fuse.
(The fuse 3.2A for 115V can be found inside the CPN, see: Figure 8-113.)
exchange fuse (F3)

fuse inside
CPN module
Part numbers of fuses, see:

Table 9-7 on page 9-10
Figure 8-113 if you use 115V: exchange fuse 1.6V (= 230V) by fuse 3.2V (= 115V)
8-41-5 Power Supply - Installation Procedure

1.) Cover the CPN and fasten the 3 screws.
2.) Put the Power supply on the slides and slide it into the trolley.
3.) Fix the power supply with the two screws.
4.) Install the earth cable on the basket and trolley; see: Figure 8-121 on page 8-97.
WARNING Please make sure that all the protective earth connections and GND-cables are
properly fixed!
5.) Install the switch cable on the power supply.
6.) Mount the rear cover; see: Section 8-10-1-5 on page 8-39.
7.) Plug in the main power cable.
8-90 Section 8-41 - Replacement of the Main Power Module (CPN)

Section 8-42
Replacement of the CPY - Power Switch Board
8-42-1 Manpower
8-42-2 Tools
8-42-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN); see: Section 8-41 on page 8-87.
2.) Remove the cover of the CPN (see: Figure 8-109 on page 8-88).
8-42-4 CPY Power Switch - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables and unscrew the 6 screws.
NOTE: Keep in mind and mark all the removed cables! Don’t exchange colored cables.
screws
Figure 8-114 disconnect all cables (mark them) and unscrew the screws
2.) Remove the CPY-Board.
8-42-5 CPY Power Switch - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPY-Board and screw on the 6 screws.
2.) Connect all the cables (don’t exchange the cables).
3.) Choose auxiliary output (see: Figure 8-112 on page 8-89)
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting for peripherals voltage output is for 230V.
Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with 115V.
4.) Install the Main Power Module (CPN) as described in Section 8-41-5 on page 8-90.

Section 8-43
Replacement of the CCF - Power Primary Board
8-43-1 Manpower
8-43-2 Tools
8-43-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN); as described in Section 8-41 on page 8-87.
8-43-4 CCF-Board - Removal Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables and unscrew the 9 screws and then remove the CCF-board.
NOTE: Keep in mind and mark all the removed cables! Don’t mix up colored cables.
screws
Figure 8-115 disconnect all cables (mark them) and unscrew the screws
8-43-5 CCF-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CCF-Board and screw on the 9 screws.
2.) Connect all the cables (don’t mix up cables).
3.) Choose mains voltage input (see: Figure 8-110 on page 8-88)
CAUTION Standard (factory) setting of mains input voltage is for 230V.

Stan
Read instruction carefully, and make proper setting if you use it with other voltage.
8-92 Section 8-43 - Replacement of the CCF - Power Primary Board

Section 8-44
Replacement of the Mains Power Switch and Input Connector
8-44-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-44-2 Tools
8-44-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN) as described in Section 8-41 on page 8-87.
8-44-4 Power Switch + Input Connector - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the two screws of the pull-out protection and disconnect the Mains Power cable.
3.) unscrew
screws
1.) loosen the 2 screws
2.) remove cables from the 4.) remove wire bridges and
connector/switch module mount them on new module
Figure 8-116 remove the Connector/Switch module
2.) Disconnect the connector/switch module (black-, white-, and earth cable).
3.) Unscrew the 2 screws and then remove the module.
4.) Remove the wire bridges from the old connector/switch module and mount them on the new one.
8-44-5 Power Switch + Input Connector - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Mains Power Switch and Input Connector module and fasten the 2 screws.
2.) Connect the 3 cables as shown in Figure 8-116.
3.) Plug in the Mains Power cable, mount the pull-out protection and fasten the 2 screws.

Section 8-45
Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
8-45-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-45-2 Tools
8-45-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the Main Power Module (CPN); see: Section 8-41 on page 8-87.
8-45-4 Fan for Primary Power Supply - Removal Procedure

1.) Loosen the 4 screws on the front of the CPN to remove the grid.
fan cable inside CPN Fan

grid which covers the fan
Figure 8-117 remove the Fan of the Main Power Module (CPN)
2.) Disconnect the fan cable inside the CPN.

3.) Remove the fan.
8-45-5 Fan for Primary Power Supply - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new fan, cover it with the grid and fasten the 4 screws.
2.) Connect the fan cable as shown in Figure 8-117.
8-94 Section 8-45 - Replacement of the KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
Section 8-46
Removement of the GEZ-Box
8-46-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min. (for removal procedure)
8-46-2 Tools
8-46-3 Preparations
2.) Remove rear cover and ground cable; see: Section 8-10-1 on page 8-39.
8-46-4 GEZ-Box - Removal Procedure

1.) Open all the cable clamps and remove the cables.
Figure 8-118 cable clamps
2.) Disconnect all the cables from the GEZ-box.
NOTE: Mark all the connectors of the rear-side as a reference for cable routing purposes at reassembly
the GEZ.

8-46-4 GEZ-Box - Removal Procedure (cont’d)
Figure 8-119 wiring of GEZ-Box
3.) Disconnect the Standby switch from the CPN (Primary Power Supply).
disconnect
Standby switch
from CPN
Figure 8-120 Standby switch on CPN
8-96 Section 8-46 - Removement of the GEZ-Box


4.) Remove the earth cable.
remove the
earth cable
power cable
in the slot
Figure 8-121 remove cables
NOTE: Make sure that the power cable is located in the predetermined slot of the power supply - CPN.
5.) Unscrew the 2 screws from the GEZ-box and pull out the GEZ-Box.
Figure 8-122 remove the GEZ-Box
NOTE: Avoid damage (snap off) and crushing the cables.
NOTE: Mark all connectors of the PC-part as a reference for cable routing purposes at reassembling the GEZ.

6.) Disconnect the cables from the PC-part.
TYAN SBC-version KONTRON SBC-version
Figure 8-123 wiring of the PC-Part
7.) Remove the GEZ-box.
8-46-5 GEZ-Box - Installation Procedure

8.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables to perform the Hardware-Upgrade check as
described in Section 8-53 "Hardware check" on page 8-140.
9.) Reassembly the system as described in Section 8-54 on page 8-141.
CAUTION After replacement procedure of the complete Main Board Chassis (GEZ), following steps have
to be performed prior to reassembling the system!
1.) Re-program the Serial Number as described in Section 8-48-1-6 "Serial Number - Re-programming
Procedure" on page 8-115.
2.) Customize the Hard disk and load the proper User Settings (Backup) for Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV; see: Section 8-50-8 "Customizing the Universal Hard disk" on page 8-137.
8-98 Section 8-46 - Removement of the GEZ-Box

Section 8-47
Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards
To perform the replacement of the different FrontEnd-components see:
• Section 8-47-3 "Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board" on page 8-101

• Section 8-47-4 "Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board" on page 8-102
• Section 8-47-5 "Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board" on page 8-103
• Section 8-47-6 "Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board" on page 8-104
• Section 8-47-7 "Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board" on page 8-105
• Section 8-47-8 "Replacement of CPK - Motherboard" on page 8-106
• Section 8-47-9 "Replacement of CPV - Probe Connector Board" on page 8-108
precautions:

8-47-1 Removal of the Frontend Cover of the GEZ-Box

1.) Loosen the 4 screws (left image) and then remove the “frontend” cover of the GEZ-box.
“Frontend” cover
“Backend” cover
Figure 8-124 remove “frontend” cover ot the GEZ-Box
8-47-2 Removal of the Backend Cover of the GEZ-Box

1.) Loosen the 7 screws (left image) and then remove the “backend” cover of the GEZ-box.
CPE connectors CKV connectors
Frontend and Backend

cover removed
Figure 8-125 remove “backend” cover of the GEZ-Box
8-100 Section 8-47 - Replacement of the FrontEnd Boards

8-47-3 Replacement of CRS - Signal Processing Board
8-47-3-1 Manpower
One person, 45 min.
8-47-3-2 Tools
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as described in Section 3-6-2 on page 3-22.
3.) Remove the GEZ-box as described in Section 8-46-4 on page 8-95.
4.) Open the GEZ-box “frontend” cover as described in Section 8-47-1 "Removal of the Frontend Cover
of the GEZ-Box" on page 8-100.
8-47-3-4 CRS - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the defect CRS-Board.
8-47-3-5 CRS - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new board.
described in Section 8-53 on page 8-140.

8-47-4 Replacement of CPZ - Cover Board
8-47-4-1 Manpower
One person, 45 min.
8-47-4-2 Tools
8-47-4-4 CPZ - Replacement Procedure

1.) Screw in the screws on the left and right side till the lid print (CPZ - cover board) lifts slightly.
2.) Remove the CPZ.
Figure 8-126 GEZ with lid print (CPZ)
8-47-4-5 CPZ - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new lid print (CPZ - cover board).
2.) Screw on the screws on the left and right side till the CPZ sinks slightly.

8-47-5 Replacement of CPR - Beamformer Board
8-47-5-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-47-5-2 Tools
5.) Remove the CPZ - cover board; see: Section 8-47-4-4 on page 8-102.
8-47-5-4 CPR - Replacement Procedure

1.) After removing the lid print (CPZ), pull out the CPR - Beamformer Board.
Figure 8-127 location of CPR
8-47-5-5 CPR - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Beamformer Board (CPR).
2.) Install the CPZ as described in Section 8-47-4-5 on page 8-102.

8-47-6 Replacement of CRW - CW-Doppler Board
8-47-6-1 Manpower
One person, 50 min.
8-47-6-2 Tools
5.) Remove the CPZ - cover board; see: Section 8-47-4-4 on page 8-102.
8-47-6-4 CRW - Replacement Procedure

1.) After removing the lid print (CPZ), pull out the CRW - CW-Doppler Board.
8-47-6-5 CRW - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CW-Doppler Board.
2.) Install the CPZ as described in Section 8-47-4-5 on page 8-102.

8-47-7 Replacement of CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board
8-47-7-1 Manpower
One person, 70 min.
8-47-7-2 Tools
5.) Open the GEZ-box “backend” cover as described in Section 8-47-2 "Removal of the Backend Cover
of the GEZ-Box" on page 8-100
6.) Remove the CKV board as described in Section 8-48-1 "Replacement of the CKV - Video manager
Board" on page 8-113.
8-47-7-4 CPP - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove the defect CPP-Board.
2.) Remove ATX power cables and power cable of the hard disk (connected on CPP-board).
Figure 8-128 remove power cables
8-47-7-5 CPP - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinsert the new CPP board.
2.) Reconnect all cables on the CPP board.
3.) Reinsert the CKV - Video manager board.

8-47-8 Replacement of CPK - Motherboard
8-47-8-1 Manpower
One person, 4 hours
8-47-8-2 Tools
of the GEZ-Box" on page 8-100
8-47-8-4 CPK-Board - Replacement Procedure
NOTE: Keep in mind all removed parts and cables! If necessary, label or mark them.
1.) Unplug the DVI -Digital Video (TMDS) Connection cable and then loosen the screw which fixes the
CKV-Video manager board; for location see Figure 8-135.
2.) Carefully unplug the 3 flat cables and then remove the CKV-board from the SBC-board plug.
fan
on right side
flat cables
fan on left side
Figure 8-129 remove 3 flat cables and fan cables
3.) Disconnect the fan cables (1 on left and 1 on right side of the CPK-board).
4.) Remove the CPE-Board as described in Section 8-48-2-4 on page 8-116.
5.) Remove the CPP-Board as described in Section 8-47-7-4 on page 8-105.
6.) Remove the CRS-Board as described in Section 8-47-3-4 on page 8-101.
7.) Remove the CPZ-Board as described in Section 8-47-4-4 on page 8-102.
8.) Remove the CPR-Board as described in Section 8-47-5-4 on page 8-103.
9.) If installed, remove the CRW (CW-Doppler) Board as described in Section 8-47-6-4 on page 8-104.

8-47-8-4 CPK-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
10.)Unscrew 21 Philips screws to remove CPK.
Figure 8-130 CPK mounted
8-47-8-5 CPK-Board - Installation Procedure
NOTE: Don’t forget to equip the isolation washers before mounting the new board.
1.) Mount the new CPK-Motherboard and screw on the 21 screws.

2.) Reinsert the CRW (CW-Doppler) Board as described in Section 8-47-6-5 on page 8-104.
3.) Reinsert the CPR-Board as described in Section 8-47-5-5 on page 8-103.
4.) Reinsert the CPZ-Board as described in Section 8-47-4-5 on page 8-102.
5.) Reinsert the CRS-Board as described in Section 8-47-3-5 on page 8-101.
6.) Reinsert the CPP-Board as described in Section 8-47-7-5 on page 8-105.
7.) Reinsert the CPE-Board as described in Section 8-48-2-5 on page 8-117.
8.) Connect the fan cables (1 on left and 1 on right side of the CPK-board, see: Figure 8-129).
9.) Reconnect the 3 flat cables (see: Figure 8-129), reinsert the CKV-Video manager board, tighten the
screw and then plug the DVI - Digital Video (TMDS) cable.
10.)Follow the reassembly instructions as described in Section 8-47-9-5 on page 8-110.

8-47-9 Replacement of CPV - Probe Connector Board
8-47-9-1 Manpower
8-47-9-2 Tools
precautions:
8-47-9-4 CPV-Board - Replacement Procedure

1.) Remove Front-Bottom-Jacket–Plate.
Therefore unscrew:
• 8 screws on the right side (PC-side),
• 8 screws on the left side
Right Side (PC-side) Left Side
Figure 8-131 left and right side of the GEZ-Box

8-47-9-4 CPV-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)

• 3 screws on the bottom side and
• 18 screws on the front side (probe holder bracket).
Bottom Side Front Side
Figure 8-132 bottom and front side of the GEZ-Box
2.) Screw in the screws on the left and right side till the lid print (CPZ - cover board) lifts slightly.
3.) Remove the CPZ.
Figure 8-133 GEZ with lid print (CPZ)

8-47-9-4 CPV-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)

4.) Unscrew 9 Philips screws to remove CPV - Probe Connector Board.
Figure 8-134 CPV mounted
8-47-9-5 CPV-Board - Installation Procedure

5.) Insert the CPV-Board and fasten the 9 Philips screws.
6.) Reinsert the lid print (CPZ - cover board).
7.) Screw on the screws on the left and right side till the CPZ sinks slightly.
8.) Montage the Front-Bottom-Jacket–Plate by fasten 8 screws on the right side (PC-side), 8 screws
on the left side, 3 screws on the bottom side and 18 screws on the front side (probe holder bracket).

Section 8-48
Replacement of the BackEnd Boards
To perform the replacement of the different BackEnd-components see:
• Section 8-48-1 "Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board" on page 8-113
• Section 8-48-2 "Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board" on page 8-116
• Section 8-48-3 "Replacement of the PC-Board (Single Board Computer)" on page 8-118
• Section 8-48-4 "Replacement of the ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card on SBC" on page 8-125
precautions:

8-48-0-1 BackEnd Components
NOTICE PC-compontens and their location depend on the currently installed SBC-board version!
a.) CPE - Extension Board

b.) Flat cable(s) ATA from CKV -Video manager board to CPK - Motherboard
c.) CKV - Video manager Board
d.) USB cable
e.) PC-Board (Single Board Computer)
f.) Add-On card
g.) Power-cable for the hard disk
h.) ATX 12V power supply cable (adapter)
i.) ATX Power-cable Set
j.) Power-On connection cable (black - green)
k.) Data cable for IDE-Hard disk
l.) Cable TMDS (Digital Video Cable from ADD-On DVI Output to CKV-board)
m.) Only used in combination with “Kontron” SBC version - RS-232 Serial Interface for Console
j
i
m
h
g
f
e
d
l
c
b
Figure 8-135 remove components of the PC-part (e.g., “Kontron” SBC-board installed)
NOTE: m.) is only used in combination with “Kontron” SBC-board version.

Other versions have internal connector cable, directly connected from CPE flat cable connector
(S5) to SBC COM1 (J22) connector.
8-112 Section 8-48 - Replacement of the BackEnd Boards

8-48-1 Replacement of the CKV - Video manager Board
8-48-1-1 Manpower
8-48-1-2 Tools
1.) Touch UTILITIES and SYSTEM SETUP on the Touch Panel to invoke the setup desktop.
2.) Select the OPTION page.
NOTICE Please print out the OPTION page or write down codes which are shown in the “Key” fields
(see: Figure 8-2: Option page (e.g. V730 Pro) on page 8-6).
5.) Remove all cables connected to the CKV - Video manager board.
For location see: Figure 8-125 on page 8-100.
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed cables! If necessary, label or mark them.
8-48-1-4 CKV-Board - Replacement Procedure

1.) Unplug the DVI -Digital Video (TMDS) Connection cable.
unplug the DVI (TMDS) cable
Figure 8-136 CKV - Video manager board
2.) Loosen the screw which fixes the CKV-Video manager board. For location see Figure 8-135.

8-48-1-4 CKV-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Carefully remove the CKV board from the SBC-board plug (PCI3) to unplug the 3 flat cables.
Figure 8-137 remove 3 flat cables which are connected to CKV-board
4.) Remove the CKV board.
8-48-1-5 CKV-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Connect the 3 flat cables, insert the new CKV-Video manager board and tighten the screw.
NOTE: Verify that you have inserted the CKV-board into the appropriate slot.
2.) Connect the DVI - Digital Video (TMDS) cable; see: Figure 8-136 on page 8-113.
3.) Perform the Hardware check as described in Section 8-53 on page 8-140.
5.) Re-programm the serial number as described in Section 8-48-1-6 on page 8-115.

8-48-1-6 Serial Number - Re-programming Procedure
NOTICE To re-program the System Serial Number, contact the On Line Center to get the necessary
“Permanent Key” (calculated in OKOS) !!!
Before calling OLC please prepare the following data:

• Hardware ID number
- Therefore, press the UTILITIES key on the control panel, select the SYSTEM item from the
menu area, open the SYSTEM INFO page and write down the “Hardware ID” number.
Hardware ID number
Figure 8-138 System Info page
To program the System SNO, press the UTILITIES key, select SYSTEM and then the OPTION page.
Figure 8-139 Option page
To correct SNO of unit to A0XXXX you first have to enter a code in the field reserved for Serial Number
(22 letters based on Serial lot number and SNO of unit) instead of the old SNO. Then press ENTER.
NOTE: If the previous mentioned step was done correctly, the system will show the correct SNO and
the prior installed options are enabled in the OPTION page.
DO NOT reboot the system before you have changed the serial number successfully!

8-48-2 Replacement of the CPE - Extension Board
8-48-2-1 Manpower
8-48-2-2 Tools
3.) Remove all cables connected to the CKV -Video manager and the CPE-Extension board.
8-48-2-4 CPE-Board - Replacement Procedure
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed parts and cables. If necessary, label or mark them.
1.) Remove the aluminum plate that covers the CPE-board by loosening 10 scews.
Figure 8-140 loosen screws of aluminum plate which fixes CPE-board

8-48-2-4 CPE-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
2.) Disconnect the serial interface cable which is connected to Connector S5 on the CPE-board.
NOTE: The Serial Interface cable connection depends on the currently installed SBC-board version.
Serial interface cable

(“Tyan” SBC-board installed)”

(“Kontron” SBC-board installed)
Figure 8-141 Serial Interface cable connected on CPE
3.) Remove the CPE board.
8-48-2-5 CPE-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new CPE-Extension board and tighten the screws.
2.) Connect the serial interface cable to Connector S5 on the CPE-board.

8-48-3 Replacement of the PC-Board (Single Board Computer)

NOTICE Replacement Procedure depends on the currently installed SBC-board version!
The currently installed Single Board Computer (PC-Board) is shown in the System Setup - System Info
page; see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2, SLOT_CPU: TYAN or KONTRON
NOTICE The “Tyan” SBC version is NOT available as FRU.

It has to be replaced by the “Kontron” SBC Kit (KTZ208599; Item No.: 575).
After the installation the system “C:” image MUST be loaded from System DVD!
However, instruction is included as reference for connections; see: Figure 8-146 on page 8-122.
8-48-3-1 Manpower
One person, 85 min.
8-48-3-2 Tools
System DVD (in case that “Tyan” SBC-version was installed)
5.) Remove the CKV - Video manager board as described in Section 8-48-1-4 on page 8-113.
8-48-3-4 PC-Board - Replacement Procedure

1.) Disconnect all the cables from the PC-board. For location see Figure 8-135.
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed parts and cables! If necessary, label or mark them.
2.) Disconnect the serial interface cable which is connected to Connector S5 on the CPE-board.

(“Tyan” SBC-board installed)”

(Kontron” SBC-board installed)
Figure 8-142 Serial Interface cable connected on CPE

8-48-3-4 PC-Board - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Disconnect the fan cable, the data cable and the power cable of the hard disk.
Afterwards unscrew the 3 screws to remove the aluminum rack (inclusive mounted HDD).
HDD
unscrew
3 screws
aluminum
disconnect fan cable rack
Figure 8-143 disconnect cables and then remove screws
4.) Unscrew 5 screws (2 on right side, 1 nearby fan and 2 on left side; see: Figure 8-144) and then
remove the complete SBC-Kit.
Figure 8-144 remove SBC-Kit and Fan
5.) Unscrew the 4 screws to remove the fan.

8-48-3-5 PC-Board - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the fan into the new “Kontron” SBC Kit and thighten the 4 screws.
2.) Mount the SBC Kit at the GEZ-box and screw on the 5 screws; see: Figure 8-144 on page 8-119.
3.) Re-connect the fan cable, mount the aluminum rack (with mounted HDD) and fasten it with the
3 screws; see: Figure 8-143 on page 8-119.
4.) Re-connect the IDE data cable and the power cable to the hard disk.
5.) Connect the power supply cable from the ATX Power cable Set to SBC´s Connector 4.
6.) Connect the PowerOn-Connector (green, black) to Connector 3, Pin 23 and 25 (Pin 23 = GND).
Pin 25 = green
Pin 23 = black (GND)
2 1
Connector 3 = PowerOn-Connector
(green, black)
Connector 4 = power supply cable from

ATX Power cable Set
Connector 5 (IDE1/2) = “blue” plug of IDE

Data cable (to HDD)
PCI Express x16 = slot for ADD2-DVI

(Add-On) card
PCI 3 = plug for CKV-Video manager board
Connector 16 (USB1/2) = USB cables
Connector 21 = Power Supply cable for

processor + Adapter
(CPU core power supply)
Figure 8-145 Position plan - Kontron SBC version
7.) Connect the power supply for the processor to the adapter which is connected to Connector 21
(CPU core power supply).
8.) Connect the “blue” plug of the IDE data cable from the Hard disk to Connector 5.

8-48-3-5 PC-Board - Installation Procedure (cont’d)
9.) Connect the RS-232 serial adapter slot to the CPE-board S5 connector.
10.)Connect the 3 flat cables (coming from Motherboard CPK) to the CKV-Video manager board.
CPK CKV
S210 J210
S211 J211
S212 J212
1.) Insert the CKV-Video manager board into SBC-board plug (PCI3) and fix the board with 1 screw.
2.) Connect the cable from the CPE-board (Audio Sound IN) to the “Line Out” of the PC-Module.
3.) Connect the PS2 Adapter to the PC-Module (green = Mouse; purple = Keyboard)
4.) On the PC-Module, connect the RS232-cable between RS-232 In and RS-232 Out connector.
5.) On the PC-Module, connect the DVI (Digital Video “TMDS” connection) cable between connector
DVI In (CKV board) and connector DVI Out (Add-On card).
6.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-169) and the mains power cable.
7.) Perform BIOS Settings for PC-Board as described in Section 8-48-3-6 on page 8-123.
CAUTION If you have replaced a “Tyan” SBC version, the system “C:” image MUST be loaded from the
System DVD (see: Installation Manual KTI105994 - “Restore C:\image”).

Position plan of Tyan SBC-board version connectors (For reference only!)
PW5 = Power Supply cable for

processor + Adapter
(CPU core power supply)
PW8 = power supply cable from

ATX Power cable Set
PCI-E1 = slot for ADD2-DVI

(Add-On) card
PW8
PCI 3 = plug for CKV
Video manager board
JP21 = PowerOn-Connector
(green, black)
Pin 6 = green
Pin 8 = black (GND)
JP21
JP10 (USB3) = USB cables
J22 (COM1) = Serial Inferface

flat cable
J11 (IDE1) = “blue” plug of IDE
Data cable (to HDD)
Figure 8-146 Position plan - Tyan SBC version (JUST as REFERENCE for connections)
NOTICE The “Tyan” SBC version is NOT available as FRU.

It has to be replaced by the “Kontron” SBC Kit (KTZ208599; Item No.: 575);
see: Section 8-48-3 "Replacement of the PC-Board (Single Board Computer)" on page 8-118

8-48-3-6 BIOS Settings for PC-Board
CAUTION BIOS settings will be adjusted in factory.

Re-adjust settings only in case of problems.
1.) Switch on system and press the DEL key immediately to enter the BIOS Setup.
2.) Enter the Bios Password: Rudi (case sensitive) and then press ENTER.
General operation and selection in BIOS and LINUX menu is done with:
• the alphanumeric keyboard
• the “Arrow” keys (right, left, up, down) and
• the “Enter” key on the keyboard
NOTE: The BIOS screen depends on the SBC-board installed.

• BIOS screen on Kontron (Phoenix), see: Section 8-48-3-6-1 on page 8-123
• BIOS screen on Tyan (Award), see: Section 8-48-3-6-2 on page 8-124
8-48-3-6-1 BIOS setting if “Kontron” SBC-board is installed
Load GE-102 Values
Figure 8-147 BIOS screen at “Kontron” SBC version
1.) Select “Load GE-102 Values” and then press ENTER.

2.) Confirm the message with Y key and then press ENTER.
3.) Press ESC.
4.) Press the DELETE ARROW key (= F10) on the alphanumeric keyboard to save and exit.
5.) Confirm the message with the Y key and then press ENTER.

8-48-3-6-2 BIOS setting if “Tyan” SBC-board is installed
Standard CMOS
Features
Load GE-003 Settings
Figure 8-148 BIOS screen at “Tyan” SBC version
1.) Select “Load GE-003 Settings” and then press ENTER.

2.) Confirm the message with Y key and then press ENTER.
3.) Press ESC.
4.) Press the DELETE ARROW key (= F10) on the alphanumeric keyboard to save and exit.
5.) Confirm the message with the Y key and then press ENTER.

8-48-4 Replacement of the ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card on SBC
8-48-4-1 Manpower
One person, 75 min.
8-48-4-2 Tools
8-48-4-4 Add-On card - Replacement Procedure
NOTE: Keep in mind all the removed parts and cables! If necessary, label or mark them.
1.) Unplug the DVI -Digital Video (TMDS) cable from the Add-On card.
2.) Loosen the screw which fixes the Add-On card.
3.) Remove the Add-On card.
8-48-4-5 Add-On card - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Add-On card into the correct slot of the SBC-board and tighten 1 screw.
2.) Reconnect the DVI -Digital Video (TMDS) cable to the connector of the new Add-On card.
4.) Adjust the Extended Desktop settings as described in Section 8-48-4-6 on page 8-125.
8-48-4-6 Configure the Extended Desktop Settings

ENABLE.
The “blue” system background appears on the screen.
5.) Press CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.

8-48-4-6 Configure the Extended Desktop Settings (cont’d)
6.) Select "Settings" –> "Control Panel" and then double-click "Intel(R) GMA Driver".
Figure 8-149 double-click “Intel(R) GMA Driver”
7.) In the displayed DEVICES page click on Extended Desktop, see: Figure 8-150.
8.) Now move the mouse pointer onto rectangle [2], press and hold down the left trackball key and shift
this rectangle from the right to the left as shown in the image below.
rectangle [2]
Extended Desktop
Figure 8-150 move rectangle [2] from right to left

8-48-4-6 Configure the Extended Desktop Settings (cont’d)
9.) Click on the DEVICE SETTINGS button (see: Figure 8-150).

10.)In the following window, adjust settings as shown in the image below.
Figure 8-151 adjust settings as shown in image
11.)Confirm with OK, APPLY and finally finsih adjustment with the OK button.

Section 8-49
Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board
8-49-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-49-2 Tools
8-49-3 Preparations
8-49-4 Lithium Battery - Replacement Procedure

2.) Remove the Lithium Battery using a slotted screwdriver.
KONTRON SBC-version TYAN SBC-version
Lithium Battery
Figure 8-152 Lithium Battery on PC-Board
8-49-5 Lithium Battery - Installation Procedure

1.) Insert the new Lithium Battery.
1.) Reinsert the CKV - Video manager board as described in Section 8-48-1-5 on page 8-114.
2.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-169) and the mains power cable.
3.) Perform BIOS Settings for PC-Board as described in Section 8-48-3-6 on page 8-123.
8-128 Section 8-49 - Replacement of the Lithium Battery on the PC-Board

Section 8-50
Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD)
8-50-1 Introduction
With SN79009 a new “universal” Hard disk was introduced (KTZ196003). This HDD can be used on all
Voluson 730 series. For creating a complete Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) HDD a System DVD
(see: Table 9-12) is required.
8-50-2 Manpower
8-50-3 Tools
System DVD (see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16)
Service Dongle
8-50-4 Preparations
2.) Disconnect all external USB-devices (e.g., USB printer).

8-50-5 Hard disk - Replacement Procedure

1.) Disconnect the data cable and power cable of the hard disk and then unscrew 2 screws.
disconnect cables
of the hard disk
unscrew 2 screws
Figure 8-153 disconnect cables and unscrew HDD
8-130 Section 8-50 - Replacement of the Hard disk (HDD)

8-50-5 Hard disk - Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
2.) Remove the defect hard disk.
Figure 8-154 remove hard disk
8-50-6 Hard disk - Installation Procedure

1.) Check Jumper setting of the new hard disk.
Figure 8-155 Jumper setting HDD - master
2.) Reinsert the new hard disk and screw on the 2 screws.
3.) Connect the data cable and the power cable to the hard disk.
5.) Connect the Mains Power cable and mount the pull-out protection (see: Figure 4-3 on page 4-3).
6.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet.
8.) The system boots up and the “V730 Hard disk Configuration” menu appear (see: Figure 8-156).

8-50-7 Configure the Universal Hard disk
1.) In the displayed “V730 Hard disk Configuration” menu select [Change].
Change
Exit/Reboot
Figure 8-156 V730 Hard disk Configuration menu
2.) Insert the appropriate System DVD into the system´s DVD drive (see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16).
3.) After the LED of the drive stops flashing, press ENTER to mount CD and to start the procedure.
4.) Recovering will take some time. Please wait....
Figure 8-157 copying C: image
5.) When Hard disk is activated, press ENTER to reboot the system.
Figure 8-158 Press Enter to reboot the system

8-50-7 Configure the Universal Hard disk (cont’d)
The system boots with windows and check disk will be performed automatically.
NOTICE An automated process was developed to choose the right GEU user interface console, assigning an
unique computer name (Hardware ID) and matching the drive letters.
6.) Wait until “check disk” is finished and the “DOS” box (Figure 8-159) and the “System Settings
Change” message box (Figure 8-161) appear.
NOTE: Detection of new devices may take some time (up to 5 minutes).
Please wait until the message box “System Settings Change” (see: Figure 8-161) is displayed.
If the “System Settings Change” message box obstructs the view to the “DOS” box, move it away.
7.) Click onto the “DOS” box. The “DOS” window becomes active
click onto the

“DOS” window
Figure 8-159 Press “S” to set the name of the computer
8.) Press the S key on the keyboard to set the name of the computer. The “DOS” box proceeds:
Figure 8-160 Press the “C” key to continue the setup
9.) Press the C key on the keyboard to continue without activating the UIS.

10.)Confirm the “System Settings Change” message with YES.
Figure 8-161 confirm “System Settings Change” message
11.)After restart, press the CTRL and ESC key simultaneously to make the Windows start menu visible.
12.)Open Windows Explorer using the “Arrow” keys, select “My Computer” and check the drive letters.
Figure 8-162 Check the drive letters
The drive letters SHOULD be:
C: System
D: User
E: Removable Disk (only visible if the optional MOD-drive is installed)
F: Compact Disk (CD-ROM drive)
R: Rescue
NOTE: If they are not assigned this way, reboot the system.

13.)If the “DOS” box is not still open, press the CTRL + ESC keys simultaneously to open the Windows
Start menu and then select “Activate UISApp”.
14.)When the “DOS” box is open, press the A key to activate the Ultrasound Application Software [UIS].
Figure 8-163 When the “DOS” box is active, press the “A” key to start UlSApp
15.)Skip the BT warning with CONTINUE.
Figure 8-164 skip BT warning with Continue
NOTE: Options will be recovered at a later step using “Full Backup” process.

16.)Set the Video Norm to PAL(50Hz) to NTSC(60Hz) and confirm with OK.
Figure 8-165 Set Video Norm PAL or NTSC
17.)Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box and then confirm with OK.
choose “Repair”
enter “Name of Technician”

(your name)
enter “Description”:
HDD replacement
Figure 8-166 System Status Messenger
18.)Customize the system as described in Section 8-50-8 on page 8-137.

8-50-8 Customizing the Universal Hard disk

NOTICE In case that “Full Backup” is NOT available, contact to OLC will be necessary to get “Permanent key”.
Before calling OLC, please prepare the following data:
• Needed option
1.) If not currently done, restart system with new HDD and boot up completely.
5.) Connect a probe and start any user program.
6.) Press UTILITIES and then select the SYSTEM item to invoke the System Setup desktop.
7.) Select the BACKUP page to load the appropriate User Settings.
NOTE: Reloading the User Settings only (Application Settings) from “D:\User Settings\ FactoryDefault\”
should ONLY be performed, if:
• no “Full Backup” is available (for the same system)
see: Section 4-5-2 "Load User Settings Only (Application Settings)"
NOTE: Reloading a “Full Backup” into the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system is ONLY possible, if:
• “Full Backup” was saved (on the same system) before replacing the hard disk
see: Section 4-5-4 "Load Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)"
NOTE: If you have reloaded the “Full Backup”, step 8.) to step 11.) as well as step 15.) to step 17.)
in this section can be omitted.
8.) Select the OPTION page and enter the codes for the options as described in Section 8-8
"Replacement or Activation of Options" on page 8-21.
9.) Select the GENERAL page and check and match the settings (e.g., Date/Time, Clinic Name, etc.).
10.)Select the USER SETTINGS page and match the settings (Auto Text, Doppler 2D Refresh, etc.).
11.)Select the SERVICE page and match the Video Norm Standard (PAL/NTSC) and Video out (VHS2).
12.)Select the NETWORK page.
a.) click on the DICOM / SONOVIEW CONFIGURATION button and check and match the DICOM
parameters.
b.) click on the NETWORK CONFIGURATION button and adjust the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties.
13.)Click the SAVE&EXIT button to store settings and exit the System Setup desktop screen.
14.) Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described
in Section 3-7 "Printer Installation" on page 3-24. Afterwards check and match system settings in
the PERIPHERALS page (assignment of Remote PRINT keys, etc.).
15.)Press UTILITIES and then select the MEASURE item to invoke the Measure Setup desktop.
16.)Check and match settings of the MEASURE & CALC, the APPLICATION PARAMETERS and the
GLOBAL PARAMETERS page.
17.)Click the CLOSE button to store settings and exit the Measure Setup desktop screen.
NOTICE Save any presets, configurations and application settings to HDD and/or DVD or MO disk, to have the
“Full Backup” available for next time.
Operation see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" .

Section 8-51
Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan)
NOTICE At the time being, it is not possible to replace the Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan) in the field.
Section 8-52
Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (single)
8-52-1 Manpower
8-52-2 Tools
8-52-3 Preparations
8-52-4 Fan for GEZ (single)- Replacement Procedure

1.) Disconnect the fan cable from the CPK-Motherboard and then unscrew 4 screws to remove the fan,.
HDD
disconnect fan cable
Figure 8-167 disconnect fan cable and then remove the 4 screws
8-138 Section 8-51 - Replacement of the Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan)

8-52-4 Fan for GEZ (single)- Replacement Procedure (cont’d)
2.) Unscrew the 4 screws to remove the grid from the fan.
grid which covers

the fan
Figure 8-168 unscrew the screws
8-52-5 Fan for GEZ (single) - Installation Procedure

1.) Cover the new fan with the grid and fasten the 4 screws.
2.) Screw on the fan with the 4 screws on the aluminum plate (GEB60); see: Figure 8-167.
3.) Plug on the fan cable to the connector on the CPK -Motherboard.
4.) Reinsert the CKV-Video manager board and reconnect all the cables.

Section 8-53
Hardware check
8-53-1 Manpower
One person, 20 min.
8-53-2 Procedure
1.) Connect the minimum configuration of cables (Figure 8-169) to perform the Hardware check:
a.) PS2 (connector for Mouse/Keyboard)
b.) UI Disp. (connector for User Interface Display) - NOT used at Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
c.) DVI (Digital Video Cable from Add-On DVI Output to CKV-board)
d.) VGA (Monitor)
e.) Console
f.) CPN (Primary Power Supply)
g.) Standby switch
h.) Monitor (Power Supply)
*** RS-232 Serial Interface for Console (GEU)
a
“Tyan” a
b SBC-board “Kontron”
installed SBC-board
b installed
f
c f
c
d e d e
h ***
g This connection is only necessary, if “Kontron”
SBC-board version is installed.
Other versions have internal connector cable,
directly connected from CPE flat cable
connector to SBC COM1 connector.
Figure 8-169 cable- minimum configuration
8-140 Section 8-53 - Hardware check

8-53-2 Procedure (cont’d)

2.) Connect the Mains Power cable and mount the pull-out protection (see: Figure 4-3 on page 4-3).
3.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet and switch ON the Circuit Breaker.
4.) Connect a probe.
5.) Press the ON/OFF Standby switch left below the Control Panel to boot up the System.
6.) Fill in the requested information into the “System Status Messenger” box and click OK.
7.) Start an User Program.
NOTE: Before system-reassembling (Section 8-54 on page 141), remove all cables from the GEZ-box.
Section 8-54
Reassembly the System
1.) Remove all cables from the GEZ-box.
2.) Cover the GEZ-box:
- at “frontend” cover, fasten 4 screws
- at “backend” cover, fasten 7 screws
“Frontend” cover
“Backend” cover
Figure 8-170 cover the GEZ-Box
3.) Insert the new GEZ-box partly into the system and connect all the cables to the PC-part.
NOTE: PC-part connectors depend on the currently installed SBC-board version:

• If “Kontron” SBC-board is installed, see: Figure 8-171 on page 8-142.
• If “Tyan” SBC-board is installed, see: Figure 8-171 on page 8-142.

Section 8-54 Reassembly the System (cont’d)
1 2
3 4
5
7
8 9
10
11
12
13
14
Figure 8-171 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (“Kontron” SBC-board installed)


5 RS-232 Out Electrical-Signal-Connection between CPS and PIC_MG_Slot-CPU
6 UI Disp.


10 Audio

14 RS-232 In Electrical-Signal-Connection between CKV and PC-Board (SBC)
8-142 Section 8-54 - Reassembly the System

1 2
3
5
6
7 8
9 10
11
12
13
Figure 8-172 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ (“Tyan” SBC-board installed)


3 ******* *********** not used
4 UI Disp.

6 Audio




14.)After connection of all the cables to the PC-part push the GEZ up to the back stop.
15.)Fasten the 2 screws from the GEZ-box (see: Figure 8-122 on page 8-97).
16.)Connect all cables on the rear-side and tighten the connector-screws.
9 S-VHS S-VHS IN

Diagnostic LED´s (for voltage check)

18 ---------------
1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V
17.)Lay the cables and fix them with the cable clips like shown in the Figure below.
18.)Install the earth cable on the basket of the trolley; see: Figure 8-121 on page 8-97.
properly fixed!
19.)Connect the GND ground-cable at the rear-cover; see: Figure 8-49: GND ground cable on page 8-
39.
20.)Mount the rear cover, fasten the 2 screws and cover them with the plastic caps;
see: Figure 8-48: remove rear cover plate on page 8-39.

Section 8-55
Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
NOTICE Table 9-12 on page 9-16 shows the available Key Cap Kits.
Keys to be removed depend on the (special native) language kit.
8-55-1 Manpower
One person, 30 minutes
8-55-2 Tools
A key removal tool is required. Use the removal tool which is part of the key cap kits, or a commercial
key removal tool, or fashion two loops made from paperclips as shown in Figure 8-175.
Figure 8-175 Key Removal Tools
8-55-3 Preparations
precautions:
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed
for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential
for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
8-146 Section 8-55 - Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)
8-55-4 Key Caps - Removal Procedure

1.) Place the removal tool (or the loops under opposite corners) on the first key to be removed as
shown in Figure 8-176.
2.) Pull up with the tool but also slightly to the top edge (number row) of the keyboard. The slight pull
towards the top forces the white plunger to come off with the key.
If using paperclips, it works best if you use one hand on each clip and pull together.
3.) If the white plunger stays in the keyboard, you can reinstall the key and try again. Or, the plunger
can be removed from the keyboard with needle nose pliers grabbing between the same points as
where the key inserts.
Figure 8-176 Removal Tool in Place
4.) After the key is removed, push the plunger into the key top to make sure it is seated all the way.
Key top
Plunger
Figure 8-177 Key top and Plunger Assembly
8-55-5 Key Caps - Installation Procedure

1.) Reinstall all the removed key tops by the new on of the kit.
NOTE: If a key top seem too high, the white plunger was probably not seated all the way into the key
top. The key top and plunger must be removed to fully seat the plunger into the key top.
2.) Power On/Boot Up the system; see: Section 4-3-1 on page 4-2.
3.) Setup the Keyboard Language Layout as described in Section 6-6 on page 6-7 and then type with
the keyboard to check the function of each key.

Section 8-56
Reassembly the System
1.) Remove all cables from the GEZ-box.
NOTE: If the shielding was installed before the service, and you have changed the CPP-Board,
you have to cover it again with the shielding; see Figure 8-178.
Shielding
(CPP-Board)
Shielding must not
cover this plate!!!
Figure 8-178 GEZ-Box without cover
2.) Cover the GEZ-box.

3.) Fasten the 11 screws. (Don’t exchange them.)
The black arrows

indicate 4 countersunk
head screws.
Therefore use the
Philips 1 screw-driver.
For the white arrows

use the Philips 2
screw-driver.
Figure 8-179 GEZ-Box


1.) Insert the new GEZ-box partly into the system and connect all the cables to the PC-part.
Figure 8-180 Connectors on PC-part of the GEZ
1 USB-GEM Connector for Disk Drive Module GEM
2 Parallel Port Parallel port for PC-Line Printer
3 Audio MIC = Connector for Microphone ; Line-OUT = Connector for Sound card
4 USB USB port connectors
5 LAN1 Connector for Network twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
Connector for User Interface Display (NOT used at Voluson® 730Pro /

6 UI Disp.
730ProV)
7 USB USB port connector
8 RS-232 Connector for Global Modem
9 VGA no function
10 PS2 Connector for Mouse / Keyboard
*** --------- no function


2.) After connection of all the cables to the PC-part push the GEZ up to the back stop.
3.) Fasten the 2 screws from the GEZ-box.

4.) Connect all cables on the rear-side and tighten the connector-screws.
9 S-VHS S-VHS IN

Diagnostic LED´s (for voltage check)

18 ---------------
1 = +15V ; 2 = -15V ; 3 = Fan ; 4 = +12V ; 5 = +5V ; 6 = +3.3V
5.) Lay the cables and fix them with the cable clips like shown in the Figure below.
6.) Install the earth cable on the basket of the trolley; see: Figure 8-121 on page 8-97.
properly fixed!
7.) Connect the GND ground-cable at the rear-cover; see: Figure 8-49: GND ground cable on page 8-
39.
8.) Mount the rear cover, fasten the 2 screws and cover them with the plastic caps;
see: Figure 8-48: remove rear cover plate on page 8-39.

Section 8-57
Replacement of ECG Module (MAN6)
8-57-1 Manpower
One person, 60 min.
8-57-2 Tools
8-57-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the Disk Drive module (GEM) from the trolley; see Section 8-36 on page 8-79.
8-57-4 ECG Module - Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew the 6 screws (3 on each side).
Figure 8-183 GEM-box inclusive optional ECG module (MAN6)
3.) Unscrew the 8 screws (4 on each side), see: Figure 8-101 on page 8-81 and remove the ECG-
module.
8-57-5 ECG Module - Installation Procedure

1.) Mount the new ECG preamplifier module (MAN6) with the 8 screws.
The front of the ECG must be even with the other drives.
2.) Lead the cable through the cable recess. Press the cable protection ring into the recess.
3.) Push back the cover of the GEM and screw on the six screws.
5.) Connect ECG connecting cable to the marked plug on the rear side of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
8-152 Section 8-57 - Replacement of ECG Module (MAN6)

Section 8-58
Replacement of the Global Modem
8-58-1 Manpower
One person, 30 min.
8-58-2 Tools
blade of a knife
Scissors
8-58-3 Preparations
8-58-4 Global Modem - Removal Procedure

1.) Unplug all the cables from the modem and the power adapter.
power adapter
on modem
output cable AC
from power cable
power adapter
RS232 cable
phone cable
global modem
GEZ-box
Figure 8-184 Modem location and connection
2.) Remove the modem (located on the top of the GEZ-box).

8-58-5 Global Modem - Installation Procedure

1.) Remove the phone cable, modem, power adapter and velcro from the modem kit.
Figure 8-185 contents of the modem kit
2.) Cut the Velcro strip into six (6) squares.
NOTE: The easiest way to install velcro is to put both parts of the velcro together, cut the 6 squares,
peel the backing off one side of the “mated pair”, stick on the hardware, peel the other backing
off and then stick that hardware with both parts of velcro to whatever it is to be attached to.
This way, the alignment is perfect. Doing it separately is more difficult.
3.) Place two mated squares on the bottom of the power adapter and four mated squares on the bottom
of the modem in the approximate locations shown in Figure 8-186.
Figure 8-186 Stick on Velcro squares
4.) On the top of the modem, place two squares of velcro to match up with the squares on the bottom
of the power adapter as shown in Figure 8-186.
NOTE: For best alignment, place the power converter with the two mated velcro squares on the top of
the modem, ensure they stick. Separate the modem and converter separating the velcro
squares.
8-154 Section 8-58 - Replacement of the Global Modem

8-58-5 Global Modem - Installation Procedure (cont’d)

5.) Attach the RS232 cable (1), the phone cable (2) and the output cable from the power adapter (3) to
the modem as shown in Figure 8-187.
RS232 cable (1)
output cable from

power adapter (3)
phone cable (2)
Figure 8-187 Modem Connection
6.) Check to ensure that the modem power switch is sent to the ON position as shown in Figure 8-188.
Power Switch
Figure 8-188 Modem Power Switch
7.) Place and secure the modem on to the four Velcro squares installed on the top of the GEZ-box.
8.) Plug the AC power into the power adapter and mount the power adapter, with the two velcro
squares, on top of the modem; see: Figure 8-184: Modem location and connection on page 8-153.
For further connection details see: Section 3-5-6 "Global Modem Connection" on page 3-12.
NOTE: If the optional Global Modem is installed subsequently, checkout and configuration of the
modem has to be performed.

8-156 Section 8-58 - Replacement of the Global Modem

Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.

9-1 Overview 9-1
9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-2
9-3 Parts List Groups 9-3
9-4 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware 9-4
9-5 User Interface (GEU Top Console) 9-6
9-6 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts 9-8
9-7 Disk Drives (GEM) 9-9
9-8 Main Power Module (CPN) 9-10
9-9 Main Board Module (GEZ) 9-11
9-10 Options and Upgrades 9-16
9-11 Miscellaneous Cables 9-17
9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories 9-23
9-13 Probes 9-27
9-14 Biopsy Needle Guides 9-32
9-15 Compatibility (Overview) 9-34
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-1

Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
• CKV - Video Converter Board
• CPD - Sub-Board on Beamformer (CPR)
• CPE - Motherboard Extension (Backpanel I/O-Card)
• CPK - Motherboard of GEZ-Module
• CPN - Primary Power Supply Module
• CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board + Motor Power stage
• CPR - Beamformer Motherboard
• CPV - Probe Connector Board
• CPY - Power Switch Board
• CPZ - Cover Board
• CRB - USB to IDE Converter Board
• CRS - Signal Processing Board
• CRW - CW-Doppler Board (optional)
• EUM - Electronic User Manual
• FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub
• FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)
• GEZ - Main Board Module (Ultrasound (FrontEnd) and PC-Boards (Backend Processor)
• GEM - Disk Drive module (with or without MO-Drive and MAN)
• GES - I/O-Interface (User accessible)
• GEU - User interface: Keyboard, EL-Display, TGC Unit
• GW - Console housing (except GEU and GEM)
• HDD - Hard Disk Drive
• MAN - ECG module
• MOD - Magneto Optical Disk
• SBC - Single Board Computer (PC-Board)
• SSW - Service Software (Service Platform)
• UIS - Ultrasound Application Software
9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations

Section 9-3
Parts List Groups
Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-2 Mechanical and user accessible parts
Item Part Group Name Table Number Description
Housing (GW) and additional Console

100- Table 9-3 on page 9-5 GW -Console housing (except GEU and GEM)
Hardware
200- User Interface (GEU Top Console) Table 9-4 on page 9-7 GEU - User interface: Keyboard, TGC Unit
250- Monitor + Monitor replacement parts Table 9-5 on page 9-8 Monitor (Any) + Monitor replacement parts
300- Disk Drives (GEM) Table 9-6 on page 9-9 GEM - Disk Drive module (with or without MAN)
400- Main Power Module (CPN) Table 9-7 on page 9-10 CPN - Primary power module
500- Main Board Module (GEZ) Table 9-8 on page 9-11 GEZ - Main Board Module
510- • FrontEnd (US-Part) Table 9-9 on page 9-12 Ultrasound (FrontEnd)
• FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d Table 9-10 on page 9-13
570- • Back Processor (PC-Part) Table 9-11 on page 9-15 PC-Boards (Backend Processor)
600- Options and Upgrades Table 9-12 on page 9-16
700- Miscellaneous Cables Table 9-13 on page 9-17
Optional Peripherals and Accessories Table 9-14 on page 9-24

800- Printers, Video Recorder, ECG-Module (MAN)
• Optional Peripherals and Access. cont´d Table 9-15 on page 9-25
System Manuals Table 9-16 on page 9-26
Probes
900- • 2D curved array Transducers Table 9-17 on page 9-27
906- • 2D linear- and phased array Transducers Table 9-18 on page 9-28
920- • Real-Time 4D Volume Probes Table 9-19 on page 9-29
• Real-Time 4D Volume Probes cont´d Table 9-20 on page 9-30
930- • CW-Pencil Probes Table 9-21 on page 9-31
950 Biopsy Needle Guides Table 9-22 on page 9-33

Section 9-4
Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
107
101
104
102 105
103 110
111
108
106 109
115
114
112
113
116
Figure 9-2 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
9-4 Section 9-4 - Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware

Table 9-3 Housing (GW) and additional Console Hardware
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty FRU
101 Rear Handle for Trolley KTZ134468 Rear Handle for Trolley 1 1
102 Blind Cap for rear screws KTZ208109 covers housing screws to make them invisible (1 pcs.) 2 1
103 Rear Metal Cover Plate KTZ154728 Rear metal cover plate complete 1 2
Guide for Probe cables

104 Guide for Probe cables KTZ154736 1 1
(includes 4 hooks and mounting rail)
Side panel Kit (left and right side panel)

105 Side panel Kit (left an right) KTZ154735 1 2
including guide for probe cables and plastic guide
106 Cap Rubber (8 pcs.) KTZ154737 Cap Rubber (set includes 8 pieces) 8 1
107
Monitor Mounting Plate KTZ134110 Monitor mounting plate 1 1
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
108 Rear Wheel (Ø175 mm x 32) KTZ211081 Rear wheel non-steerable (1 pcs.) 2 1
109 Steerable Wheel KTZ211080 Front wheel steerable (1 pcs.) 2 1
110 Foot rest KTZ134467 Foot rest 1 1
GW140 Trolley Voluson® 730Pro / Housing with wheels, backpanel with connectors
111 KTZ154734 1 2
730ProV and cables
External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and Supply-

112 GES8 I/O Connection Panel KTZ195901 Connection-Cables to the systems main unit (internal) 1 1
Rear-Panel.
113 Top Cover of Trolley KTZ208119 Top Cover of Trolley 1 1
114 Hinge for Foot rest KTZ220018 Hinge for Foot rest (1 pcs.) 2 1
115 Standby Switch 24V/15A KTZ207125 Standby Switch left below the control panel 1 1
116 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable KTZ154717 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable (incl. screws) 1 1

Section 9-5
User Interface (GEU Top Console)
203
201
202 204
205
206
207
208
209 212
211
210
213
215 216
214
Figure 9-3 User Interface (GEU)
9-6 Section 9-5 - User Interface (GEU Top Console)

Table 9-4 User Interface (GEU)
201 Front Handle User Interface KTZ209344 Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV Front Handle, silver 1 1
202 Probe Holder Kit V730 KTZ209346 right hand Probe holder part, removable 1 1
generates X-Y-Coordinates of Trackball-Movements like

203 Trackball Kit V730 KTZ208264 1 1
moving a PC-Mouse
204 Trackball top fixation ring KTZ208256 Trackball for top fixation ring 1 1
205 KTZ214798 Caps for Rotation digipots 8 1

Caps for Rotation digipots (8 pcs.)
(set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets)
206 KTZ214818 Caps for TGC Slide-pot. 8 1

Caps for TGC Slide-pot. (8 pcs.)
(set includes 8 pieces with premounted brackets)
207 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV KTZ207558 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV 1 1
Alpha-numeric keyboard for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV

Alpha-numeric keyboard Voluson®
208 KTZ208217 English (check if special key cap kit is needed; 1 1
730Pro / 730ProV (English)
see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16)
209 Gel holder Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV KTZ134521 Gel holder Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV 1 1
210 Loudspeaker for Top Console KTZ208132 Loudspeaker on GEU User Interface (1 pcs.) 2 1
English keyboard, trackball, special knobs, and switches

211 GEU70 User Interface KTZ154730 (check if special key cap kit is needed; 1 1
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV see: Table 9-12 on page 9-16)
212 Top housing of GEU70, painted KTZ214819 Top housing of GEU70, painted, empty 1 1
213 Bottom housing of GEU, painted KTZ214799 Bottom housing of GEU, painted, without interior 1 1
Hardkey Board(s) for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV

214 Hard key Board for V730Pro / ProV KTZ208284 1 1
(large board - Part A ; small board - Part B)
215 Distance Rod for GEU KTZ14B596 Distance Rod for GEU8 1 1
216 Wheel control for V730Pro / ProV KTZ208257 Wheel control for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV 1 1

Section 9-6
Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
251
250
253
252
255
254
Figure 9-4 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
Table 9-5 Monitor + Monitor replacement parts
250 Color Monitor 15” Painted KTZ212115 AY-15CUI Color Image Monitor, lacquered 1 1
251 Monitor Base Cover KTZ134474 Monitor Base Cover, silver colored 1 1
252 Set Monitor Front Housing KTZ208445 Set Monitor Front Housing (incl. cover of task lamp) 1 1
253 Set Monitor Housing KTZ208446 Set Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and top cover) 1 1
254 Monitor Switch Assembly 2300008 Common part with L5 and L3 1 1
255 Task Lamp 2317347 Common part with L5 and L3 1 1
9-8 Section 9-6 - Monitor + Monitor replacement parts

Section 9-7
Disk Drives (GEM)
301 303
302
306
304
305
Figure 9-5 Disk Drives (GEM)
Table 9-6 Disk Drives (GEM)
301 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W KTZ207257 DVD+(R)W Writer internal (no own cabinet) 1 1
302 Fan axial 62 x 62 x 14 mm KTZ207602 Fan for Air-Cooling of GEM (SCSI-Drive-Module) 1 1
Magneto-Optical-Drive 1.3GB internal

303 Disk Drive IDE MOD 1.3GB internal KTZ207269 1 1
(no own cabinet)
304 GEM11-11A MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W KTZ196000 MO-Drive and DVD+(R)W 1 2
305 GEM 21-21A DVD+(R)W KTZ196001 DVD+(R)W (without MO-Drive) 1 2
306 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board KTZ195891 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board 1 1

Section 9-8
Main Power Module (CPN)
401
402
404
403
405 406 407
409
408
Figure 9-6 Main Power Module (CPN)
Table 9-7 Main Power Module (CPN)
401 CPN80-81 Power Supply Module KTZ207486 CPN80 Power Supply Module 1 1
402 CPY80.P1 Power Switch KTZ209338 Board to switch on and shut down Ultrasound System 1 1
403 CCF100.P1 Power Primary Board KTZ209339 Power Primary Board 1 1
404 Mains Power switch and Input connector KTZ209340 Mains Power Switch and Input Connector 1 1
405 Fuses 16 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209341 used at primary and secondary side (10 pcs.) 3 1
406 Fuses 3.2 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209342 fuse for auxiliary power output at 110V setting (10 pcs.) 1 1
407 Fuses 1.6 Ampere 6.3 x 32 (10 pcs.) KTZ209343 fuse for auxiliary power output at 230V setting (10 pcs.) 1 1
408 KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply KTZ195440 KVN2 - Fan for Primary Power Supply (CPN) 1 1
409 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable KTZ154717 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable (incl. screws) 1 1
9-10 Section 9-8 - Main Power Module (CPN)

Section 9-9
Main Board Module (GEZ)
502
501
Figure 9-7 Main Board Module (GEZ)
Table 9-8 Main Board Module (GEZ)
501 Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan) KTZ154738 Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan) 1 1
502 Fan for GEZ-box (single) KTZ154679 Fan for GEZ-box (single) 1 1

9-9-1 FrontEnd (US-Part)
511
512
513
514
Figure 9-8 FrontEnd (US-Part)
Table 9-9 FrontEnd (US-Part)
511 CPR82.P11 Beam former Board KTZ196024 Beam former Board 1 1
512 CRW3.P2 CW Doppler Board KTZ196086 CW-Doppler Board 1 1
electrical signal connection between CPV,CPR and

513 CPZ50-50a.P3 Cover Board KTZ195592 1 1
CW-Board; contains Relays for Signal to CW-Board.
514 CRS5.P3 Signal Processing Board KTZ196074 Signal Processing Board 1 1
9-12 Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEZ)

9-9-1 FrontEnd (US-Part) (cont’d)
519
518
520
Figure 9-9 FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d
Table 9-10 FrontEnd (US-Part) cont´d
Electrical Signal- and Supply-Connection for all

518 CPK95.P8 Motherboard V730 KTZ196053 1 1
boards
519 CPP90a.P2 Power Supply Board KTZ208498 Power Supply Board Output Power: 900 W 1 1
520 CPV90a.P6 Module Board KTZ196063 Probe Connector Board, Module Board 1 1

9-9-2 BackEnd Processor (PC-Part)
571
573
572
574
575
577
576
Figure 9-10 Back Processor (PC-Part)
9-14 Section 9-9 - Main Board Module (GEZ)

Table 9-11 Back Processor (PC-Part)
571 CKV85.P7 Video management Board KTZ208497 PC-Video converter Board 1 1
572 CPE80.P5 Motherboard - Extension KTZ195902 Motherboard Extension 1 1
Universal Hard disk for all Voluson 730 Universal Hard disk
573 KTZ196003 1 1
(V730, V730Expert and V730Pro) systems System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-12) is required
574 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) KTZ208791 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) for SBC-Board 1 1
Kit contains ATX Motherboard (“Kontron”) Pentium

IV chip, CPU cooler, ADD2-DVI card,
1Gb RAM, Serial Slot (used only with Kontron types)
SBC “Kontron” Kit (BT´05) and Serial interface cable;
575 KTZ208599 USB cable and HDD cable premounted. 1 1
incl. housing and ADD2-DVI card *
Can replace “Tyan” types, but system “C:” image
MUST be loaded! In this case, System/Boot DVD
(see: Table 9-12) is required
576 ADD2-DVI card for “Kontron” SBC-board * KTZ208615 ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card for “Kontron” ATX 1 1
577 ADD2-DVI card for “Tyan” SBC-board * KTZ208588 ADD2-DVI (Add-On) card for “Tyan” ATX 1 1
* The currently installed Single Board Computer (PC-Board) is shown in the System Setup - System Info page;
see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-2, SLOT_CPU: TYAN or KONTRON

Section 9-10
Options and Upgrades
603
601 602
604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614
Figure 9-11 Options and Upgrades
Table 9-12 Options and Upgrades
601 MO Disk Media 1.3GB KTZ207077 MO-Disk Media (Standard) 1 1
bootable DVD for System HDD recovery (SW5.0.0)

Contents: updated Linux rescue partition, System C: Image
602 System/Boot DVD (SW5.0.0) KTZ196075 1 1
(Windows 2000, Kontron SBC + Tyan SBC supplied),
UISApp, Backup, EUM and Database Repair Tool
603 CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit external H48651HE CW-Doppler Upgrade Kit incl. upgrade instructions N 1
604 Key Cap Kit - Swedish H48651ED kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
605 Key Cap Kit - Danish H48651EE kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
606 Key Cap Kit - Norwegian H48651EF kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
607 Key Cap Kit - Finnish H48651EG kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
608 Key Cap Kit - Spanish H48651EH kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
609 Key Cap Kit - French H48651JD kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
610 Key Cap Kit - German H48651JE kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
611 Key Cap Kit - Italian H48651JF kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
612 Key Cap Kit - Portuguese H48651JG kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
613 Key Cap Kit - Polish H48651JJ kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
614 Key Cap Kit - Dutch H48651JL kit includes special native language keys + tool for pulling out N 1
9-16 Section 9-10 - Options and Upgrades

Section 9-11
Miscellaneous Cables
Table 9-13 Miscellaneous Cables
Splits the PS2 connector for GEU User Interface

(mouse and PC-keyboard
701 Adapter Cable PS2 Y-splitter KTZ208585 1 1
Power cable for Harddisk 4pin
702 Power Cable for Harddisk KTZ212401 1 1
HDD power connector to Pentium4 power connector
703 Cable ATX 12Volt KTZ212267 1 1
Flat cable(s) from CKV to CPK board, 40pin (1 pcs.)
704 Cable ATA CKV -> CPK board (40 pin) KTZ212453 3 1

Serial Interface Cable (only used in combination with

“Kontron” SBC-boards)
705 Cable RS-232 Loop KTZ208617 1 1
Power connection cable from CPP-board to Pentium IV

SBC and to the Hard diskr
706 Power Cable Set ATX KTZ208591 1 1
Cable from PC-Sound-StereoJack to External Rear

Panel
707 Cable Stereo Jack - Chinch KTZ212074 1 1
Data cable for IDE-Hard disk 40pin
708 Data Cable HDD ATA66/100 KTZ208147 1 1
External Rear Panel with electrical Signal- and Supply-

Connection-Cables to the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
Main-Unit (internal) Rear-Panel.
709 GES8 I/O Connection Panel KTZ195901 1 1
9-18 Section 9-11 - Miscellaneous Cables

Electrical Power-Supply for Drives (5V/12V)
710 KGS10 Cable Power GEM-GEZ KTZ195464 1 1
VCR -Remote Control Cable
711 KUG5 Remote Cable KTZ195606 1 1
electrical-Signal-Connection between CRS and SBC

(only used in combination with “Tyan” SBC-boards)
712 KVS2 Cable Serial Interface KTZ195717 1 1
Cable from external rear Panel to the Voluson® 730Pro

/ 730ProV Main-Unit (internal) rear-Panel 1m
713 KVX1 Network Cable KTZ212016 1 1
Line cord for Supply from Main-Device to Sub-Devices
714 Monitor Power Connection Cable KTZ212116 1 1

Power Cord Europe 230V/240V
715 Power Cord Europe 230V KTZ212317 1 1
Power Cord Japan Hospital Grade
716 Power Cord Japan (Hosp. grade) KTZ212448 1 1
Power Cord United Kingdom 240V
717 Power Cord UK KTZ212441 1 1
Power Cord USA Hospital Grade
718 Power Cord USA (Hosp.grade) KTZ212402 1 1

Set contains two parts:

Not to be used at Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05)
systems
719 USB to SBC-Board KTZ207029 1 1
USB for PC-Slot, Connector on Backpanel.

Cables are connected to PC-Board.
Leads the USB-signals to the PC-Backpanel
USB Cable from Disk Drive Module (GEM) to connector

“USB-GEM” on the PC-part of main board module (GEZ)
720 USB Cable A to B KTZ212125 1 1

(from GEM to PC-part on GEZ)
VGA cable HD15-HD15
721 VGA cable HD15-HD15 KTZ212275 1 1

Cable TMDS (Digital Video Cable from ADD-On DVI

Output to CKV)
Cable TMDS
722 (Digital Video cable from Add-On DVI KTZ208574 1 1
Output to CKV)
USB -> -RS-232 Adapter

Data Cable for (optional) Global Modem
723
USB -> RS-232 Adapter KTZ212114 1 1
(Modem Data Cable)
Power Connection Cable for (optional) Global Modem
724 Modem Power Connection Cable KTZ212032 1 1

Section 9-12
Optional Peripherals and Accessories
802
801
804
803
805
806
807
810
808
809
Figure 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Table 9-14 Optional Peripherals and Accessories
KTZ211332
801 Sony B/W Video Printer UP-895MD (CE) NTSC/PAL 1 1
(H46801A)
802 PPP55 Connection Set KTZ195643 Connection Set UP-895MD 1 1
KTZ211373
803 Sony Digital Color Printer UP-D23MD USB-Port 1 1
(H46831B)
804 PZP60 Connection Set KTZ195776 Connection Set UP-D23MD 1 1
KTZ211503
805 (Bluetooth) Printer HP 5600 Series USB-Port (Bluetooth Connection Set is required) 1 1
(H46631L)
KTZ211503
806 (Bluetooth) Printer Olivetti Job Set 210 USB-Port (Bluetooth Connection Set is required)
(H46631L)
KTZ196002
807 Bluetooth Connection Set Bluetooth Connection Set (HP 5600 Series only) 1 1
(H46631M)
KTZ211368
808 Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000U NTSC (can replace Sony VCR SVO-9500 MD) 1 1
(H46801D)
KTZ211369
809 Mitsubishi VCR HS-MD3000E PAL (can replace Sony VCR SVO-9500 MDP) 1 1
(H46801C)
810 PRR50 Connection Set KTZ195492 Connection Set for VCR without remote control 1 1
9-24 Section 9-12 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Section 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories (cont’d)
813 814
812
816
815
Figure 9-13 Optional Peripherals and Accessories cont´d
Table 9-15 Optional Peripherals and Accessories cont´d
KTZ195446
812 Foot switch (MFT7) Foot switch 1 1
(H46681D)
KTZ154644 consists of ECG-preamplifier and patient connection

813 ECG-preamplifier (MAN 6) 1 1
(H46681H) cable
2245794 Global Modem analog (Common Part with L9 and V7)

814 Global Modem (Analog) 1 1
(H48651HF) use modem cable: KTZ212114 + KTZ212032
KTZ195858 Converter from USB to RS-232 Serial Port

815 USB-RS232 Connection kit PRY 1 1
(H46681S) (Connection Module - Report data)
contains blue, dark-gray, bright-gray and black

816 Touch-up Paint Set (gray-blue) KTZ154680 1 1
4x 2cl bottles incl. brush

Table 9-16 System Manuals
Item Part Name Part Number Kretz # Description Qty FRU
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) Service Manual KTI105991 KTI105991 1 N
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) Proprietary Service Manual KTI105992 KTI105992 N
System User Manuals
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), English H48651FR KTI105974 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), German H48651FS KTI105978 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Spanish H48651FT KTI105979 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), H48651FW KTI105980 N

Portuguese
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Italian H48651FY KTI105981 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), French H48651FZ KTI105982 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Chinese H48651G KTI105983 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), H48651GA KTI105984 N

Japanese
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), H48651HW KTI106010 N

Mandarin TR
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Danish H48651HX KTI106011 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Dutch H48651HY KTI106012 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Finnish H48651HZ KTI106013 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Greek H48651J KTI106014 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05),

H48651JP KTI106015 N
Norwegian
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Polish H48651JA KTI106016 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Russian H48651JB KTI106017 N
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), H48651JC KTI106018 N

Swedish
Basic User Manual, Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), Turkish Hxxxxxx KTI106021 N
Advanced Reference Manual

H48651FE KTI106019 N
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05), English
9-26 Section 9-12 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories

Section 9-13
Probes
9-13-1 2D-Probes
901 902 903
904 905
Figure 9-14 2D curved array Transducers
Table 9-17 2D curved array Transducers
KTZ195757 electronic broadband curved array transducer, frequency range of 2-7 MHz
901 AB2-7 1
(H46701T) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Pediatrics
902 AC2-5 1
(H46701U) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Pediatrics
903 4C-A 1
(H46701AA) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology
electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer with a

KTZ195386
904 IC5-9 frequency range of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150° 1
(H46701F) Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology
5118195 electronic endocavity broadband curved array transducer with a

905 IC5-9H frequency range of 5-9 MHz and a field-of-view of max. 150° 1
(H40422LL)
Applications: Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology

9-13-1 2D-Probes (cont’d)
907 908
909
911
910
Figure 9-15 2D linear- and phased array Transducers
Table 9-18 2D linear- and phased array Transducers
KTZ195530 electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 4-10 MHz,
907 SP4-10 electronically steerable 1
(H46701A) Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 6-12 MHz,

KTZ195362
(H46701B) Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
KTZ195531 electronic broadband linear array transducer, frequency range of 10-16 MHz,
(H46701C)
Applications: Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
KTZ195773 electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 2-5 MHz
910 PA2-5P 1
(H46701V) Applications: Abdominal, Cardiology, Transcranial
KTZ195532 electronic broadband phased array transducer, frequency range of 6-8 MHz
911 PA6-8 1
(H46701J) Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics/Neonatology
9-28 Section 9-13 - Probes

9-13-2 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
921 923
922 924 925
926
Figure 9-16 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Table 9-19 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a

KTZ156736
921 RAB2-5 frequency range of 2-5MHz. 1
(H46701M) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology
KTZ156767 Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a

922 RAB4-8P frequency range of 4-8MHz. 1
(H46701N)
Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology

923 RAB2-5L* frequency range of 2-5MHz. 1
(H48621X) Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional Radiology
Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array transducer with a

KTZ156846
924 RAB4-8L* frequency range of 4-8MHz. 1
(H48621Z) Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology
KTZ195763 Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a

925 RSP5-12 frequency range of 5-12MHz and a scan width of 40 mm. 1
(H46701W)
Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
KTZ156965 Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer with a

926 RSP6-16 frequency range of 6-16 MHz and a scan width of 40 mm. 1
(H46701AB) Applications: Small Parts, Periph.Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
NOTICE * NOT applicable on the Voluson® 730Pro V.

9-13-2 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes (cont’d)
927
928 929
Figure 9-17 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Table 9-20 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved array transducer with

KTZ195242
927 RIC5-9 a frequency range of 5-9MHz. 1
(H46701R) Applications: Gynecology/Fertility, Obstetrics, Urology

928 RIC5-9H frequency range of 4-8MHz. 1
(H48651DA)
Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Interventional Radiology
KTZ156936 Real-time 4D neonatal broadband electronic curved array transducer with a

929 RNA5-12* frequency range of 5-9MHz. 1
(H48651DB) Applications: Obstetrics, Pediatrics/Neonatology, Cardiology, Small Parts
NOTICE * NOT applicable on the Voluson® 730Pro V.
9-30 Section 9-13 - Probes

9-13-3 CW-Pencil Probes
931 932
Figure 9-18 CW- Pencil Probes
Table 9-21 CW- Pencil Probes
KTZ195540 single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a
931 PCW4.0 nominal operating frequency of 4.0 MHz (no B-image) 1
(H46701L)
Applications: Cardiology, Pediatrics
KTZ195538 single element Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a
932 SCW2.0 nominal operating frequency of 2.0 MHz (no B-image) 1
(H46701K) Applications: Cardiology (suprasternal)

Section 9-14
Biopsy Needle Guides
851
850
853
852
856
854 855
858
857
860
859
861
862
Figure 9-19 Biopsy Needle Guides
9-32 Section 9-14 - Biopsy Needle Guides

Table 9-22 Biopsy Needle Guides
***** disposable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H

850 E8385MJ N
(disposable) needle diameter: < 1.65 mm
***** reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9H

851 H40412LN N
(reusable) needle diameter: < 1.65 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9

852 PEC42 H46721F N
needle diameter: < 1.8 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RIC5-9 / RIC5-9H

853 PEC63 H46721R N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe SP6-12

854 PEC64 H46721B N
needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5 / RAB4-8P

855 PEC65 H46721M N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16

856 PEC68 H46721P needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm N
(can be replaced by PEC75)
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RRE6-10

857 PEC69 H46721S N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe AB2-7

858 PEC71 H46721D N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5L / RAB4-8L

859 PEC74 H48621Y N
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP5-12 / RSP6-16

860 PEC75 H46721W needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm N
(can replace PEC68)
reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RNA5-9

861 PEC76 H48651DG N
3.5C Biopsy Starter Kit for probe AC2-5

862 3.5C Biopsy Kit E8385MG N
needle diameter: > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm

Section 9-15
Compatibility (Overview)
• BAT = Battery
• CAB = Cable
• PCB = Printed Circuit Board
• PWS = Power Supply
• SPA = Spare part
Table 9-23 Compatibility (Overview)
If replaceable by Can this part

Prime
Category Detailed Part Description successor, new replace old
Part number
compatible Part no. part?
BAT KTZ208791 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) N
CAB KTZ208585 Adapter Cable PS2 Y-splitter (for GEU User Interface) N
CAB KTZ212453 Flat cable ATA from CKV -> CPK board (40 pin) N
CAB KTZ212267 Cable ATX 12Volt N
CAB KTZ208617 Cable RS-232 Loop N
CAB KTZ212074 Cable Stereo Jack - Chinch N
CAB KTZ208574 Cable TMDS (Digital Video cable) N
CAB KTZ208147 Data cable HDD ATA66/100 N
CAB KTZ195464 KGS10 Cable Power GEM-GEZ N
CAB KTZ195606 KUG5 remote cable N
CAB KTZ195717 KVS2 Cable Serial Interface N
CAB KTZ212016 KVX1 Network Cable N
CAB KTZ212032 Modem Power Connection Cable N
CAB KTZ212116 Monitor Power Connection Cable N
CAB KTZ212401 Power Cable for Hard disk N
CAB KTZ208591 Power Cable Set ATX N
CAB KTZ212317 Power Cord EUROPE 230V N
CAB KTZ212448 Power Cord JAPAN (Hosp. Grade) N
CAB KTZ212441 Power Cord UK N
CAB KTZ212402 Power Cord USA (Hosp. Grade) N
CAB KTZ2121125 USB Cable A to B (from GEM to PC-part on GEZ) N
CAB KTZ212114 USB -> RS-232 Adapter (Modem Data Cable) N
CAB KTZ207029 USB to SBC-Board N
CAB KTZ212275 VGA cable HD15-HD15 N
PCB KTZ208615 ADD2-DVI card for “Kontron” SBC-board N
PCB KTZ208588 ADD2-DVI card for “Tyan” SBC-board N
9-34 Section 9-15 - Compatibility (Overview)


Prime
Part number
PCB KTZ154737 Caps Rubber (8 pcs.) N
PCB KTZ214798 Caps for Rotation digipots incl. brackets (8 pcs.) N
PCB KTZ212818 Caps for TGC Slider-potentiometer incl. brackets (8 pcs.) N
PCB KTZ209339 CCF100.P1 Power Primary Board N
PCB KTZ208497 CKV85.P7 Video management Board N
PCB KTZ195902 CPE80.P5 Motherboard-Extension N
PCB KTZ196053 CPK95c.P8 Motherboard N
PCB KTZ208498 CPP90a.P2 Power Supply Board N
PCB KTZ196024 CPR82.P11 Beamformer Board Y
PCB KTZ196063 CPV90a.P6 Module Board (BYM) N
PCB KTZ209338 CPY80.P1 Power Switch N
PCB KTZ195891 CRB1c.P1 USB to IDE Converter Board N
PCB KTZ196074 CRS5.P3 Signal Processing Board Y
PCB KTZ195592 CPZ50-50a.P3 Cover Board N
PCB KTZ196086 CRW3.P2 CW Doppler Board N
PCB KTZ208599 SBC “Kontron” Kit (BT´05) incl. housing and ADD2-DVI card N
PWS KTZ207486 CPN80-81 Primary Power Supply Module Y
SPA KTZ208217 Alpha-numeric keyboard Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N
SPA KTZ208109 Blind Cap for rear screws N
SPA KTZ14M871 Blind Cap for Wheel N
SPA KTZ214799 Bottom housing of GEU, painted N
SPA KTZ212115 Color Monitor 15" Voluson 730Expert/Pro N
SPA KTZ207257 Disk Drive IDE DVD+(R)W N
SPA KTZ207269 Disk Drive IDE MOD 1.3GB N
SPA KTZ14B596 Distance Rod for GEU8 N
SPA KTZ207602 Fan axial 62x62x14mm N
SPA KTZ154738 Fan for GEZ-box (2 fan) N
SPA KTZ154679 Fan for GEZ-box (single) N
SPA KTZ195440 Fan for Primary Power Supply (KVN2) N
SPA KTZ134467 Foot rest N
SPA KTZ209344 Front Handle User Interface N
SPA KTZ209341 Fuse 16A, 6.3x32 N
SPA KTZ209342 Fuse 3.2A, 6.3x32 N
SPA KTZ209343 Fuse 1.6A, 6.3x32 N


Prime
Part number
SPA KTZ154666 Gel Holder (PHG1) complete for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N
SPA KTZ196000 GEM11-11A MO-Drive + DVD+(R)W N
SPA KTZ196001 GEM21-21A DVD+(R)W N
SPA KTZ195901 GES8 I/O Connection Panel (BT03) N
SPA KTZ154730 GEU70 User Interface Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) Y
SPA KTZ154734 GW140 Trolley Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV (BT´05) Y
SPA KTZ154736 Guide for Probe Cables (includes 4 hooks + mounting rail) N
Hard disk “Universal” for all Voluson 730 systems

SPA KTZ196003 Y
(V730, V730Expert and V730Pro)
SPA KTZ208284 Hardkey Board for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N
SPA KTZ2200018 Hinge for Foot rest N
SPA KTZ154701 Key Cap Kit - Danish N
SPA KTZ154704 Key Cap Kit - Spanish N
SPA KTZ154178 Key Cap Kit - Norwegian N
SPA KTZ154719 Key Cap Kit - Swedish N
SPA KTZ154720 Key Cap Kit - Finnish N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - French N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - German N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - Italian N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - Portuguese N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - Polish N
SPA KTZxxxxx Key Cap Kit - Dutch N
SPA KTZ207558 Keytop Kit Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N
SPA KTZ208132 Loudspeaker for Top Console N
SPA KTZ209340 Mains Power Switch and Input Connector N
SPA KTZ134474 Monitor Base Covers N
SPA KTZ208445 Monitor Front Housing (Set) N
SPA KTZ208446 Monitor Housing (Set) N
SPA KTZ134110 Monitor Mounting Plate Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N
SPA 2300008 Monitor Switch Assembly (common part with L5 and L3) N
SPA KTZ209346 Probe Holder Kit Y
SPA KTZ154717 Pull-out Protection for Mains Power cable incl. screws N
SPA KTZ134468 Rear Handle for Trolley Y
SPA KTZ154728 Rear Metal Cover Plate complete Y


Prime
Part number
SPA KTZ211081 Rear Wheel (Ø175 mm x 32) N
SPA KTZ154735 Side Panel Kit (eft and right) incl. cable and plastic guide N
SPA KTZ207125 Standby Switch 24V/15A N
SPA KTZ211080 Steerable Wheel N
SPA 2317347 Task Lamp (common part with L5 and L3) N
SPA KTZ208119 Top Cover for Trolley N
SPA KTZ214819 Top housing of GEU70, painted N
SPA KTZ208264 Trackball Kit N
SPA KTZ208256 Trackball top fixation ring N
SPA KTZ208257 Wheel control Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV N


Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV system does not have
any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are
mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or
inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.

This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and its peripherals. These procedures are
intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance.
Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

10-1 Overview 10-1
10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2
10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2
10-4 Tools Required 10-5
10-5 System Maintenance 10-8
10-6 Using a Phantom 10-13
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-13
10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-29
Ultrasound INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 10-30
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,

AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND SWITCH OFF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
(F1) BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER
IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-1

Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see: page 10-30) provides the customer with
documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room
or near the scanner.
10-2-2 Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The
program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate
designer.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (see: page 10-3) specifies how often your Voluson® 730Pro /
730ProV should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV care & maintenance is
performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowlegde of your Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV
ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service.
Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule
assumes that you use your Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV for an average patient load (10-12 per day)
and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to
increase the maintenance frequencies.
Abbreviations used in the Periodic Maintenance Schedule Table 10-2:
• D = Daily
• W = Weekly
• M = Monthly
• A = Annually
10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)
Table 10-2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes
Clean the air filter grid with vacuum cleaner

Air Filter Grid from outside (left side of the system front • more frequently depending on
your environment
view).
Remove back panel and board chassis and

Air Filter Grid clean the housing from inside. (vacuum • more frequently depending on
your environment
cleaner and soft brush)
AC Mains Cable Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check weekly
Remove the Back Panel and check if all

cables are well seated and if there is no
Cables and Connectors mechanical damage visible; • also after corrective
maintenance
Check if they are fixed and well seated at the
correct position.
Clean alphanumerical keyboard, Functional Be careful not to get the cloth

User Interface
keys, Digital potentiometers, TGC-Shift
potentiometers. (vacuum cleaner, lukewarm
• too wet so that moisture does
not enter the loudspeakers,
soap water on a soft, damp cloth) TGC-Slider, or other keys!
Clean Top surface, Monitor and Probe Be careful not to get the cloth
Monitor holder with a fluid detergent in warm water • too wet so that moisture does
on a soft, damp cloth. not enter the entire system.
Clean and inspect the mechanical function

of wheels, casters, brakes and swivel locks
Mechanical parts as well as side door, foot rest, front and rear • Mobile Unit Check Daily
handle, and monitor holder.
Remove Dust and Coupling gel.
Control Panel
movement
Check Turn mechanism • Mobile Unit Check Daily
Trackball Check
Check proper operation
(Cursor movement X, Y direction)
• If failure occurs go to trackball
cleaning.
Remove top trackball cover; open the

Trackball Cleaning
trackball housing and take out the trackball.
Clean the X, Y axes of the trackball (soft
• Please record it in the systems
setup maintenance report
tissue and screwdriver shaft.
Power on the system. After complete boot

Error log process check the data in the Error log. after corrective maintenance
(Major for stuck keys at the user interface)
Check key operation (very important if after corrective maintenance

Key Operation
problems are recorded in error log) Use keyboard test software.
* save the image filing data

Disk Drives
(Sonoview Data
Test Image filing (Sonoview) Import and
Export data capability (MO-, CD RW Drive)
• •* monthly or weekly on CD
depending on the number of
Backup)
examinations
Clean probes and probe cables and check

acoustic lens housing (cracks) and probe
Safe Probe Operation cables. In case of mechanical damage, •* * or before each use
don’t use them! Danger: Safety risk for
operator and patient.

Table 10-2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes
To detect air bubbles in filling liquid, shake

Probe Air bubbles the probe carefully and check abnormal
noise.
Probe connectors
Remove dust/dirt of all probe connectors.
Clean with vacuum cleaner if dust is visible.
•
Check actual software version and update if
recommended. Record version after the
update. Caution: Probe settings (Backup’s)
Software Version modified by the doctor need to be saved in • Also after corrective
maintenance.
advance. The new implemented backup’s
have to be modified manually following the
doctors need.
Enter data (Maintenance-/Upgrade-/Repair-

report to the Service database at the
Report to service
database
system. Note system configuration. • Also after corrective
maintenance.
The Data entry mask will appear
automatically after reboot the system.
System hour meter

Record the system hour meter value.
(only full hours)
• Also after corrective
maintenance.
Service database
Export System Status, System Data, Event
log to MO-Drive, or send it via Internet.
• Also after corrective
maintenance.
Also after corrective

Console Leakage
Current Checks
• maintenance or as required by
your facilities QA program.

Peripheral Leakage
Current Checks

Surface Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Endocavity Probe
Leakage Twice Annually
Current Checks

Measurement Accuracy
Checks
Check axial and lateral resolution (see Basic

User Manual Technical specifications).
Check Gain and TGC changes, vary the Also after corrective
Probe/Phantom Checks focus and check reaction on screen. Check • maintenance or as required by
deviation of brightness in the US-Image your facilities QA program.
(missing elements / probe cable defect).
Probe must be coupled as this test.
Functional Checks Check general functions and image Also after corrective
of all probes Section 10- appearance at human body with all • maintenance or as required by
5-2 on page 10-9 available Modes. your facilities QA program.
If you detected problems during the last test

Beamformer Test
Software
steps, perform Beamformer Test. •* * or in case of fault assumption
(Beamformer Self Test software)
10-4 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule

Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1 Standard GE Tool Kit
The following is a description of the “Standard” GE tool kit in the USA. Not all tools are required for PMs.
Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents
Tool ID Description Tool ID Description
9-45358 Pliers Retaining Ring 9-XL9971MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.27mm
9-4078 Scribe 9-XL9972MM Xcelite-hex Blade 1.5mm
9-44572 Wrench Open End 3/8 - 7/16 9-XL9973MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2 mm
9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9974MM Xcelite-hex Blade 2.5mm
9-44579 Wrench Open End 1/2 - 9/16 9-XL9975MM Xcelite-hex Blade 3mm
9-45385 Pliers, Arc Joint 7 inch 9-XL9976MM Xcelite-hex Blade 4mm
9-45378 Pliers, Slip Joint 9-XL9977MM Xcelite-hex Blade 5mm
9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature 9-XL991CM Handle
9-4518 Pliers, Long Nose, Miniature C2356E Screw starter - Kedman Quick Wedge
9-44776 Ignition Wrench Set, 10 pc. BLBO Box - 18 Compartment
9-44601 Wrench, Adj., 4 inch DWL4283T Box - 5 Compartment
9-4151 Screwdriver, Blade, Stubby 9-41322 Pickup Tool, Claw type
9-41421 Screwdriver, Blade, Pocket clip 9-6757 6 pc Needle File Set
9-41594 Screwdriver, Blade 1/8 in. x 4 in. 9-9487 Utility Knife
9-41581 Screwdriver, Blade 3/16 in. x 4 in. 9-45341 Pliers Vice Grip 10 inch
9-39451 20' Steel Tape, locking Spring load 9-3001 Xacto Pen Knife
9-GH807 Ratchet, Offset, Slotted 9-HT62002 Solder Aid, Fork and Hook
68-412 Ratchet, Offset, Phillips 9-4099 Mirror, Round, Telescoping
9-GH130 Tapered Reamer 9-GH3001 Steel Rule Decimal 6 inch
9-41584 Screwdriver, slotted 1/4 in.X 6 in. 9-GH300ME Steel Rule Metric 6 inch
9-4118 Screwdriver, Phillips #2, Stubby 9-XL9920 Xcelite-hex Blade.050 inch
9-41293 Screwdriver, Phillips #0 9-XL9921 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/16 inch
9-46677 Hex Keys, 20 pc., Metric 9-XL9924 Xcelite-hex Blade 1/8 inch
9-34701 1/4 in. Standard.Socket set (19 pc) 9-XL9925 Xcelite-hex Blade 5/32 inch
9-43499 1/2 inch Socket 1/4 inch drive 9-XL9926 Xcelite-hex Blade 3/16 inch
9-4355 Flex Spinner 9-XL99764 Xcelite-hex Blade 7/64
9-43523 Breaker 9-XL99964 Xcelite-hex Blade 9/64
9-43531 6 inch Ext. 9-XLM60 Mini-screwdriver kit

Table 10-3 Overview of GE-1 Tool Kit Contents (Continued)
9-65283 Case 8.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2 in. Deep 9-45072 Pliers 6 inch Diagonal
9-46696 Hex Keys 9-XL100X Wire Stripper/Cutter 5 inch - 100X
9-39829 Torpedo Level, Magnetic 9-XL87CG Pliers - very fine needle nose-87CG
9-38461 Hammer, Ball Peen, 4 oz 9-WEWDT-07 Weller-Soldering-Replacement Tip(1)
9-4280 Universal Joint 1/4 inch 9-WS175-E Wiss - Surgical Scissors
9-WEW60P3 Weller - Soldering Iron, 3 wire KH174 Hemostat 5 inch Straight
9-WECT5B6 Weller - Soldering Iron Tip KH175 Hemostat 5 inch curved
9-WEWDP12 Weller - Desoldering Pump 9-Z9480121 Alignment tool (red)
93383 Flashlight Mini-Mag Lite (AAA Bat.)
9-GH408 Tweezers
21576 Brush - Bristle
9-4516 Pliers 4 1/4 inch Diagonal
Table 10-4 Overview of GE-2 Tool Kit Contents
GE-2 Sears Kit (#99034)
9-45381 Pliers, Arc Joint 9 1/2 inch 9-44067 Socket 1 1/16 in. for 1/2 in. drive
9-45092 Pliers, Linesman 8 1/2 inch 9-42679 Socket 10MM Hex for 1/2 in. drive (2273333)
9-42882 Punch, Pin 3/32 inch 9-44262 Extension 10 inch for 1/2 in. drive (2273405)
9-42884 Punch, Pin 5/32 inch 9-4258 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch Adapter
9-42886 Punch, Pin 1/4 inch 9-34374 3/8 inch Metric Socket Set - 12 PT
9-42973 Cold Chisel 1/2 inch 9-44311 16mm Socket 12 pt.
9-GH77 Center Punch Automatic 9-33485 Metal Socket Tray
9-GH890 File Handle, Adj. 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray
9-31276 File, Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-33484 Metal Socket Tray
9-31277 File, Half Round, Bastard 8 inch 9-52068 Tap and Drill Set
9-31263 File, Flat Mill 8 inch 9-52722 #6 Tap
21045C Close Quarter Saw 9-52723 #8 Tap
9-44604 Wrench, Adj 10 inch High Speed Drill Set
9-41587 Screwdriver 5/16 inch x 8 inch #36 Drill
9-41586 Screwdriver, Stubby 5/16 inch #29 Drill
9-GH19512 Countersink 1/2 inch 9-44046 3/8 inch Socket Set
9-44741 12 PC Combination Wrench Set
10-6 Section 10-4 - Tools Required

10-4-2 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
10-4-2-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-5 Overview of Requirements for Periodic Maintenance
Tool Part Number Comments

Digital Volt Meter (DVM) minimum 5% accuracy, 3.5 digit and 200 Ohm range required
Electric Safety Analyzer DALE 600 46-285652G1 For 120V Unit
Electric Safety Analyzer DALE
46-328406G2 For 220V Units
600E
Leakage Current Ultrasound Kit 2113015 For 120V and 220V Units
46–194427P231 Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240
46–194427P279 V system
Anti Static Kit 46–194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
46–194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord
46–194427P278 120V
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
46–194427P279 230V
Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
E7010GG 60 minute
SVHS VCR Cassette
E7010GF 120 minute
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner see VCR user manual for requirements
E8381AA blank 128 M disk

3.5” MOD MEDIA E8381AB blank 230 M disk
KTZ207077 blank 1.3 GB MO-disk
3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes
3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads
QIQ Phantom E8370RB RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS
CD-RW Media (minimum quad speed)
DVD+RW Disc Media blank H48641D blank 4.7GB DVD+RW disc
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
Screwdriver PH0
Screwdriver PH1
Screwdriver PH2

Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
Table 10-6 System Preliminary Checks
Step Item Description

1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
Fill in the top of the Periodic Maintenance (PM) Inspection Certificate. Note all probes and system
2 Paperwork
options.
3 Power up Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.
Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor.
6 Presets “Full Backup” all customer presets on Hard disk and/or DVD (see: Section 4-5-3 "Save Full Backup
(Presets, Configurations & Application Settings)" on page 4-35).
10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

10-5-2 Functional Checks (see also Chapter 4)

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System Checks
Table 10-7 System Functional Checks
1 B Mode Verify basic B Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode
of operation.
2 M Mode Verify basic M Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
operation.
Verify basic CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that
3 C Mode
affect this mode of operation.
4 PD Mode Verify basic PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls
that affect this mode of operation.
5 Doppler Modes Verify basic Doppler Mode operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system
controls that affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic 3D Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
6 3D Mode
operation.
Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Real Time 4D, RT_4D Biopsy*,
*Applicable Software VOCAL II*, DICOM*, STIC* (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation), VCI* (Volume Contrast
7
Options Imaging), SRI* (Speckle Reduction Imaging), TUI* (Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging) etc.
Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.
8 Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
9 Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions.
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area
10 Measurements calculation accuracy. Refer to the Basic User Manual, Chapter 13, for measurement
accuracy specifications.
NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.

10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
Refer to Table 3-8, “Approved Peripherals,” on page 53 for a list of approved peripherals.
Table 10-8 Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 Line Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Line printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
5 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
6 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
DVD and/or Verify that the DVD-drive and/or optional MO-drive reads/writes properly
7
MO-Drive (export/recall images in Sonoview).
8 Modem Verify modem remote connection.
9 ECG Verify basic operation with customer.
10-5-3 Input Power
10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-9 Mains Cable Inspection

1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
3 Verify Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that
no strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.
10-5-4 Cleaning
10-5-4-1 General Cleaning
Table 10-10 General Cleaning
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system.
1 Console
Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
3 Monitor Clean Top surface and Monitor and with a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth.

10-5-5 Physical Inspection
Table 10-11 Physical Checks

1 Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition.
2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in acceptable direction. Ensure that
4
Movement it latches in position as required.
Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from
5 Wheels & Brakes moving, and release mechanism. Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper
operation.
6 Cables & Connectors Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating.
Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.
7 Shielding & Covers Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
Check for proper operation of all operator panel key illuminations (flash once during system start-
9 Op Panel Lights
up).
10 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel key illuminations (use keyboard test software).
11 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
12 External Microphone Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test if available.
NOTICE There is no Microphone built in and released for Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.

10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks

Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7.
View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1 View the Logs

1.) Review the system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.
10-5-7 Probe Maintenance
10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks
Table 10-12 Probe Related Checks

1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector
2 Probes
sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.
10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care

The Basic User Manual provides a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and
disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. Review the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious
injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning

Refer to the Basic User Manual of Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV for details on cleaning.
NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made
of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing
so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the
probe.
NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.

Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
Refer to the User Manual of the Phantom for information on using a phantom and quality assurance
tests. For measurement accuracy of the system review chapter 13.7 of the Basic User Manual of
Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV. To get comparable results, use Multi-purpose phantom, Model 539-05
from ATS Laboratories Inc.
Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC
60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of
cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer
to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT
LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT
SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO
PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause
injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and
a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:
• Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way

• Check probe leakage current:
* once a year on surface probes
* twice a year on endocavitary probes
* whenever probe damage is suspected

10-7-2 GEMS Leakage Current Limits

The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment
Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above
standards listed.
Table 10-13 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral
USA N/A 0.3 mA 0.3 mA N/A
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
Table 10-14 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface
and Cavity Probes
Normal
Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied
USA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA N/A
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA 5.0 mA
Table 10-15 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG
Connections
Normal
Country Condition Open Ground Reverse Polarity Open Neutral *Mains Applied
USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA N/A 0.025 mA
Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
NOTE: *Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the
part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted
mains voltage.
The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are:
grounding continuity, chassis leakage current, probe leakage current, and ECG leakage current. All
measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer Model 600/600E built by Dale Technology
Corporation or equivalent device.
10-14 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester
The Dale 600 has self-contained lamps designed for testing the outlet wiring arrangement. Plug the
Dale 600 into each outlet to be tested comparing the lamp status.
.
Combination
of
Lights
CORRECT REVERSE OPEN OPEN HOT/GROUND

Condition POLARITY GROUND
WIRING HOT REVERSED
Figure 10-2 Dale 600 Outlet Test
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

10-7-4 Grounding Continuity

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohm.
Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1-1.
Figure 10-3 Ground Continuity Test
10-7-4-1 Meter Procedure

Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV unit.
4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.
5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

10-7-4-2 Dale 600 - Ground Continuity

The Dale 600 measures line cord resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the meter’s
Chassis Cable clamp. Test the grounding continuity of the system to all exposed metal parts in
accordance with the IEC 601-1.1 procedure as above. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for
meter self tests and operation. Record measured resistance of the grounding continuity. The ground
wire resistance should be less than 0.2 (Use any safety analyzer.)
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions Normal
Selector Reverse
Polarity
Neutral
Open/Closed
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
Figure 10-4 Dale 600 Ground Continuity Test

10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
10-7-5-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal
parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power
line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.
Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and
Reversed. Record the highest reading.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY
switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
10-7-5-2 Generic Procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from
accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF,
with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current,

IEC 60601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and
Patient, Auxiliary Currents
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall
outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places
the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated
in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in
Table 10-13.

10-7-5-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure

When measuring system chassis currents with the Dale 600, always use the CHASSIS selection of the
external/chassis function switch. This requires the ground clip lead and changing the meters switches
in accordance with the IEC 601-1.1. Refer to the Dale 600 Instruction Manual for meter self-test and
operation. Record the highest leakage current measured.
Follow these steps to test the unit for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV.
4.) Set the tester's “FUNCTION” switch to CHASSIS position.
Outlet Test
Lamps
Functions Normal
Selector Reverse
Polarity
Neutral
Open/Closed
Chassis
Cable
Clamp
Figure 10-6 Ground and Chassis Leakage Current Test
5.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST CONDITION
1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle
2 Wheel support
3 Mounting screw for CRT housing
4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
6.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site.
10-7-5-4 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-13. Record all data
on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Tester Neutral Test 1

Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional
Unit Power Switch Switch Connector Wheel CRT Test 4 Test 5
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REV OPEN

OFF REV CLOSED
10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
10-7-6-1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The
meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching
some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with
power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each
combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case
condition.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise,
the unit may be damaged.


Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead
switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Appliance power switch

(use both "off" and "on" positions) Patient lead selector switch (if any)
The connection is at service entrance (activated as required)
or on the supply side of a separately
Polarity reversing switch
derived system
(use both positions) Patient connected leads
Appliance
H (Black)
H
POWER
N
OUTLET
N (White)
G Internal
circuitry Between each patient
lead and ground
G (Green)
Building Insulating surface

ground
Current meter
Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot
"open" and "closed" positions) N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-7 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated

Patient Leads
10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure

The Dale 600 provides five snap type ECG buttons for testing patient leads. Snap on all patient leads
to the meter and assure that the ground clip is connected to the system’s ground terminal. Select the
meter’s LEAD-GND function. Select and test each ECG lead positions (except “ALL”) of the LEAD
selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in “PATIENT LEAD LEAKAGE” table
in the “PM CHECKLIST”. Record the highest leakage current measured for each Power selection.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
Follow these steps to test the ECG module for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Voluson® 730Pro / 730ProV unit.
4.) Connect the patient leads to the corresponding snaps located at the upper front of the Dale 600/
600E. Lead nomenclature for this test is not important.

10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)
ECG
Patient
Cable
ECG
Lead
Selector
ISO
Rocker
Switch
Figure 10-8 ECG Leakage Current Test
5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO GROUND position to measure the patient lead to
ground leakage current.
6.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
power condition combinations.
Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions
ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch

ON NORM CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN

OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF REVERSE OPEN

10-7-6-3 Dale 600 Meter Procedure (cont’d)

7.) Record the patient lead to ground leakage current measured on the data sheet.
8.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD TO LEAD position to measure the lead to lead leakage
current.
9.) Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
10.)Record the lead to lead leakage current measured on the data sheet.
11.)Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to LEAD ISO position to measure the patient lead isolation
current.
12.)Select and test each ECG lead positions (except ALL) of the LEAD selector, testing each to the
13.)Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST and read the isolation current. To apply the voltage to the
lead safely, the voltage is only applied when the rocker switch is depressed to ISO TEST.
14.)Record the patient lead isolation current measured on the data sheet.
10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL)
on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the
highest leakage current measured.
10-7-7-1 Dale 600 Patient Lead Tests

NEUTRAL POLARITY
1.) Closed Normal
2.) Open Normal
3.) Closed Reversed
4.) Open Reversed
10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function
selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to
ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in
previous tests.

10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all
data on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Maximum
Allowance Limit
AC Power GROUND
Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA
and
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test 220/240V 500uA 10uA
Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power Maximum
Source Allowance Limit
115V 20uA
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test
220/240V 5mA
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector

ECG Polarity Ground
Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN

OFF REVERSE OPEN

10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test
10-7-9-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.

Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst
case condition.
POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH

H (BLACK) PROBE
CONSOLE
POWER N (WHITE)
OUTLET
G (GREEN)
MOMENTARY
SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST
METER
Figure 10-9 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in
line voltage and test lead placement.
10-7-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter

The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter
utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.
The probe's imaging area is immersed in a saline solution along with a grounding probe from the
meter to complete the current path. Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds a free
ion to the water, making it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt or 1/2 gram salt per 1 liter of
water. If saline is not available, a mixture of 1 quart water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed
thoroughly, will substitute.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.
Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Connect the probe for test with the meter's appropriate adapter.
4.) Plug the saline probe into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector.
5.) Plug the probe adapter into the meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.

10-7-9-3 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter (cont’d)
Figure 10-10 Transducer Source Leakage Current Test
6.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position.

7.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath.
8.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half.
9.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-22 for every transducer.
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data.

10-7-9-4 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure
Figure 10-11 Check Without Probe Adapter
Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current.

2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's (Dale 600) “EXTERNAL” connector.
4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL position.
5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console.
6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath.
7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half.
8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-22 for every transducer.
10.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data.

10-7-9-5 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-14 and Table 10-
15. Record all data on the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY
switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged
.
Table 10-22 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current
Transducer Tested:
Tester Power Polarity Tester GROUND or

Unit Power Switch NUETRAL Switch Measurement
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED

OFF REV OPEN
OFF REV CLOSED

Section 10-8
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
CHASSIS FAILS
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed,
or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding
wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a
possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILS
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for
body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe
type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor
connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILS
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILS
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNIT
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit
a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILS
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

Customer Name: System ID: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Warranty/Contract/HBS
System Type Model Number: Serial Number: Manufacture Date:
Probe 1: Frequency: Scan Format*: Model Number: Serial Number:
* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING

OK? or Physical Inspection and Cleaning
Functional Check (if applicable) N/A (if applicable) Inspect Clean
B-Mode Function Console
M-Mode Function Monitor
Doppler Modes Functions Touch Panel
Color Modes Functions Air Filter
3D-Mode Function Probe Holders
Applicable Software Options External I/O
Applicable Hardware Options Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks
Control Panel Cables and Connectors
Monitor Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-RW, MOD, Printers)
Touch Panel
Measurement Accuracy
COMMENTS:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
10-30 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Max Value Value
Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Wheel
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Lead to Ground)

(Lead to Lead)

(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number Max Value Max Value

(from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________

10-32 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

INDEX
Numerics CKV - Video Converter Board, 5-35
2D Mode Checks CPD - Beamformer Sub-board, 5-25
Functional Checks, 4-8 CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-31
4D Shift Control, 6-9 CPV + Beamformer (CPR), 5-24
FrontEnd Processor, 5-23
Motordriver on CPP, 5-32
A,B Top Level Architecture, 5-9
Access (Extended) Voluson 730Pro / 730Pro V, 5-10
Windows Start Menu, 5-85 Voluson 730Pro / 730Pro V Basic, 5-4
Acoustic Noise Output, 3-49 Bluetooth Printer
Activation of Options, 8-21 Connection Scheme, 3-18
Adjustment Installation HP 5600 Series, 3-29
Keyboard Layout, 6-7 Installation Olivetti Job Jet 210, 3-29
Monitor, 6-2 Board Description
Printer Settings, 3-43 BackEnd, 5-36
Trackball, 6-6 FrontEnd, 5-24
Write Speed of DVD/CD Recorder, 4-30 Boot Up, 3-21, , 4-2
Administration of Full Backup data, 4-36 Bottom Housing of GEU
Air Flow Control, 5-63 Replacement Procedure, 8-64
Alpha-numeric Keyboard
Replacement Procedure, 8-72
Archiving Images, 4-40 C
Asic Select / Apertur Min, 7-31 Calculation Measurements
Auxiliary Devices Functional Checks, 4-25
Connection Scheme, 3-7 General remarks to perform, 4-25
Connection Scheme if "Kontron" SBC is installed, 3-8 Calibration
Connection Scheme if "Tyan" SBC is installed, 3-9 Monitor, 6-2
B/W Video Printer CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80 only)
Connection Scheme, 3-15 Replacement Procedure, 8-92
BackEnd Cine
ADD2-DVI (Add-On) Card, 5-36 Functional Checks, 4-21
Board Description, 5-36 CKV - Video manager Board
CKV - DMA-Controller/Video-Card, 5-36 Replacement Procedure, 8-113
CPE - Back Panel I/O-Card, 5-36 Color Flow Modes
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-37 Functional Checks, 4-15
Data Flow, 5-34 Common Diagnostics, 7-13
Hard Disk Drive, 5-36 Compliance, 1-11
SBC - Single Board Computer, 5-36 Connection
BackEnd Boards External USB-Devices, 3-19
Replacement Procedure, 8-111 Connection Panel (GES)
BackEnd Processor Replacement Procedure, 8-44
Theory, 5-33 Connection Scheme
Backup Auxiliary Devices, 3-7
Patient Database and Images, 4-31 Auxiliary Devices ("Kontron" SBC installed), 3-8
Beamformer Test Auxiliary Devices ("Tyan" SBC installed), 3-9
Asic Select / Apertur Min, 7-31 B/W Video Printer, 3-15
Summation Bus Test, 7-26 Bluetooth Printer, 3-18
Before Recovering the Hard disk, 5-88 Digital Color Printer, 3-17
Block diagram ECG, 3-11
BackEnd Processor, 5-33 Foot Switch, 3-10
Index I
Global Modem, 3-12 Disk Drive Module (GEM)

Line Printer, 3-16 Replacement Procedure, 8-79
S-VHS Video Recorder, 3-13 Distance Rod on GEU
Connectivity Replacement Procedure, 8-63
Worksheet, 3-59 Doppler Mode Checks
Contact Information, 1-11 Functional Checks, 4-13
Control Console DVD+(R)W Drive
Rotation, 5-61 Replacement Procedure, 8-80
Transport Lock, 6-5 Theory, 5-52
Control Console Test, 7-36
Control Panel, 4-4
CPE - Extension Board E
Replacement Procedure, 8-116 ECG
CPK - Motherboard Connection Scheme, 3-11
Replacement Procedure, 8-106 Functional Checks, 4-42
CPN - Main Power Module Theory, 5-52
Theory, 5-53 ECG Module (MAN6)
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board Replacement Procedure, 8-152
Replacement Procedure, 8-105 Electrical
CPR - Beamformer Board Requirements, 2-2
Replacement Procedure, 8-103 Electrical Safety, 1-8
CPV - Probe Connector Board Electronic User Manual (EUM)
Replacement Procedure, 8-108 Loading Procedure, 8-17
CPY - Power Switch Board Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-11
Replacement Procedure, 8-91 EMC
CPZ - Cover Board Electromagnetic Compatibility, 1-10
Replacement Procedure, 8-102 EMI Protection, 3-6
CRB - (USB to IDE) Converter Board Error Messages, 7-63
Replacement Procedure, 8-85 External I/O
CRS - Signal Processing Board Theory, 5-50
Replacement Procedure, 8-101 External USB-Devices
CRS Test Connection, 3-19
Analog Test, 5-81 Disconnection, 3-19
RAM Test, 5-81
CRW - CW-Doppler Board
F
Customer Assistance, 1-11
Fan
Fan for GEF-box (2 fan)
D Replacement Procedure, 8-138
Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-9 Fan for GEF-box (single)
Data Flow Replacement Procedure, 8-138
BackEnd, 5-34 Foot Rest
Control Description, 5-11 Replacement Procedure, 8-59
Data needed Foot Switch
in case of System crash or Errors, 7-3 Connection, 5-18
Delete Connection Scheme, 3-10
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-39 Formatting
Diagnostics, 5-67 Media, 4-29
Digital Color Printer Front Handle
Installation UP-D21MD, 3-27 Front Wheel
Installation UP-D23MD, 3-27 Replacement Procedure, 8-57
Disconnection FrontEnd
External USB-Devices, 3-19 Board Description, 5-24
II Index
CPK - Motherboard of the GEZ-Module, 5-26 H

CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 5-31 Hard disk (HDD)
CPR - Beamformer Board, 5-24 Replacement Procedure, 8-129
CPV - Probe Connector Board, 5-24 Reporting tool (S.M.A.R.T), 7-15
CPZ - Cover Board, 5-26 Hard Disk Drive, 5-36
CRS - Signal Processor Board, 5-27 Hardkey Board
CRW - CW Doppler Board, 5-26 Replacement Procedure, 8-73
FrontEnd Boards Hardkeys
Replacement Procedure, 8-99 Replacement Procedure, 8-76
Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Hardware Check, 8-140
Delete, 4-39 Hardware Options, 5-18
Load, 4-37 Hardware Test
Loading Procedure, 8-14 Beamformer SelfDiagnostic, 5-82
Restoring various Data, 8-33 Beamformer Test, 5-76
Save, 4-35 BM Test, 5-77
Transfer of Patient Database and Images, 8-30 CRS Test, 5-81
Functional Checks, 4-1 Front-End Test, 5-76
2D Mode, 4-8 Geraete Temperatur, 5-82
Brakes, 4-43 PW-Doppler Test, 5-81
Calculation Measurements, 4-25 Hardware Tests, 5-76
Cine Mode, 4-21 Hazard Icons, 1-4
Color Flow Modes, 4-15 How to check power, 7-4
Control Panel, 4-4 How to check status of the Diagnostic LED´s, 7-4
Doppler Modes, 4-13 How to delete the Service Database, 7-25
ECG Checkout, 4-42 How to repair Databases (*.mdb), 7-23
Generic Measurements, 4-22 How to test if CPR forces CPP to Power off TX, 7-42
M Mode, 4-11 How to use the Auto Tester, 7-20
Mechanical, 4-43 Human Safety, 1-7
MO-Drive, 4-28
Monitor Display, 4-6
Peripherals, 4-42 I
Probes/Connector Usage, 4-26 iLinq Interactive Platform, 5-65
Required Equipment, 4-1 Image Management
Volume Modes, 4-17 Functional Checks, 4-27
Fuses inside Primary Power Module (CPN), 5-57 Inrush Current, 2-2
Fuses on CPE-Board Installation
for Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-57 Bluetooth Printer HP 5600 Series, 3-29
Bluetooth Printer Olivetti Job Jet 210, 3-29
Digital Color Printer UP-D21MD, 3-27
G Digital Color Printer UP-D23MD, 3-27
General Cleaning, 10-10 Line Printer HP 990cxi, 3-25
General Operation and Selection Line Printer HP 995c, 3-25
in LINUX (and BIOS) menu, 5-87 Internal I/O
Generic Measurements Theory, 5-38
Functional Checks, 4-22 Theory ("Kontron" SBC installed), 5-39
GEZ Module Theory ("Tyan" SBC installed), 5-41
Main board Chassis, 5-22
GEZ-Box
Removement Procedure, 8-95 K
Global Modem Key Caps
LEDs, 5-19 Keyboard Layout
Location in the Unit, 5-19 Adjustment, 6-7
Guide for Probe cables KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN)
Replacement Procedure, 8-43 Replacement Procedure, 8-94
Index III
L Functional Checks, 4-6

Label Locations, 1-9 Monitor Front Housing
Line Printer Replacement Procedure, 8-51
Connection Scheme, 3-16 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover)
Installation HP 990cxi, 3-25 Replacement Procedure, 8-49
Installation HP 995c, 3-25 Monitor Mounting Plate
LINUX Replacement Procedure, 8-55
Memory Check, 5-100 Monitor Switch Assembly
Service Function Page, 5-87 Replacement Procedure, 8-53
List of Abbreviations, 9-2
Lithium Battery on PC-Board
Replacement Procedure, 8-128 N
Load Network IP Address Configuration, 3-60
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-37
User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-33
Loading Procedure O
Electronic User Manual (EUM), 8-17
Options
Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 8-14
Activation, 8-21
Ultrasound Application Software (UIS), 8-4
User Settings Only (Application Settings), 8-14
Location of Software DVD (System DVD), 3-7
Loudspeaker for Top Console
Replacement Procedure, 8-77 P
PC Diagnostics, 7-14
Audio Test, 7-18
CD/DVD Drive Test, 7-16
M CPU Tests, 7-14
M Mode
Hard Drive Tests, 7-15
Functional Checks, 4-11
Keyboard Test, 7-18
Main board Chassis
Memory Tests, 7-16
GEZ Module, 5-22
Monitor Test, 7-19
Main Power Module (CPN)
PCI Board Configuration Test, 7-17
USB Test, 7-17
Mains Power Switch and Input Connector
Video Test, 7-16
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests), 7-18
Map Network Drive, 3-61
PC-Board (Single Board Computer)
Mechanical Checks
Control Console, 4-43
Peripherals
Mechanical Safety, 1-7
Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-51
Media
Formatting, 4-29
Physical Dimensions, 3-49
Minimum Configuration
Power Distribution
to boot without using Ultrasound Hadware, 7-33
CPN - Primary Power Supply, 5-53
Minimum Configuration to boot up to certain levels, 7-34
Disk Drive Module (GEM), 5-57
Minimum Configuration to scan, 7-35
Power Off / Shutdown, 3-22, , 4-3
Models Covered, 1-2
Theory, 5-59
MO-Drive
Power On, 3-21, , 4-2
Power On/Boot Up Procedure, 5-58
Power Requirements
Theory, 5-52
electrical, 2-2
Monitor, 5-49
Power Stability Requirements, 2-3
Adjustment, 6-2
Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6
Calibration, 6-2
Printer Installation, 3-24
Printer Installation manually, 3-38
Theory, 5-49
Printer Remote Control Selection, 3-48
Monitor Display
Printer Settings
IV Index
Adjustment, 3-43 KVN2 - Fan for Main Power Module (CPN), 8-94
Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-12 Lithium Battery on PC-Board, 8-128
Probe Holder Loudspeaker for Top Console, 8-77
Replacement Procedure, 8-70 Main Power Module (CPN), 8-87
Probes, 3-57 Mains Power Switch and Input Connector, 8-93
Disconnecting, 4-42 MO-Drive, 8-83
Probes/Connector Usage Monitor, 8-47
Functional Checks, 4-26 Monitor Front Housing, 8-51
Product Icons, 1-5 Monitor Housing (left-, right-, and/or top cover), 8-49
Monitor Mounting Plate, 8-55
Monitor Switch Assembly, 8-53
R Monitor Task Lamp, 8-54
Rear Cover Options, 8-21
Replacement Procedure, 8-39 PC-Board (Single Board Computer), 8-118
Rear Wheel Probe Holder, 8-70
Replacement Procedure, 8-56 Rear Cover, 8-39
Reassembly the system, 8-141, , 8-148 Rear Wheel, 8-56
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4 Side Panel (left and right), 8-41
Regulatory, 6-1 Standby Switch, 8-45
Remote Software/Option Installation and Updates, 5-69 Top Cover, 8-40
Replacement Procedures Top Housing of GEU, 8-78
Alpha-numeric Keyboard, 8-72 Trackball, 8-69
BackEnd Boards, 8-111 Trackball top fixation ring, 8-70
Bottom Housing of GEU, 8-64 User Interface (GEU), 8-60
CCF - Power Primary Board (at CPN80 only), 8-92 Wheel control, 8-71
CKV - Video manager Board, 8-113 Re-programming Serial Number, 8-115
Connection Panel (GES), 8-44 Restoring various "Full Backup" data, 8-33
CPE - Extension Board, 8-116 Returning/Shipping
CPK - Motherboard, 8-106 Probes and Repair Parts, 1-10, , 8-4
CPP - Power Supply Secondary Board, 8-105
CPR - Beamformer Board, 8-103
CPV - Probe Connector Board, 8-108 S
CPY - Power Switch Board, 8-91 S.M.A.R.T. (Reporting tool)
CPZ - Cover Board, 8-102 Hard disk (HDD), 7-15
CRB - (USB to IDE) Converter Board, 8-85 Safety Considerations, 1-7
CRS - Signal Processing Board, 8-101 Save
CRW - CW-Doppler Board, 8-104 Full Backup (Presets, Config. & Appl. Settings), 4-35
Digipots and TGC Slider controls, 8-70 User Settings Only (Application Settings), 4-32
Disk Drive Module (GEM), 8-79 Screen Captures, 7-5
Distance Rod on GEU, 8-63 Service Adjustments, 6-1
DVD+(R)W Drive, 8-80 Service Function Page
ECG Module (MAN6), 8-152 LINUX, 5-87
Fan, 8-86 Service Platform
Fan for GEF-box (2 fan), 8-138 Access/Security, 5-64
Fan for GEF-box (single), 8-138 Service Home Page, 5-66
Foot Rest, 8-59 Service Page, 5-70
Front Handle, 8-68 Service Platform (SSW)
Front Wheel, 8-57 Upgrade Procedure, 8-15
FrontEnd Boards, 8-99 Sharing patient data and images
GEZ-Box, 8-95 between systems within the same network, 8-35
Guide for Probe cables, 8-43 Shutdown Procedure, 3-22, , 4-3
Hard disk (HDD), 8-129 Side Panel (left and right)
Hardkey Board, 8-73 Replacement Procedure, 8-41
Hardkeys, 8-76 Software
Key Caps (by special native language keys), 8-146 Architecture, 5-20
Index V
Data Location, 5-21 No Echo visible in Ultrasound field, 7-41

Software Options, 5-15 Noise disturbs the Image, 7-47
Standby Switch Printer, 7-57
Replacement Procedure, 8-45 System does not Power OFF/Shutdown, 7-52
Summation Bus Test, 7-26 System does not Power ON/Boot Up, 7-38
S-VHS Video Recorder Trackball, 7-51
Connection Scheme, 3-13 Ultrasound field disturbed by gray-pattern, 7-46
System Components, 5-3 Unable to Record to VCR, 7-56
System Configuration Volume Drive (3D/4D), 7-50
How to change Keyboard Layout, 3-52
How to change Language, 3-51
How to change the EUM Language, 3-51 U
How to change Video Norm, 3-52 Ultrasound Application Software (UIS)
How to enter Date and Time, 3-51 Loading Procedure, 8-4
How to enter Hospital Name, 3-51 Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
System Maintenance, 10-8 Upgrade Procedure
System Manufacturer, 1-12 Service Platform (SSW), 8-15
System Voltage Settings, 3-6 User Interface (GEU)
User Settings Only (Application Settings)
T Loading Procedure, 8-14
Task Lamp Utilities, 5-68
Theory
General, 5-2 V
Top Console Video
Theory, 5-43 Specifications, 3-56
Top Cover Virtual Console Observation, 7-10
Replacement Procedures, 8-40 Voltage Settings, 3-6
Top Housing of GEU Volume Modes
Replacement Procedure, 8-78 Functional Checks, 4-17
Trackball
Adjustment, 6-6
W
Transfer of Patient Database and Images
Warnings and Cautions, 1-7
using "Full Backup" function, 8-30
Weight without Monitor and Peripherals, 3-49
using cross-over network cable, 8-22
What is EMC?, 1-10
via Sonoview, 8-35
Wheel control
Troubleshooting
Boot up to certain levels, 7-34
Windows Start Menu
DVD/CD+(R)W, 7-59
Access (Extended), 5-85
Error Messages, 7-63
MO-Drive, 7-59
Monitor, 7-55
Network, 7-59
Screen Captures, 7-5
User Interface, 7-36
Voltage Points, 7-4
Troubleshooting Trees
Bad B-Image Quality, 7-44
Bad CFM and/or PW-Doppler Quality, 7-48
Bad Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Quality, 7-49
No Audio Output on Loudspeakers, 7-53
No Boot Procedure visible on Main Monitor, 7-40
No ECG line or ECG signal, 7-54
VI Index
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414; Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201, U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Ultraschall Tel: +49 (0) 212 28 02 208

Deutschland GmbH & Co KG
Beethovenstraße 239, Postfach 11 05 60
D-42655 Solingen, Germany

Voluson Gev730p PV PRP Kti105992 1 00

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Voluson Gev730p PV PRP Kti105992 1 00

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

GE Medical Systems

ADVANCED SERVICE DOCUMENTATION

Copyright© 2005 by General Electric Co.

• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM

• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION - FOR USA ONLY

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Revision Date Reason for change

List of Effected Pages

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

1 Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting

Important Precautions Chapter 3 - Installation Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures

Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Replacement Parts

Table of Contents Chapter 5 - Theory Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance

Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10

vii Table of Contents

General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2

viii Table of Contents

Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Connection of Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21

Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

Connectivity Installation Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59

Network IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60

Worksheet (Report) Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25

Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 31

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41

Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43

Table of Contents xiii

MOD (Magneto-Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18

Main board Chassis GEZ Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63

Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66

Windows Start Menu (for GE Field Engineers ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85

LINUX - Service Function Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87

xviii Table of Contents

Monitor Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Control Console, Transport Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5

Modification of Keyboard Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

Table of Contents xix

Collect Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Check Points Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4

Screen Captures and Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5

Virtual Console Observation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10

How to use the Auto Tester program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20

How to repair Databases (*.mdb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23

How to delete the Service Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25

Minimum Configuration to Boot/Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33

User Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36

Troubleshooting Trees and Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38

xxii Table of Contents

Ultrasound Application Software (UIS) Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

User Settings Only (Application Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 14

Full Backup (Presets, Configurations & Appl. Settings) Loading Procedure . . . . . 8 - 14

Service Platform (SSW) Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15